Technical guide - 6th edition 2010

Electrical installation handbook

Protection, control and electrical devices
 1 Protection of feeders
1.1 Introduction
The following definitions regarding electrical installations are derived from the
Standard IEC 60050.

Characteristics of installations
Electrical installation (of a building) An assembly of associated electrical
equipment to fulfil a specific purpose and having coordinated characteristics.

Origin of an electrical installation The point at which electrical energy is

delivered to an installation.

Neutral conductor (symbol N) A conductor connected to the neutral point of

a system and capable of contributing to the transmission of electrical energy.

Protective conductor PE A conductor required by some measures for

protection against electric shock for electrically connecting any of the following
parts:
- exposed conductive parts;
- extraneous conductive parts;
- main earthing terminal;
- earth electrode;
- earthed point of the source or artificial neutral.

PEN conductor An earthed conductor combining the functions of both

protective conductor and neutral conductor

Ambient temperature The temperature of the air or other medium where the
equipment is to be used.

Voltages
Nominal voltage (of an installation) Voltage by which an installation or part of
an installation is designated.
Note: the actual voltage may differ from the nominal voltage by a quantity within
permitted tolerances.

Currents
Design current (of a circuit) The current intended to be carried by a circuit in
normal service.

Current-carrying capacity (of a conductor) The maximum current which can

be carried continuously by a conductor under specified conditions without its
steady-state temperature exceeding a specified value.

Overcurrent Any current exceeding the rated value. For conductors, the rated
value is the current-carrying capacity.

Overload current (of a circuit) An overcurrent occurring in a circuit in the

absence of an electrical fault.

Short-circuit current An overcurrent resulting from a fault of negligible

impedance between live conductors having a difference in potential under
normal operating conditions.

268 Electrical devices | ABB

 1.1 Introduction

1 Protection of feeders

Conventional operating current (of a protective device) A specified value

of the current which cause the protective device to operate within a specified
time, designated conventional time.

Overcurrent detection A function establishing that the value of current in a

circuit exceeds a predetermined value for a specified length of time.

Leakage current Electrical current in an unwanted conductive path other

than a short circuit.

Fault current The current flowing at a given point of a network resulting from
a fault at another point of this network.

Wiring systems
Wiring system An assembly made up of a cable or cables or busbars and the
parts which secure and, if necessary, enclose the cable(s) or busbars.

Electrical circuits
Electrical circuit (of an installation) An assembly of electrical equipment of the
installation supplied from the same origin and protected against overcurrents
by the same protective device(s).

Distribution circuit (of buildings) A circuit supplying a distribution board.

Final circuit (of building) A circuit connected directly to current using

equipment or to socket-outlets.

Other equipment
Electrical equipment Any item used for such purposes as generation,
conversion, transmission, distribution or utilization of electrical energy, such as
machines, transformers, apparatus, measuring instruments, protective devices,
equipment for wiring systems, appliances.

Current-using equipment Equipment intended to convert electrical energy

into another form of energy, for example light, heat, and motive power.

Switchgear and controlgear Equipment provided to be connected to an

electrical circuit for the purpose of carrying out one or more of the following
functions: protection, control, isolation, switching.

Portable equipment Equipment which is moved while in operation or which can

easily be moved from one place to another while connected to the supply.

Hand-held equipment Portable equipment intended to be held in the hand

during normal use, in which the motor, if any, forms an integral part of the
equipment.

Stationary equipment Either fixed equipment or equipment not provided with

a carrying handle and having such a mass that it cannot easily be moved.

Fixed equipment Equipment fastened to a support or otherwise secured in

a specific location.

ABB | Electrical devices 269

 1.1 Introduction

1 Protection of feeders
Installation dimensioning
The flow chart below suggests the procedure to follow for the correct dimen-
sioning of a plant.

Load analysis:
- definition of the power absorbed by the loads and relevant position;
- definition of the position of the power distribution centers (switchboards);
- definition of the paths and calculation of the length of the connection elements;
- definition of the total power absorbed, taking into account the utilization factors
and demand factors.

Dimensioning of conductors:
- evaluation of the current (I b ) in the single connection elements;
- definition of the conductor type (conductors and insulation materials,
configuration,...);
- definition of the cross section and of the current carrying capacity;
- calculation of the voltage drop at the load current under specific reference
conditions (motor starting,…).

Verification of the voltage drop limits at the final loads

negative
outcome

Short-circuit current calculation maximum values at the busbars (beginning of

line) and minimum values at the end of line

Selection of protective circuit-breakers with:

- breaking capacity higher than the maximum prospective short-circuit current;
- rated current In not lower than the load curren Ib;
- characteristics compatible with the type of protected load (motors, capacitors...).

Verification of the protection of conductors:

- verification of the protection against overload: the rated current or the set current
of the circuit-breaker shall be higher than the load current, but lower than the
current carrying capacity of the conductor:
Ib ≤ In ≤ Iz
- verification of the protection against short-circuit: the specific let-through energy negative
outcome
by the circuit breaker under short-circuit conditions shall be lower than the specific
let-through energy which can be withstood by the cable:
I2t ≤ k2S2
- verification of the protection against indirect contacts (depending on the
distribution system).

Verification of the coordination with other equipments (discrimination and

1SDC010001F0901

negative back-up, verification of the coordination with switch disconnectors...)

outcome

Definition of the components (auxiliary circuits, terminals…) and switchboard

design

270 Electrical devices | ABB

 1 Protection of feeders
1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

For a correct dimensioning of a cable, it is necessary to:

• choose the type of cable and installation according to the environment;
• choose the cross section according to the load current;
• verify the voltage drop.

1.2.1 Current carrying capacity and methods of installation

Selection of the cable

The international reference Standard ruling the installation and calculation of
the current carrying capacity of cables in residential and industrial buildings is
IEC 60364-5-52 “Electrical installations of buildings – Part 5-52 Selection and
Erection of Electrical Equipment- Wiring systems”.
The following parameters are used to select the cable type:
• conductive material (copper or aluminium): the choice depends on cost,
dimension and weight requirements, resistance to corrosive environments
(chemical reagents or oxidizing elements). In general, the carrying capacity
of a copper conductor is about 30% greater than the carrying capacity of an
aluminium conductor of the same cross section. An aluminium conductor of
the same cross section has an electrical resistance about 60% higher and a
weight half to one third lower than a copper conductor.

• insulation material (none, PVC, XLPE-EPR): the insulation material affects the
maximum temperature under normal and short-circuit conditions and therefore
the exploitation of the conductor cross section [see Chapter 1.4 “Protection
against short-circuit”].

• the type of conductor (bare conductor, single-core cable without sheath,

single-core cable with sheath, multi-core cable) is selected according to me-
chanical resistance, degree of insulation and difficulty of installation (bends,
joints along the route, barriers...) required by the method of installation.

Table 1 shows the types of conductors permitted by the different me-

thods of installation.
Method of installation
Cable trunking
Conductors systems Cable Cable ladder,
Without Clipped Conduit On Support
and cables (including skirting ducting cable tray, cable
fixings direct systems insulators wire
trunking, flush floor systems brackets
trunking)
Bare conductors - - - - - - + -
Insulated conductors b - - + +a + - + -
Shealted Multi-core
+ + + + + + 0 +
cables
(including
armoured
Single-core 0 + + + + + 0 +
and mineral
insulated
+ Permitted.
– Not permitted.
0 Not applicable, or not normally used in practice.
a
Insulated conductors are admitted if the cable trunking systems provide at least the degree of protection IP4X or
IPXXD and if the cover can only be removed by means of a tool or a deliberate action.
b
Insulated conductors which are used as protective conductors or protective bonding conductors may use any
appropriate method of installation and need not be laid in conduits, trunking or ducting systems.

ABB | Electrical devices 271

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders
For industrial installations, multi-core cables are rarely used with cross section
greater than 95 mm2.

Methods of installation
To define the current carrying capacity of the conductor and therefore to iden-
tify the correct cross section for the load current, the standardized method of
installation that better suits the actual installation situation must be identified
among those described in the mentioned reference Standard.
From Tables 2 and 3 it is possible to identify the installation identification
number, the method of installation (A1, A2, B1, B2, C, D1, D2, E, F, G) and
the tables to define the theoretical current carrying capacity of the conductor
and any correction factors required to allow for particular environmental and
installation situations.

Table 2: Method of installation

Method of installation
Cable trunking
systems Cable Cable ladder,
Situations Without Clipped Conduit On Support
(including skirting ducting cable tray, cable
fixings direct systems insulators wire
trunking, flush floor systems brackets
trunking)
30, 31, 32,
Building Accessible 40 33 41, 42 6, 7, 8, 9, 12 43, 44 - 0
33, 34
voids
Not accessible 40 0 41, 42 0 43 0 0 0
Cable channel 56 56 54, 55 0 30, 31, 32, 34 - -
Buried in ground 72, 73 0 70, 71 - 70, 71 0 - -
-Embedded in structure 57, 58 3 1, 2, 59, 60 50, 51, 52, 53 46, 45 0 - -
Surface mounted - 20, 21, 22, 4, 5 6, 7, 8, 9, 12 6, 7, 8, 9 30, 31, 32, 34 36 -
23, 33
Overhead/free in air - 33 0 10, 11 10, 11 30, 31, 32, 34 36 35
Window frames 16 0 16 0 0 0 - -
Architrave 15 0 15 0 0 0 - -
Immersed 1 + + + - + 0 - -
- Not permitted.
0 Not applicable or not normally used in practice.
+ Follow manufacturer’s instructions.

272 Electrical devices | ABB

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders
Table 3: Examples of methods of installation
Reference method of
installation to be used to
Item
Methods of installation Description obtain current-carrying
No.
capacity

Insulated conductors or single-core

1 Room cables in conduit in a thermally A1
insulated wall a, c

Room Multi-core cables in conduit in a

2 A2
thermally insulated wall a, c

Multi-core cable direct in a thermally

3 Room A1
insulated wall a, c

Insulated conductors or single-core

cables in conduit on a wooden or
4 B1
masonry wall or spaced less than
0,3 × conduit diameter from itc

Multi-core cable in conduit on a

wooden or masonry wall or spaced
5 B2
less than 0,3 × conduit diameter
from it c

Insulated conductors or single-core

6 cables in cable trunking (includes
multi-compartment trunking) on a
wooden or masonry wall B1
– run horizontally b
7
– run vertically b, c
6 7

Multi-core cable in cable trunking

8 (includes multi-compartment trunking)
on a wooden or masonry wall Under consideration d

– run horizontally b Method B2 may be used

9
– run vertically b, c
8 9

NOTE 1 The illustrations are not intended to depict actual pr oduct or installation practices but are indicative of
the method described.

ABB | Electrical devices 273

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders
Reference method of
installation to be used to
Item
Me t h o d s o f i n s t a l l a t i o n Des cr i pti o n obtain current-carrying
No
capacity

10 Insulated conductors or single-core cable B1

in suspended cable trunking b

Multi-core cable in suspended cable B2

11
trunking b
10 11

Insulated conductors or single-core cable

12 A1
run in mouldings c,e

Insulated conductors in conduit or single-

15 A1
core or multi-core cable in architrave c, f

Insulated conductors in conduit or single-

16 core or multi-core cable in window A1
frames c,f

Single-core or multi-core cables:

20 – fixed on, or spaced less than 0,3 × C

cable diameter from a wooden or
masonry wall c

Single-core or multi-core cables:

C, with item 3 of
21 – fixed directly under a wooden or Table 5
masonry ceiling

Single-core or multi-core cables: Under consideration

22
– spaced from a ceiling Method E may be used

Fixed installation of suspended current- C, with item 3 of

23
using equipment Table 5

274 Electrical devices | ABB

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders
Reference method of
installation to be used to
Item obtain current-carrying
Methods of installation Description
No. capacity

Single-core or multi-core cables:

30
> <
0,3 De On unperforated tray run horizontally C with item 2
or vertically c, h of Table 5

> <
0,3 De

> <
0,3 De
31 Single-core or multi-core cables: E or F
On perforated tray run horizontally or
vertically c, h

> < 0,3 De

> <
0,3 De
32 E or F
Single-core or multi-core cables:
On brackets or on a wire mesh tray
run horizontally or vertically c, h

> <
0,3 De

Single-core or multi-core cables: E or F

33 Spaced more than 0,3 times or method G g
cable diameter from a wall

34 Single-core or multi-core cables: E or F

c
On ladder

35 Single-core or multi-core cable E or F

suspended from or incorporating
a support wire or harness

36 Bare or insulated conductors on G

insulators

ABB | Electrical devices 275

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders
Reference method of
installation to be used to
Item
Methods of installation Description obtain current-carrying
No.
capacity

1,5 D e V < 5 De
40 Single-core or multi-core cable in a B2
building void c, h, i 5 De V < 20 D e
VV B1
D
Dee

1,5 D e V < 20 D e
41 Insulated conductor in conduit in a B2
building void c, i, j, k V 20 D e
D
De
VV B1
e

Single-core or multi-core cable in conduit Under consideration

42 in a building void c, k The following may be used:
1,5 D e V < 20 D e
B2
V 20 D e
B1
1,5 D e V < 20 D e
Insulated conductors in cable ducting B2
43 in a building void c, i, j, k V 20 D e
D V
Dee B1

Under consideration
Single-core or multi-core cable in cable The following may be used:
44 ducting in a building void c, k 1,5 D e V < 20 D e
D VV
Dee B2
V 20 D e
B1
1,5 D e V < 5 De
Insulated conductors in cable ducting in B2
45 masonry having a thermal resistivity not 5 De V < 50 D e
V greater than 2 K· m/W c, h, i B1

Under consideration
Single-core or multi-core cable in cable The following may be used
ducting in masonry having a thermal 1,5 D e V < 20 D e
De V resistivity not greater than 2 K· m/W c B2
46
V 20 D e
B1
1,5 D e V < 5 De
Single-core or multi-core cable: B2
47 – in a ceiling void 5 De V < 50 D e
V – in a raised floor h, i
D
Dee B1

276 Electrical devices | ABB

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders
Reference method of
installation to be used to
Item
Me t h o d s o f i n s t a l l a t i o n Des cr i pti o n obtain current-carrying
No.
capacity

Insulated conductors or single-core

50 cable in flush cable trunking in the floor B1

Multi-core cable in flush cable trunking B2

51 in the floor

52 TV Insulated conductors or single-core

TV
TV TV B1
cables in flush cable trunking c
ICT
ISDN ICT
ISDN

53 Multi-core cable in flush trunking c B2

52 53

1,5 D e V < 20 D e
Insulated conductors or single-core
D V B2
Dee cables in conduit in an unventilated
54 cable channel run horizontally or
V 20 D e
vertically c, i, l, n
B1

Insulated conductors in conduit in

55 an open or ventilated cable channel B1
in the floor m, n

Sheathed single-core or multi-core

56 cable in an open or ventilated cable B1
channel run horizontally or vertically n

Single-core or multi-core cable direct in

masonry having a thermal resistivity not
57 greater than 2 K· m/W C
Without added mechanical
protection o, p

ABB | Electrical devices 277

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders
Reference method of
installation to be used to
Item
Methods of installation Description obtain current-carrying
No.
capacity

Single-core or multi-core cable direct in

masonry having a thermal resistivity not
58 greater than 2 K· m/W C

With added mechanical protection o, p

Insulated conductors or single-core

59 B1
cables in conduit in masonry p

p
60 Multi-core cables in conduit in masonry B2

Multi-core cable in conduit or in cable

70 D1
ducting in the ground

Single-core cable in conduit or in cable

71 D1
ducting in the ground

Sheathed single-core or multi-core cables

72 direct in the ground D2

– without added mechanical protection q

278 Electrical devices | ABB

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders
Reference method of
installation to be used to
Item
Methods of installation Description obtain current-carrying
No.
capacity

73 Sheathed single-core or multi-core cables D2

direct in the ground
– with added mechanical protection q

a
The inner skin of the wall has a thermal conductance of not less than 10 W/m 2 · K.
b
Values given for installation methods B1 and B2 are for a single circuit. Where there is more than
one circuit in the trunking the group reduction factor given in Table 5 is applicable, irrespective of the
presence of an internal barrier or partition.
c
Care shall be taken where the cable runs vertically and ventilation is restricted. The ambient temperature at
the top of the vertical section can be increased considerably. The matter is under consideration.
d
Values for reference method B2 may be used.
e The thermal resistivity of the enclosure is assumed to be poor because of the material of construction and
possible air spaces. Where the construction is thermally equivalent to methods of installation 6 or 7, reference
method B1 may be used.
f The thermal resistivity of the enclosure is assumed to be poor because of the material of construction and
possible air spaces. Where the construction is thermally equivalent to methods of installation 6, 7, 8, or 9,
reference methods B1 or B2 may be used.
g
The factors in Table 5 may also be used.
h
D e is the external diameter of a multi-core cable:
- 2,2 × the cable diameter when three single core cables are bound in trefoil, or
- 3 × the cable diameter when three single core cables are laid in flat formation.
i V is the smaller dimension or diameter of a masonry duct or void, or the vertical depth of a rectangular duct,
floor or ceiling void or channel. The depth of the channel is more important than the width.
j D e is the external diameter of conduit or vertical depth of cable ducting.
l D e is the external diameter of the conduit.
m
For multi-core cable installed in method 55, use current-carrying capacity for reference method B2.
n
It is recommended that these methods of installation are used only in areas where access is restricted to
authorized persons so that the reduction in current-carrying capacity and the fire hazard due to the
accumulation of debris can be prevented.

o For cables having conductors not greater than 16 mm 2, the current-carrying capacity may be higher.

p
Thermal resistivity of masonry is not greater than 2 K · m/W, the term “masonry” is taken to include brickwork,
concrete, plaster and the like (other than thermally insulating materials).
q The inclusion of directly buried cables in this item is satisfactory when the soil thermal resistivity is of the order
of 2,5 K · m/W. For lower soil resistivities, the current-carrying capacity for directly buried cables is appreci ably
higher than for cables in ducts.

ABB | Electrical devices 279

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders
Installation not buried in the ground: choice of the
cross section according to cable carrying capacity and
type of installation
The cable carrying capacity of a cable that is not buried in the ground is obtained
by using this formula:

where:
• I0 is the current carrying capacity of the single conductor at 30 °C reference
ambient temperature;
• k1 is the correction factor if the ambient temperature is other than 30 °C;
• k2 is the correction factor for cables installed bunched or in layers or for cables
installed in a layer on several supports.

Correction factor k1
The current carrying capacity of the cables that are not buried in the ground
refers to 30 °C ambient temperature. If the ambient temperature of the place
of installation is different from this reference temperature, the correction factor
k1 on Table 4 shall be used, according to the insulation material.

Table 4: Correction factor for ambient air temperature other than 30 °C

Insulation
Mineral (a)
Ambient PVC covered or
temperature (a) bare and exposed Bare not exposed
°C PVC XLPE and EPR to touch 70 °C to touch 105 °C
10 1.22 1.15 1.26 1.14
15 1.17 1.12 1.20 1.11
20 1.12 1.08 1.14 1.07
25 1.06 1.04 1.07 1.04
35 0.94 0.96 0.93 0.96
40 0.87 0.91 0.85 0.92
45 0.79 0.87 0.87 0.88
50 0.71 0.82 0.67 0.84
55 0.61 0.76 0.57 0.80
60 0.50 0.71 0.45 0.75
65 – 0.65 – 0.70
70 – 0.58 – 0.65
75 – 0.50 – 0.60
80 – 0.41 – 0.54
85 – – – 0.47
90 – – – 0.40
95 – – – 0.32
(a)
For higher ambient temperatures, consult manufacturer.

280 Electrical devices | ABB

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders
Correction factor k2
The cable current carrying capacity is influenced by the presence of other
cables installed nearby. The heat dissipation of a single cable is different from
that of the same cable when installed next to the other ones. The factor k2 is
tabled according to the installation of cables laid close together in layers or
bunches.

Definition of layer or bunch

layer: several circuits constituted by cables installed one next to another, spaced
or not, arranged horizontally or vertically. The cables on a layer are installed on
a wall, tray, ceiling, floor or on a cable ladder;

> 2 De2

a)

De1 De2

b)

c)
< 30 cm

1SDC010002F0001

Cables in layers: a) spaced; b) not spaced; c) double layer

bunch: several circuits constituted by cables that are not spaced and are not
installed in a layer; several layers superimposed on a single support (e.g. tray)
are considered to be a bunch.

ABB | Electrical devices 281

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders

a)

b)

1SDC010003F0001
c)

Bunched cables: a) in trunking; b) in conduit; c) on perforated tray

The value of correction factor k2 is 1 when:

• the cables are spaced:
- two single-core cables belonging to different circuits are spaced when the
distance between them is more than twice the external diameter of the
cable with the larger cross section;
- two multi-core cables are spaced when the distance between them is at
least the same as the external diameter of the larger cable;
• the adjacent cables are loaded less than 30 % of their current carrying capacity.

The correction factors for bunched cables or cables in layers are calculated by
assuming that the bunches consist of similar cables that are equally loaded. A
group of cables is considered to consist of similar cables when the calculation of
the current carrying capacity is based on the same maximum allowed operating
temperature and when the cross sections of the conductors is in the range of
three adjacent standard cross sections (e.g. from 10 to 25 mm2).
The calculation of the reduction factors for bunched cables with different cross
sections depends on the number of cables and on their cross sections. These
factors have not been tabled, but must be calculated for each bunch or layer.

282 Electrical devices | ABB

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders
The reduction factor for a group containing different cross sections of insulated
conductors or cables in conduits, cable trunking or cable ducting is:

n
where:
• k2 is the group reduction factor;
• n is the number of multi-core cables of the number of circuit in the group

The reduction factor obtained by this equation reduces the danger of overload-
ing of cables with a smaller cross section, but may lead to under utilization of
cables with a larger cross section. Such under utilization can be avoided if large
and small cables are not mixed in the same group.

The following tables show the reduction factor (k2).

Table 5: Reduction factor for grouped cables

To be used with
current-carrying
Arrangement Number of circuits or multi-core cables capacities,
Item (cables touching) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12 16 20 reference
1 Bunched in air, on a 1.00 0.80 0.70 0.65 0.60 0.57 0.54 0.52 0.50 0.45 0.41 0.38
surface, embedded or Methods A to F
enclosed
2 Single layer on wall, 1.00 0.85 0.79 0.75 0.73 0.72 0.72 0.71 0.70
floor or unperforated
tray
3 Single layer fixed 0.95 0.81 0.72 0.68 0.66 0.64 0.63 0.62 0.61 No further
reduction
directly under a Method C
factor for more
wooden ceiling than
4 Single layer on a 1.00 0.88 0.82 0.77 0.75 0.73 0.73 0.72 0.72 nine circuits or
multicore cables
perforated horizontal or
vertical tray
5 Single layer on ladder 1.00 0.87 0.82 0.80 0.80 0.79 0.79 0.78 0.78 Methods E and F
support or cleats etc.

NOTE 1 These factors are applicable to uniform groups of cables, equally loaded.
NOTE 2 Where horizontal clearances between adjacent cables exceeds twice their overall diameter, no reduction
factor need be applied.
NOTE 3 The same factors are applied to:
– groups of two or three single-core cables;
– multi-core cables.
NOTE 4 If a system consists of both two- and three-core cables, the total number of cables is taken as the number of
circuits, and the corresponding factor is applied to the tables for two loaded conductors for the two-core
cables, and to the tables for three loaded conductors for the three-core cables.
NOTE 5 If a group consists of n single-core cables it may either be considered as n/2 circuits of two loaded
conductors or n/3 circuits of three loaded conductors.
NOTE 6 For some installations and for other methods not provided for in the above table, it may be appropriate to use
factors calculated for specific case, see for example tables 6-7.

ABB | Electrical devices 283

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders
Table 6: Reduction factor for single-core cables with method of
installation F

Number of three-phase Use as a

Number of circuits (note 4)
Method of installation in Table 3 multiplier to
trays
1 2 3 rating for
Touching
Perforated 1 0.98 0.91 0.87
Three cables in
trays 31 2 0.96 0.87 0.81 horizontal
300 mm
(note 3) formation
3 0.95 0.85 0.78
20 mm
Touching

Vertical
perforated 1 0.96 0.86 – Three cables in
cable trays 31 vertical
225 mm 2 0.95 0.84 –
systems formation
(note 4)

Touching
Cable ladder 32 1 1.00 0.97 0.96
Three cables in
system
33 2 0.98 0.93 0.89 horizontal
cleats, etc. 300 mm formation
34 3 0.97 0.90 0.86
(note 3)
20 mm
≥2 D e e
D
Dee
Perforated 1 1.00 0.98 0.96
cable trays
system 31 2 0.97 0.93 0.89

(note 3) 300 mm 3 0.96 0.92 0.86

20 mm
Spaced
Vertical
perforated ≥2 D e 1 1.00 0.91 0.89 Three cables in
cable trays 31 trefoil formation
system 225 mm 2 1.00 0.90 0.86
(note 4)
De
2D e e
Cable D
Dee
Ladder system 32 1 1.00 1.00 1.00
cleats, etc. 33 2 0.97 0.95 0.93
300 mm
(note 3) 34 3 0.96 0.94 0.90
20 mm
NOTE 1 Values given are averages for the cable types and range of conductor sizes considered in Table 8 to 9 (installation methods
E, F and G). The spread of values is generally less than 5 %.
NOTE 2 Factors are given for single layers of cables (or trefoil groups) as shown in the table and do not apply when cables are
installed in more than one layer touching each other. Values for such installations may be significantly lower and should
be determined by an appropriate method.
NOTE 3 Values are given for vertical spacing between cable trays of 300 mm and at least 20 mm between cable trays and wall.
For closer spacing the factors should be reduced.
1SDC010004F0201

NOTE 4 Values are given for horizontal spacing between cable trays of 225 mm with cable trays mounted back to back. For closer
spacing the factors should be reduced.
NOTE 5 For circuits having more than one cable in parallel per phase, each three phase set of conductors should be considered
as a circuit for the purpose of this table.
NOTE 6 If a circuit consists of m parallel conductors per phase, then for determining the reduction factor this circuitshould be
considered as m circuits.

284 Electrical devices | ABB

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders
Table 7: Reduction factor for multi-core cables with method of
installation E

Number Number of cables per tray or ladder

of trays
Method of installation in Table 3
or 1 2 3 4 6 9
ladders
Touching

1 1,00 0,88 0,82 0,79 0,76 0,73

2 1,00 0,87 0,80 0,77 0,73 0,68
3 1,00 0,86 0,79 0,76 0,71 0,66
Perforated 6 1,00 0,84 0,77 0,73 0,68 0,64
cable tray
systems 31 20
20 mm
mm 300
300 mm
(note 3)
Spaced
Dee 1 1,00 1,00 0,98 0,95 0,91 –
2 1,00 0,99 0,96 0,92 0,87 –
3 1,00 0,98 0,95 0,91 0,85 –
20 mm
20 mm

Touching

1 1,00 0,88 0,82 0,78 0,73 0,72

225 mm 2 1,00 0,88 0,81 0,76 0,71 0,70
225
Vertical mm
perforated
cable tray 31
systems Spaced
(note 4)
1 1,00 0,91 0,89 0,88 0,87 –
2 1,00 0,91 0,88 0,87 0,85 –
225 mm
Dee
225
mm

Touching

1 0,97 0,84 0,78 0,75 0,71 0,68

Unperforated 31 2 0,97 0,83 0,76 0,72 0,68 0,63
cable tray
systems 3 0,97 0,82 0,75 0,71 0,66 0,61
6 0,97 0,81 0,73 0,69 0,63 0,58
20
20 mm
mm 300
300 mm

Touching

1 1,00 0,87 0,82 0,80 0,79 0,78

Cable ladder 32
systems, 2 1,00 0,86 0,80 0,78 0,76 0,73
cleats, etc. 33
3 1,00 0,85 0,79 0,76 0,73 0,70
(note 3) 34
6 1,00 0,84 0,77 0,73 0,68 0,64
20
20 mm
mm
300
300 mm
mm

ABB | Electrical devices 285

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders
Number Number of cables per tray or ladder
of trays
Method of installation in Table 3
or 1 2 3 4 6 9
ladders
Spaced
Dee
D 1 1,00 1,00 1,00 1,00 1,00 –
2 1,00 0,99 0,98 0,97 0,96 –
3 1,00 0,98 0,97 0,96 0,93 –
20mm
20 mm

NOTE 1 Values given are averages for the cable types and range of conductor sizes considered in Tables 8
to 9 (installation methods E, F and G). The spread of values is generally less than 5 %.

NOTE 2 Factors apply to single layer groups of cables as shown above and do not apply when cables are installed in
more than one layer touching each other. Values for such installations may be significantly lower and has to be
determined by an appropriate method.

NOTE 3 Values are given for vertical spacing between cable trays of 300 mm and at least 20 mm between cable
trays and wall. For closer spacing the factors should be reduced.

NOTE 4 Values are given for horizontal spacing between cable trays of 225 mm with cable trays mounted back to
back. For closer spacing the factors should be reduced.

286 Electrical devices | ABB

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders
To summarize:
The following procedure shall be used to determine the cross section of the
cable:
1. from Table 3 identify the method of installation;

2. from Table 4 determine the correction factor k1 according to insulation material

and ambient temperature;

3. use Table 5 for cables installed in layer or bunch, Table 6 for single-core
cables in a layer on several supports, Table 7 for multi-core cables in a layer
on several supports or the formula shown in the case of groups of cables
with different sections to determine the correction factor k2 appropriate for
the numbers of circuits or multi-core cables;

4. calculate the value of current I’b by dividing the load current Ib (or the rated
current of the protective device) by the product of the correction factors
calculated:

5. from Table 8 or from Table 9, depending on the method of installation, on

insulation and conductive material and on the number of live conductors,
determine the cross section of the cable with capacity I0 ≥ I’b;

6. the actual cable current carrying capacity is calculated by IZ = I0 k1 k2.

ABB | Electrical devices 287

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders
Table 8: Current carrying capacity of cables with PVC or EPR/XLPE
insulation (method A-B-C)
Installation A1 A2
method

Conductor Cu Al Cu Al Cu
XLPE XLPE XLPE XLPE XLPE
Insulation EPR PVC EPR PVC EPR PVC EPR PVC EPR

Loaded 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3
conductors
S[mm2]
1.5 19 17 14.5 13.5 13
18.5 16.5 14 13.0 23 20
2.5 26 23 19.5 18 20 15
19 14.5 14 25 22 18.5 17.5 19.5 18 14.5 13.5 31 28
4 35 31 26 24 27 25 20 18.5 33 30 25 23 26 24 19.5
20 17.5 42 37
6 45 40 34 31 35 32 26 24 42 38 32 29 33 31 25 23 54 48
10 61 54 46 42 48 44 36 32 57 51 43 39 45 41 33 31 75 66
16 81 73 61 56 64 58 48 43 76 68 57 52 60 55 44 41 100 88
25 106 95 80 73 84 76 63 57 99 89 75 68 78 71 58 53 133 117
35 131 117 99 89 103 94 77 70 121 109 92 83 96 87 71 65 164 144
50 158 141 119 108 125 113 93 84 145 130 110 99 115 104 86 78 198 175
70 200 179 151 136 158 142 118 107 183 164 139 125 145 131 108 98 253 222
95 241 216 182 164 191 171 142 129 220 197 167 150 175 157 130 118 306 269
120 278 249 210 188 220 197 164 149 253 227 192 172 201 180 150 135 354 312
150 318 285 240 216 253 226 189 170 290 259 219 196 230 206 172 155 393 342
185 362 324 273 245 288 256 215 194 329 295 248 223 262 233 195 176 449 384
240 424 380 321 286 338 300 252 227 386 346 291 261 307 273 229 207 528 450
300 486 435 367 328 387 344 289 261 442 396 334 298 352 313 263 237 603 514
400
500
630

288 Electrical devices | ABB

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders

B1 B2 C

Al Cu Al Cu Al
XLPE XLPE XLPE XLPE
PVC EPR PVC EPR PVC EPR PVC EPR PVC XLPE/EPR PVC

2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3

17.5 15.5 22 19.5 16.5 15 24 22 19.5 17.5

24 21 25 22 18.5 16.5 30 26 23 20 23 21 17.5 15.5 33 30 27 24 26 24 21 18.5
32 28 33 29 25 22.0 40 35 30 27 31 28 24 21 45 40 36 32 35 32 25
28 25.0
41 36 43 38 32 28 51 44 38 34 40 35 30 27.0 58 52 46 41 45 41 36 32
57 50 59 52 44 39 69 60 52 46 54 48 41 36 80 71 63 57 62 57 49 44
76 68 79 71 60 53 91 80 69 62 72 64 54 48 107 96 85 76 84 76 66 59
101 89 105 93 79 70 119 105 90 80 94 84 71 62 138 119 112 96 101 90 83 73
125 110 130 116 97 86 146 128 111 99 115 103 86 77 171 147 138 119 126 112 103 90
151 134 157 140 118 104 175 154 133 118 138 124 104 92 209 179 168 144 154 136 125 110
192 171 200 179 150 133 221 194 168 149 175 156 131 116 269 229 213 184 198 174 160 140
232 207 242 217 181 161 265 233 201 179 210 188 157 139 328 278 258 223 241 211 195 170
269 239 281 251 210 186 305 268 232 206 242 216 181 160 382 322 299 259 280 245 226 197
300 262 307 267 234 204 334 300 258 225 261 240 201 176 441 371 344 299 324 283 261 227

1SDC010006F0201
341 296 351 300 266 230 384 340 294 255 300 272 230 199 506 424 392 341 371 323 298 259
400 346 412 351 312 269 459 398 344 297 358 318 269 232 599 500 461 403 439 382 352 305
458 394 471 402 358 306 532 455 394 339 415 364 308 265 693 576 530 464 508 440 406 351

ABB | Electrical devices 289

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders
Table 8: Current carrying capacity of cables with PVC or EPR/XLPE
insulation (method E-F-G)

Installation
method E F

or

Cu Al Cu Al Cu Al Cu Al
XLPE XLPE XLPE XLPE XLPE XLPE XLPE XLPE
Insulation EPR PVC EPR PVC EPR PVC EPR PVC EPR PVC EPR PVC EPR PVC EPR PVC

Loaded 2 3 2 3
conductors
S[mm2]
1.5 26 22 23 18.5
2.5 36 30 28 23 32 25
2 24 19.5 5
4 49 40 38 31 42 34 32 26
6 63 51 49 39 54 43 42 33
10 86 70 67 54 75 60 58 46
16 115 94 91 73 100 80 77 61
25 149 119 108 89 127 101 97 78 161 131 121 98 13
135 110 103 845
35 185 148 135 111 158 126 120 96 200 162 150 122 169 137 129 105
50 225 180 164 135 192 153 146 117 242 196 184 149 207 167 159 128
70 289 232 211 173 246 196 187 150 310 251 237 192 268 216 206 166
95 352 282 257 210 298 238 227 183 377 304 289 235 328 264 253 203
120 410 328 300 244 346 276 263 212 437 352 337 273 383 308 296 237
150 473 379 346 282 399 319 304 245 504 406 389 316 444 356 343 274
185 542 434 397 322 456 364 347 280 575 463 447 363 510 409 395 315
240 641 514 470 380 538 430 409 330 679 546 530 430 607 485 471 375
300 741 593 543 439 621 497 471 381 783 629 613 497 703 561 547 434
400 940 754 740 600 823 656 663 526
500 1083 868 856 694 946 749 770 610
630 1254 1005 996 808 1088 855 899 711

290 Electrical devices | ABB

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders

or De
De
Cu Al Cu Al
XLPE XLPE XLPE XLPE
EPR PVC EPR PVC EPR PVCC EPR PVC

3 3H 3V 3H 3V 3H 3V 3H 3V

141 114 107 87 182 161 146 130 138 122 112 99
176 143 135 109 226 201 181 162 172 153 139 124
216 174 165 133 275 246 219 197 210 188 169 152
279 225 215 173 353 318 281 254 271 244 217 196
342 275 264 212 430 389 341 311 332 300 265 241
400 321 308 247 500 454 396 362 387 351 308 282
464 372 358 287 577 527 456 419 448 408 356 327
1SDC010100F0201

533 427 413 330 661 605 521 480 515 470 407 376
634 507 492 392 781 719 615 569 611 561 482 447
736 587 571 455 902 833 709 659 708 652 557 519
868 689 694 552 1085 1008 852 795 856 792 671 629
998 789 806 640 1253 1169 982 920 991 921 775 730
1151 905 942 746 1454 1362 1138 1070 1154 1077 900 852

ABB | Electrical devices 291

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders
Table 9: Current carrying capacity of cables with mineral insulation

Installation C
method

Sheath PVC covered or Bare cable not PVC covered or

bare exposed to touch exposed to touch bare exposed to touch

Loaded or or
conductors

S[mm2] 2 3 3 2 3 3 2 3
1.5 23 19 21 28 24 27 25 21
500 V 2.5 31 26 29 38 33 36 33 28
4 40 35 38 51 44 47 44 37
1.5 25 21 23 31 26 30 26 22
2.5 34 28 31 42 35 41 36 30
4 45 37 41 55 47 53 47 40
6 57 48 52 70 59 67 60 51
10 77 65 70 96 81 91 82 69
16 102 86 92 127 107 119 109 92
25 133 112 120 166 140 154 142 120
750 V 35 163 137 147 203 171 187 174 147
50 202 169 181 251 212 230 215 182
70 247 207 221 307 260 280 264 223
95 296 249 264 369 312 334 317 267
120 340 286 303 424 359 383 364 308
150 388 327 346 485 410 435 416 352
185 440 371 392 550 465 492 472 399
240 514 434 457 643 544 572 552 466

Note 1 For single-core cables the sheaths of the cables of the circuit are connected together at both ends.
Note 2 For bare cables exposed to touch, values should be multiplied by 0.9.
Note 3 De is the external diameter of the cable.
Note 4 For metallic sheath temperature 105 ϒC no correction for grouping need to be applied.

292 Electrical devices | ABB

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders

E or F G

Bare cable not PVC covered or Bare cable not

exposed
e to touch bare exposed to touch exposed to touch

or or or or
De De
De De

3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3
23 31 26 29 26 29 33.0
33 37.0
37
31 41 35 39 34 39 43 49
41 54 46 51 45 51 56 64
26 33 28 32 28 32 35 40
34 45 38 43 37 43 47 54
45 60 50 56 49 56 61 70
57 76 64 71 62 71 78 89
77 104 87 96 84 95 105 120
102 137 115 127 110 125 137 157
132 179 150 164 142 162 178 204
161 220 184 200 173 197 216 248
198 272 228 247 213 242 266 304

1SDC010007F0201
241 333 279 300 259 294 323 370
289 400 335 359 309 351 385 441
331 460 385 411 353 402 441 505
377 526 441 469 400 454 498 565
426 596 500 530 446 507 557 629
496 697 584 617 497 565 624 704

ABB | Electrical devices 293

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders
Installation in ground: choice of the cross section
according to cable carrying capacity and type of
installation
The current carrying capacity of a cable buried in the ground is calculated by
using this formula:

where:
• I0 is the current carrying capacity of the single conductor for installation in the
ground at 20°C reference temperature;
• k1 is the correction factor if the temperature of the ground is other than
20°C;
• k2 is the correction factor for adjacent cables;
• k3 is the correction factor if the soil thermal resistivity is different from the
reference value, 2.5 Km/W.

Correction factor k1
The current carrying capacity of buried cables refers to a ground temperature of
20 °C. If the ground temperature is different, use the correction factor k1 shown
in Table 10 according to the insulation material.

Table 10: Correction factors for ambient ground temperatures other

than 20 °C
Insulation
Ground
temperature
°C PVC XLPE and EPR
10 1.10 1.07
15 1.05 1.04
25 0.95 0.96
30 0.89 0.93
35 0.84 0.89
40 0.77 0.85
45 0.71 0.80
50 0.63 0.76
55 0.55 0.71
60 0.45 0.65
65 – 0.60
70 – 0.53
75 – 0.46
80 – 0.38

294 Electrical devices | ABB

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders
Correction factor k2
The cable current carrying capacity is influenced by the presence of other cables
installed nearby. The heat dissipation of a single cable is different from that of
the same cable installed next to the other ones.
The correction factor k2 is obtained by the formula:

Tables 11, 12, and 13 show the factor k2’ values for single-core and multi-
core cables that are laid directly in the ground or which are installed in buried
ducts, according to their distance from other cables or the distance between
the ducts.
Table 11: Reduction factors for cables laid directly in the ground
(installation method D2)
Cable to cable clearance
Number
of circuits Nil One cable
0,125 m 0,25 m 0,5 m
(cables touching) diameter
2 0,75 0,80 0,85 0,90 0,90
3 0,65 0,70 0,75 0,80 0,85
4 0,60 0,60 0,70 0,75 0,80
5 0,55 0,55 0,65 0,70 0,80
6 0,50 0,55 0,60 0,70 0,80
7 0,45 0,51 0,59 0,67 0,76
8 0,43 0,48 0,57 0,65 0,75
9 0,41 0,46 0,55 0,63 0,74
12 0,36 0,42 0,51 0,59 0,71
16 0,32 0,38 0,47 0,56 0,38
20 0,29 0,35 0,44 0,53 0,66
Multi-core cables

a a
a a

Single-core cables

a a

NOTE 1 Values given apply to an installation depth of 0,7 m and a soil thermal resistivity of 2,5 K·m/W.
They are average values for the range of cable sizes and types quoted for Tables 8-15-16. The process
of averaging, together with rounding off, can result in some cases in errors up to ±10 %. (Where more
precise values are required they may be calculated by methods given in IEC 60287-2-1.)

NOTE 2 In case of a thermal resistivity lower than 2, 5 K· m/W the corrections factors can, in general, be
increased and can be calculated by the methods given in IEC 60287-2-1.

NOTE 3 If a circuit consists of m parallel conductors per phase, then for determining the reduction
factor, this circuit should be considered as m circuits.

ABB | Electrical devices 295

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders
Table 12: Reduction factors for multi-core cables laid in single way
ducts in the ground (installation method D1)

Multi-core cables in single-way ducts

Nu m b e r o f c a b l e s Du ct to du ct cl ear an ce
Ni l
0,25 m 0,5 m 1,0 m
(ducts touching)
2 0,85 0,90 0,95 0,95
3 0,75 0,85 0,90 0,95

4 0,70 0,80 0,85 0,90

5 0,65 0,80 0,85 0,90
6 0,60 0,80 0,80 0,90

7 0,57 0,76 0,80 0,88

8 0,54 0,74 0,78 0,88
9 0,52 0,73 0,77 0,87
10 0,49 0,72 0,76 0,86
11 0,47 0,70 0,75 0,86
12 0,45 0,69 0,74 0,85

13 0,44 0,68 0,73 0,85

14 0,42 0,68 0,72 0,84
15 0,41 0,67 0,72 0,84
16 0,39 0,66 0,71 0,83
17 0,38 0,65 0,70 0,83
18 0,37 0,65 0,70 0,83
19 0,35 0,64 0,69 0,82
20 0,34 0,63 0,68 0,82

Multi-core cables

NOTE 1 Values given apply to an installation depth of 0,7 m and a soil thermal resistivity of 2,5 K·m/W.
They are average values for the range of cable sizes and types quoted for Tables 8-15-16. The process
of averaging, together with rounding off, can result in some cases in errors up to ±10 %. (Where more
precise values are required they may be calculated by methods given in IEC 60287-2-1.)

NOTE 2 In case of a thermal resistivity lower than 2, 5 K· m/W the corrections factors can, in general, be
increased and can be calculated by the methods given in IEC 60287-2-1.

NOTE 3 If a circuit consists of m parallel conductors per phase, then for determining the reduction
factor, this circuit should be considered asm circuits.

296 Electrical devices | ABB

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders
Table 13: Reduction factors for single-core cables laid in single way
ducts in the ground (installation method D1)

Single-core cables in non- magnetic single-way ducts

Number of single-
core circuits of two Duct to duct clearance
or three cables
Nil
0,25 m 0,5 m 1,0 m
(ducts touching)
2 0,80 0,90 0,90 0,95
3 0,70 0,80 0,85 0,90
4 0,65 0,75 0,80 0,90
5 0,60 0,70 0,80 0,90
6 0,60 0,70 0,80 0,90
7 0,53 0,66 0,76 0,87
8 0,50 0,63 0,74 0,87

9 0,47 0,61 0,73 0,86

10 0,45 0,59 0,72 0,85
11 0,43 0,57 0,70 0,85

12 0,41 0,56 0,69 0,84

13 0,39 0,54 0,68 0,84
14 0,37 0,53 0,68 0,83
15 0,35 0,52 0,67 0,83
16 0,34 0,51 0,66 0,83
17 0,33 0,50 0,65 0,82
18 0,31 0,49 0,65 0,82
19 0,30 0,48 0,64 0,82
20 0,29 0,47 0,63 0,81

Single-core cables

a a

a a

NOTE 1 Values given apply to an installation depth of 0,7 m and a soil thermal resistivity of 2,5 K·m/W.
They are average values for the range of cable sizes and types quoted for Tables 8-15-16. The process
of averaging, together with rounding off, can result in some cases in errors up to ±10 %. (Where more
precise values are required they may be calculated by methods given in IEC 60287-2-1.)

NOTE 2 In case of a thermal resistivity lower than 2, 5 K· m/W the corrections factors can, in general, be
increased and can be calculated by the methods given in IEC 60287-2-1.

NOTE 3 If a circuit consists of m parallel conductors per phase, then for determining the reduction
factor, this circuit should be considered asm circuits.

ABB | Electrical devices 297

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders
For correction factor k2’’:
• for cables laid directly in the ground or if there are not other conductors within
the same duct, the value of k2’’ is 1;
• if several conductors of similar sizes are present in the same duct (for the
meaning of “group of similar conductors”, see the paragraphs above), k2’’ is
obtained from the first row of Table 5;
• if the conductors are not of similar size, the correction factor is calculated by
using this formula:

where:
n is the number of circuits in the duct.

Correction factor k3
Soil thermal resistivity influences the heat dissipation of the cable. Soil with low
thermal resistivity facilitates heat dissipation, whereas soil with high thermal
resistivity limits heat dissipation. IEC 60364-5-52 states as reference value for
the soil thermal resistivity 2.5 Km/W.

Table 14: Correction factors for soil thermal resistivities other than
2.5 Km/W
Thermal resistivity, K · m/W 0,5 0,7 1 1,5 2 2,5 3

Correction factor for cables in buried ducts 1,28 1,20 1,18 1,1 1,05 1 0,96
Correction factor for direct buried cables 1,88 1,62 1,5 1,28 1,12 1 0,90

NOTE 1 The correction factors given have been averaged over the range of conductor sizes and types of
installation included in Tables 8-15-16. The overall accuracy of correction factors is within ±5 %.

NOTE 2 The correction factors are applicable to cables drawn into buried ducts; for cables laid direct in the
ground the correction factors for thermal resistivities less than 2,5 K· m/W will be higher. Where more precise
values are required they may be calculated by methods given in the IEC 60287 series.

NOTE 3 The correction factors are applicable to ducts buried at depths of up to 0,8 m.

NOTE 4 It is assumed that the soil properties are uniform. No allowance had been made for the possibility of
moisture migration which can lead to a region of high thermal resistivity around the cable. If partial drying out of
the soil is foreseen, the permissible current rating should be derived by the methods specified in the IEC 60287
series.

298 Electrical devices | ABB

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders
To summarize:
Use this procedure to determine the cross section of the cable:
1. from Table 10, determine the correction factor k1 according to the insulation
material and the ground temperature;

2. use Table 11, Table 12, Table 13 or the formula for groups of non-similar ca-
bles to determine the correction factor k2 according to the distance between
cables or ducts;

3. from Table 14 determine factor k3 corresponding to the soil thermal resistivity;

4. calculate the value of the current I’b by dividing the load current Ib (or the
rated current of the protective device) by the product of the correction factors
calculated:

5. from Tables 15-16, determine the cross section of the cable with I0 ≥ I’b, ac-
cording to the method of installation, the insulation and conductive material
and the number of live conductors;

6. the actual cable current carrying capacity is calculated by.

Table 15: Current carrying capacity of cables buried in the ground

(installation method D1)
Installation
D1
method

Conductor Cu Al
XLPE XLPE
Insulation EPR PVC EPR PVC

Loaded
2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3
conductors
S[mm2]
1.5 25 21 22 18
2.5 33 28 29 24 26 22 22 18.5
4 48 36 37 30 33 28 29 24
6 53 44 46 38 42 35 36 30
10 71 58 60 50 55 46 47 39
16 91 75 78 64 71 59 61 50
25 116 96 99 82 90 75 77 64
35 139 115 119 98 108 90 93 77
50 164 135 140 116 128 106 109 91
1SDC010008F0201

70 203 167 173 143 158 130 135 112

95 239 197 204 169 186 154 159 132
120 271 223 231 192 211 174 180 150
150 306 251 261 217 238 197 204 169
185 343 281 292 243 267 220 228 190
240 395 324 336 280 307 253 262 218
300 496 365 379 316 346 286 296 247

ABB | Electrical devices 299

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders
Table 16: Current carrying capacity of cables buried in the ground
(installation method D2)

Installation
D2
method

Conductor Cu Al
XLPE XLPE
Insulation EPR PVC EPR PVC

Loaded
2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3
conductors
S[mm2]
1.5 27 23 22 19
2.5 35 30 28 24
4 46 39 38 33
6 58 49 48 41
10 77 65 64 54
16 100 74 83 70 76 64 63 53
25 129 107 110 92 98 82 82 69
35 155 129 132 110 117 98 98 83
50 183 153 156 130 139 117 117 99

1SDC010012F0201
70 225 188 192 162 170 144 145 122
95 270 226 230 193 204 172 173 148
120 306 257 261 220 233 197 200 169
150 343 287 293 246 261 220 224 189
185 387 324 331 278 296 250 255 214
240 448 375 382 320 343 290 298 250
300 502 419 427 359 386 326 336 282

300 Electrical devices | ABB

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders

1SDC010009F0201

ABB | Electrical devices 301

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders
Note on current carrying capacity tables and loaded conductors
Tables 8, 9, 15 and 16 provide the current carrying capacity of loaded conductors
(current carrying conductors) under normal service conditions.
In single-phase circuits, the number of loaded conductors is two.
In balanced or slightly unbalanced three-phase circuits the number of loaded
conductors is three, since the current in the neutral conductor is negligible.
In three-phase systems with high unbalance, where the neutral conductor
in a multi-core cable carries current as a result of an unbalance in the phase
currents the temperature rise due to the neutral current is offset by the reduction
in the heat generated by one or more of the phase conductors. In this case the
conductor size shall be chosen on the basis of the highest phase current. In all
cases the neutral conductor shall have an adequate cross section.

Effect of harmonic currents on balanced three-phase

systems: reduction factors for harmonic currents in four-
core and five-core cables with four cores carrying current
Where the neutral conductor carries current without a corresponding reduction
in load of the phase conductors, the current flowing in the neutral conductor
shall be taken into account in ascertaining the current-carrying capacity of the
circuit.
This neutral current is due to the phase currents having a harmonic content
which does not cancel in the neutral. The most significant harmonic which
does not cancel in the neutral is usually the third harmonic. The magnitude of
the neutral current due to the third harmonic may exceed the magnitude of the
power frequency phase current. In such a case the neutral current will have a
significant effect on the current-carrying capacity of the cables in the circuit.

N
1SDC010007F0001

302 Electrical devices | ABB

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders
Equipment likely to cause significant harmonic currents are, for example, fluore-
scent lighting banks and dc power supplies such as those found in computers
(for further information on harmonic disturbances see the IEC 61000).
The reduction factors given in Table 16 only apply in the balanced three-phase
circuits (the current in the fourth conductor is due to harmonics only) to cables
where the neutral conductor is within a four-core or five-core cable and is of
the same material and cross-sectional area as the phase conductors. These
reduction factors have been calculated based on third harmonic currents. If
significant, i.e. more than 10 %, higher harmonics (e.g. 9th, 12th, etc.) are
expected or there is an unbalance between phases of more than 50 %, then
lower reduction factors may be applicable: these factors can be calculated only
by taking into account the real shape of the current in the loaded phases.
Where the neutral current is expected to be higher than the phase current then
the cable size should be selected on the basis of the neutral current.
Where the cable size selection is based on a neutral current which is not signi-
ficantly higher than the phase current, it is necessary to reduce the tabulated
current carrying capacity for three loaded conductors.
If the neutral current is more than 135 % of the phase current and the cable size
is selected on the basis of the neutral current, then the three phase conductors
will not be fully loaded. The reduction in heat generated by the phase conduc-
tors offsets the heat generated by the neutral conductor to the extent that it is
not necessary to apply any reduction factor to the current carrying capacity for
three loaded conductors.

Table 17: Reduction factors for harmonic currents in four-core and

five-core cables
Third harmonic content
of phase current Reduction factor
Current to take in Current to take in
Size selection is account for the Size selection is account for the
% based on phase cable selection based on neutral cable selection
current Ib’ current Ib’

0 ÷ 15 1 - -

15 ÷ 33 0.86 -
-

33 ÷ 45 - - 0.86

> 45 - - 1

Where IN is the current flowing in the neutral calculated as follows:

Ib is the load current;

ktot is the total correction factor;
kIII is the third harmonic content of phase current;

ABB | Electrical devices 303

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders
Example of cable dimensioning in a balanced three-
phase circuit without harmonics
Dimensioning of a cable with the following characteristics:
• conductor material: : copper

• insulation material: : PVC

• type of cable: : multi-core

• installation: : cables bunched on horizontal

perforated tray

• load current: : 100 A

Installation conditions:
• ambient temperature: : 40 °C

• adjacent circuits with a) three-phase circuit consisting of 4

single-core cables, 4x50 mm2;

b) three-phase circuit consisting of

one multi-core cable, 1x(3x50) mm2;

c) three-phase circuit consisting of 9

single-core (3 per phase) cables,
9x95 mm2;

d) single-phase circuit consisting of 2

single-core cables, 2x70 mm2.

a c
b

d
1SDC010008F0001

304 Electrical devices | ABB

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders
Procedure:
Type of installation
In Table 3, it is possible to find the reference number of the installation and
the method of installation to be used for the calculations. In this example, the
reference number is 31, which corresponds to method E (multi-core cable on
tray).

Correction factor of temperature k1

From Table 4, for a temperature of 40 °C and PVC insulation material,
k1 = 0.87.

Correction factor for adjacent cables k2
For the multi-core cables grouped on the perforated tray see Table 5.
As a first step, the number of circuits or multi-core cables present shall be
determined; given that:

• each circuit a), b) and d) constitute a separate circuit;

• circuit c) consists of three circuits, since it is composed by three cables in
parallel per phase;
• the cable to be dimensioned is a multi-core cable and therefore constitutes
a single circuit;
the total number of circuits is 7.
Referring to the row for the arrangement (cables bunched) and to the column
for the number of circuits (7)

After k1 and k2 have been determined, I’b is calculated by:

From Table 8, for a multi-core copper cable with PVC insulation, method of
installation E, with three loaded conductors, a cross section with current carrying
capacity of I0 ≥ I’b = 212.85 A, is obtained. A 95 mm2 cross section cable can
carry, under Standard reference conditions, 238 A.
The current carrying capacity, according to the actual conditions of installation,
is Iz = 238 . 0.87. 0.54 = 111.81 A

ABB | Electrical devices 305

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders
Example of dimensioning a cable in a balanced three-
phase circuit with a significant third-harmonic content
Dimensioning of a cable with the following characteristics:
• conductor material: : copper

• insulation material: : PVC

• type of cable: : multi-core

• installation: : layer on horizontal perforated tray

• load current: : 115 A

Installation conditions:
• ambient temperature: : 30 °C

• no adjacent circuits.

Procedure:
Type of installation
On Table 3, it is possible to find the reference number of the installation and
the method of installation to be used for the calculations. In this example, the
reference number is 31, which corresponds to method E (multi-core cable on
tray).

Temperature correction factor k1

From Table 4, for a temperature of 30 °C and PVC insulation material

Correction factor for adjacent cables k2

As there are no adjacent cables, so

After k1 and k2 have been determined, I’b is calculated by:

306 Electrical devices | ABB

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders
If no harmonics are present, from Table 8, for a multi-core copper cable with
PVC insulation, method of installation E, with three loaded conductors, a cross
section with current carrying capacity of I0 ≥ I’b = 115 A, is obtained. A 35 mm2
cross section cable can carry, under Standard reference conditions, 126 A.
The current carrying capacity, according to the actual conditions of installation,
is still 126 A, since the value of factors k1 and k2 is 1.

The third harmonic content is assumed to be 28%.

Table 16 shows that for a third harmonic content of 28% the cable must be
dimensioned for the current that flows through the phase conductors, but a
reduction factor of 0.86 must be applied. The current I’b becomes:

From Table 8, a 50 mm2 cable with carrying capacity of 153 A shall be selected.

If the third harmonic content is 40 %, Table 17 shows that the cable shall be
dimensioned according to the current of the neutral conductor and a reduction
factor of 0.86 must be applied.
The current in the neutral conductor is:

and the value of current I’b is:

From Table 8, a 70 mm2 cable with 196 A current carrying capacity shall be
selected.
If the third harmonic content is 60 %, Table 16 shows that the cable shall be
dimensioned according to the current of the neutral conductor, but a reduction
factor of 1 must be applied.
The current in the neutral conductor is:

and current I’b is:

From Table 8, a 95 mm2 cable with current carrying capacity of 238 A must
be selected.

ABB | Electrical devices 307

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders
1.2.2 Voltage drop
In an electrical installation it is important to evaluate voltage drops from the
point of supply to the load.
The performance of a device may be impaired if supplied with a voltage different
from its rated voltage. For example:
• motors: the torque is proportional to the square of the supply voltage; there-
fore, if the voltage drops, the starting torque shall also decrease, making it
more difficult to start up motors; the maximum torque shall also decrease;
• incandescent lamps: the more the voltage drops the weaker the beam be-
comes and the light takes on a reddish tone;
• discharge lamps: in general, they are not very sensitive to small variations in
voltage, but in certain cases, great variation may cause them to switch off;
• electronic appliances: they are very sensitive to variations in voltage and that
is why they are fitted with stabilizers;
• electromechanical devices: the reference Standard states that devices such
as contactors and auxiliary releases have a minimum voltage below which
their performances cannot be guaranteed. For a contactor, for example, the
holding of the contacts becomes unreliable below 85% of the rated voltage.

To limit these problems the Standards set the following limits:

• IEC 60364-5-52 “Electrical installations of buildings. Selection and erection of

electrical equipment - Wiring systems” Annex G states that the voltage drop
between the origin of an installation and any load point should not be greater
than the values in Table 18 expressed with respect to the value of the nominal
voltage of the installation.

Table 18: Voltage drop

Lighting Other uses
Type of installation
% %
A – Low voltage installations supplied directly from a public low 3 5
voltage distribution system
B – Low voltage installation supplied from private LV supply a 6 8
a As far as possible, it is recomm ended that voltage drop within the final circuits do not exceed those indicated in
installation type A.
When the main wiring systems of the installations are longer than 100 m, these voltage drops may be increased
by 0,005 % per metre of wiring system beyond 100 m, without this supplement being greater than 0,5 %.
Voltage drop is determined from the demand by the current-using equipment, applying diversity factors where
applicable, or from the values of the design current of the circuits.

NOTE 1 A greater voltage drop may be accepted

– for motor during starting periods,
– for other equipment with high inrush current,
provided that in both cases it is ensured that the voltage variations remains within the limits specified in
the relevant equipment standard.

NOTE 2 The following temporary conditions are excluded:

– voltage transients;
– voltage variation due to abnormal operation.

308 Electrical devices | ABB

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders

• IEC 60204-1”Safety of machinery – Electrical equipment of machines – General

requirements” Clause 13.5 recommends that: “the voltage drop from the point
of supply to the load shall not exceed 5% of the rated voltage under normal
operating conditions”.
• IEC 60364-7-714 “Electrical installations of buildings - Requirements for
special installations or locations - External lighting installations” Clause 714.512
requires that “the voltage drop in normal service shall be compatible with the
conditions arising from the starting current of the lamps”.

Voltage drop calculation

For an electrical conductor with impedance Z, the voltage drop is calculated
by the following formula:

where
• k is a coefficient equal to:
- 2 for single-phase and two-phase systems;
- for three-phase systems;
• Ib [A] is the load current; if no information are available, the cable carrying
capacity Iz shall be considered;
• L [km] is the length of the conductor;
• n is the number of conductors in parallel per phase;
• r [Ω/km] is the resistance of the single cable per kilometre;
• x [Ω/km] is the reactance of the single cable per kilometre;

• cosϕ is the power factor of the load:

Normally, the percentage value in relation to the rated value Ur is calculated

by:

Resistance and reactance values per unit of length are set out on the following
table by cross-sectional area and cable formation, for 50 Hz; in case of 60 Hz,
the reactance value shall be multiplied by 1.2.

ABB | Electrical devices 309

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders
Table 1: Resistance and reactance per unit of length of copper cables

single-core cable two-core/three-core cable

S r[Ω/km] x[Ω/km] r[Ω/km] x[Ω/km]
[mm2] @ 80 [°C] @ 80 [°C]
1.5 14.8 0.168 15.1 0.118
2.5 8.91 0.156 9.08 0.109
4 5.57 0.143 5.68 0.101
6 3.71 0.135 3.78 0.0955
10 2.24 0.119 2.27 0.0861
16 1.41 0.112 1.43 0.0817
25 0.889 0.106 0.907 0.0813
35 0.641 0.101 0.654 0.0783
50 0.473 0.101 0.483 0.0779
70 0.328 0.0965 0.334 0.0751
95 0.236 0.0975 0.241 0.0762
120 0.188 0.0939 0.191 0.074
150 0.153 0.0928 0.157 0.0745
185 0.123 0.0908 0.125 0.0742
240 0.0943 0.0902 0.0966 0.0752
300 0.0761 0.0895 0.078 0.075

Table 2: Resistance and reactance per unit of length of aluminium

cables

single-core cable two-core/three-core cable

S r[Ω/km] x[Ω/km] r[Ω/km] x[Ω/km]
[mm2] @ 80 [°C] @ 80 [°C]
1.5 24.384 0.168 24.878 0.118
2.5 14.680 0.156 14.960 0.109
4 9.177 0.143 9.358 0.101
6 6.112 0.135 6.228 0.0955
10 3.691 0.119 3.740 0.0861
16 2.323 0.112 2.356 0.0817
25 1.465 0.106 1.494 0.0813
35 1.056 0.101 1.077 0.0783
50 0.779 0.101 0.796 0.0779
70 0.540 0.0965 0.550 0.0751
95 0.389 0.0975 0.397 0.0762
120 0,310 0.0939 0.315 0.074
150 0.252 0.0928 0.259 0.0745
185 0.203 0.0908 0.206 0.0742
240 0.155 0.0902 0.159 0.0752
300 0.125 0.0895 0.129 0.075

310 Electrical devices | ABB

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders
The following tables show the ∆Ux [V/(A.km)] values by cross section and for-
mation of the cable according to the most common cosϕ values.

Table 3: Specific voltage drop at cosϕ = 1 for copper cables

cosϕ = 1
single-core cable two-core cable three-core cable
S[mm2] single-phase three-phase single-phase three-phase
1.5 29.60 25.63 30.20 26.15
2.5 17.82 15.43 18.16 15.73
4 11.14 9.65 11.36 9.84
6 7.42 6.43 7.56 6.55
10 4.48 3.88 4.54 3.93
16 2.82 2.44 2.86 2.48
25 1.78 1.54 1.81 1.57
35 1.28 1.11 1.31 1.13
50 0.95 0.82 0.97 0.84
70 0.66 0.57 0.67 0.58
95 0.47 0.41 0.48 0.42
120 0.38 0.33 0.38 0.33
150 0.31 0.27 0.31 0.27
185 0.25 0.21 0.25 0.22
240 0.19 0.16 0.19 0.17
300 0.15 0.13 0.16 0.14

Table 4: Specific voltage drop at cosϕ = 0.9 for copper cables

cosϕ = 9
single-core cable two-core cable three-core cable
S[mm2] single-phase three-phase single-phase three-phase
1.5 26.79 23.20 27.28 23.63
2.5 16.17 14.01 16.44 14.24
4 10.15 8.79 10.31 8.93
6 6.80 5.89 6.89 5.96
10 4.14 3.58 4.16 3.60
16 2.64 2.28 2.65 2.29
25 1.69 1.47 1.70 1.48
35 1.24 1.08 1.25 1.08
50 0.94 0.81 0.94 0.81
70 0.67 0.58 0.67 0.58
95 0.51 0.44 0.50 0.43
120 0.42 0.36 0.41 0.35
150 0.36 0.31 0.35 0.30
185 0.30 0.26 0.29 0.25
240 0.25 0.22 0.24 0.21
300 0.22 0.19 0.21 0.18

ABB | Electrical devices 311

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders
Table 5: Specific voltage drop at cosϕ = 0.85 for copper cables
cosϕ = 0.85
single-core cable two-core cable three-core cable
S[mm2] single-phase three-phase single-phase three-phase
1.5 25.34 21.94 25.79 22.34
2.5 15.31 13.26 15.55 13.47
4 9.62 8.33 9.76 8.45
6 6.45 5.59 6.53 5.65
10 3.93 3.41 3.95 3.42
16 2.51 2.18 2.52 2.18
25 1.62 1.41 1.63 1.41
35 1.20 1.04 1.19 1.03
50 0.91 0.79 0.90 0.78
70 0.66 0.57 0.65 0.56
95 0.50 0.44 0.49 0.42
120 0.42 0.36 0.40 0.35
150 0.36 0.31 0.35 0.30
185 0.30 0.26 0.29 0.25
240 0.26 0.22 0.24 0.21
300 0.22 0.19 0.21 0.18

Table 6: Specific voltage drop at cosϕ = 0.8 for copper cables

cosϕ = 0.8
single-core cable two-core cable three-core cable
S[mm2] single-phase three-phase single-phase three-phase
1.5 23.88 20.68 24.30 21.05
2.5 14.44 12.51 14.66 12.69
4 9.08 7.87 9.21 7.98
6 6.10 5.28 6.16 5.34
10 3.73 3.23 3.74 3.23
16 2.39 2.07 2.39 2.07
25 1.55 1.34 1.55 1.34
35 1.15 0.99 1.14 0.99
50 0.88 0.76 0.87 0.75
70 0.64 0.55 0.62 0.54
95 0.49 0.43 0.48 0.41
120 0.41 0.36 0.39 0.34
150 0.36 0.31 0.34 0.29
185 0.31 0.26 0.29 0.25
240 0.26 0.22 0.24 0.21
300 0.23 0.20 0.21 0.19

312 Electrical devices | ABB

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders
Table 7: Specific voltage drop at cosϕ=0.75 for copper cables
cosϕ = 0.75
single-core cable two-core cable three-core cable
S[mm2] single-phase three-phase single-phase three-phase
1.5 22.42 19.42 22.81 19.75
2.5 13.57 11.75 13.76 11.92
4 8.54 7.40 8.65 7.49
6 5.74 4.97 5.80 5.02
10 3.52 3.05 3.52 3.05
16 2.26 1.96 2.25 1.95
25 1.47 1.28 1.47 1.27
35 1.10 0.95 1.08 0.94
50 0.84 0.73 0.83 0.72
70 0.62 0.54 0.60 0.52
95 0.48 0.42 0.46 0.40
120 0.41 0.35 0.38 0.33
150 0.35 0.31 0.33 0.29
185 0.30 0.26 0.29 0.25
240 0.26 0.23 0.24 0.21
300 0.23 0.20 0.22 0.19

Table 8: Specific voltage drop at cosϕ = 1 for aluminium cables

cosϕ = 1
single-core cable two-core cable three-corecable
S[mm2] single-phase three-phase single-phase three-phase
1.5 48.77 42.23 49.76 43.09
2.5 29.36 25.43 29.92 25.91
4 18.35 15.89 18.72 16.21
6 12.22 10.59 12.46 10.79
10 7.38 6.39 7.48 6.48
16 4.65 4.02 4.71 4.08
25 2.93 2.54 2.99 2.59
35 2.11 1.83 2.15 1.87
50 1.56 1.35 1.59 1.38
70 1.08 0.94 1.10 0.95
95 0.78 0.67 0.79 0.69
120 0.62 0.54 0.63 0.55
150 0.50 0.44 0.52 0.45
185 0.41 0.35 0.41 0.36
240 0.31 0.27 0.32 0.28
300 0.25 0.22 0.26 0.22

ABB | Electrical devices 313

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders
Table 9: Specific voltage drop at cosϕ = 0.9 for aluminium cables
cosϕ = 0.9
single-core cable two-core cable three-core cable
S[mm2] single-phase three-phase single-phase three-phase
1.5 44.04 38.14 44.88 38.87
2.5 26.56 23.00 27.02 23.40
4 16.64 14.41 16.93 14.66
6 11.12 9.63 11.29 9.78
10 6.75 5.84 6.81 5.89
16 4.28 3.71 4.31 3.73
25 2.73 2.36 2.76 2.39
35 1.99 1.72 2.01 1.74
50 1.49 1.29 1.50 1.30
70 1.06 0.92 1.06 0.91
95 0.78 0.68 0.78 0.68
120 0.64 0.55 0.63 0.55
150 0.53 0.46 0.53 0.46
185 0.44 0.38 0.44 0.38
240 0.36 0.31 0.35 0.30
300 0.30 0.26 0.30 0.26

Table 10: Specific voltage drop at cosϕ = 0.85 for aluminium cables
cosϕ = 0.85
single-core cable two-core cable three-core cable
S[mm2] single-phase three-phase single-phase three-phase
1.5 41.63 36.05 42.42 36.73
2.5 25.12 21.75 25.55 22.12
4 15.75 13.64 16.02 13.87
6 10.53 9.12 10.69 9.26
10 6.40 5.54 6.45 5.58
16 4.07 3.52 4.09 3.54
25 2.60 2.25 2.63 2.27
35 1.90 1.65 1.91 1.66
50 1.43 1.24 1.43 1.24
70 1.02 0.88 1.01 0.88
95 0.76 0.66 0.76 0.65
120 0.63 0.54 0.61 0.53
150 0.53 0.46 0.52 0.45
185 0.44 0.38 0,43 0.37
240 0.36 0.31 0.35 0.30
300 0.31 0.27 0.30 0.26

314 Electrical devices | ABB

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders
Table 11: Specific voltage drop at cosϕ = 0.8 for aluminium cables
cosϕ = 0.8
single-core cable two-core cable three-core cable
S[mm2] single-phase three-phase single-phase three-phase
1.5 39.22 33.96 39.95 34.59
2.5 23.67 20.50 24.07 20.84
4 14.85 12.86 15.09 13.07
6 9.94 8.61 10.08 8.73
10 6.05 5.24 6.09 5.27
16 3.85 3.34 3.87 3.35
25 2.47 2.14 2.49 2.16
35 1.81 1.57 1.82 1.57
50 1.37 1.18 1.37 1.18
70 0.98 0.85 0.97 0.84
95 0.74 0.64 0.73 0.63
120 0.61 0.53 0.59 0.51
150 0.51 0.45 0.50 0.44
185 0.43 0.38 0.42 0.36
240 0.36 0.31 0.34 0.30
300 0.31 0.27 0.30 0.26

Table 12: Specific voltage drop at cosϕ = 0.75 for aluminium cables
cosϕ = 0.75
single-core cable two-core cable three-core cable
S[mm2] single-phase three-phase single-phase three-phase
1.5 36.80 31.87 37.47 32.45
2.5 22.23 19.25 22.58 19.56
4 13.95 12.08 14.17 12.27
6 9.35 8.09 9.47 8.20
10 5.69 4.93 5.72 4.96
16 3.63 3.15 3.64 3.15
25 2.34 2.02 2.35 2.03
35 1.72 1.49 1.72 1.49
50 1.30 1.13 1.30 1.12
70 0.94 0.81 0.92 0.80
95 0.71 0.62 0.70 0.60
120 0.59 0.51 0.57 0.49
150 0.50 0.43 0.49 0.42
185 0.42 0.37 0.41 0.35
240 0.35 0.31 0.34 0.29
300 0.31 0.27 0.29 0.25

ABB | Electrical devices 315

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders
Example 1
To calculate a voltage drop on a three-phase cable with the following
specifications:
• rated voltage: 400 V;
• cable length: 25 m;
• cable formation: single-core copper cable, 3x50 mm2;
• load current Ib: 100 A;
• power factor cosϕ: 0.9.

From Table 4, for a 50 mm2 single-core cable it is possible to read that a ∆Ux
voltage drop corresponds to 0.81 V/(A⋅km). By multiplying this value by the
length in km and by the current in A, it results:

which corresponds to this percentage value:

Example 2
To calculate a voltage drop on a three-phase cable with the following
specifications:
• rated voltage: 690 V;
• cable length: 50 m;
• cable formation: multi-core copper cable, 2x(3x10) mm2;
• load current Ib: 50 A;
• power factor cosϕ: 0.85.
From Table 5, for a multi-core 10 mm2 cable it is possible to read that ∆Ux
voltage drop corresponds to 3.42 V/(A⋅km). By multiplying this value by the
length in km and by the current in A, and by dividing it by the number of cables
in parallel, it results:

which corresponds to this percentage value:

316 Electrical devices | ABB

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders
Method for defining the cross section of the conductor according to
voltage drop in the case of long cables
In the case of long cables, or if particular design specifications impose low
limits for maximum voltage drops, the verification using as reference the cross
section calculated on the basis of thermal considerations (calculation according
to chapter 1.2.1 “Current carrying capacity and methods of installation”) may
have a negative result.
To define the correct cross section, the maximum ∆Uxmax value calculated by
using the formula:

is compared with the corresponding values on Tables 4÷12 by choosing the

smallest cross section with a ∆Ux value lower than ∆Uxmax.

Example:
Supply of a three-phase load with Pu = 35 kW (Ur=400 V, fr= 50 Hz, cosϕ=0.9)
with a 140 m cable installed on a perforated tray, consisting of a multi-core
copper cable with EPR insulation.
Maximum permitted voltage drop 2%.

Load current Ib is:

The Table 8 of Chapter 1.2.1 shows S = 10 mm2.

From Table 4, for the multi-core 10 mm2 cable it is possible to read that the
voltage drop per A and per km is 3.60 V/(A⋅km). By multiplying this value by
the length in km and by the current in A, it results:

which corresponds to this percentage value:

This value is too high.

Formula (3) shows:

ABB | Electrical devices 317

 1.2 Installation and dimensioning of cables

1 Protection of feeders
From Table 4 a cross section of 50 mm2 can be chosen.
For this cross section ∆Ux = 0.81< 1.02 V/(A⋅km).
By using this value it results:

This corresponds to a percentage value of:

1.2.3 Joule-effect losses

Joule-effect losses are due to the electrical resistance of the cable.

The lost energy is dissipated in heat and contributes to the heating of the
conductor and of the environment.
A first estimate of three-phase losses is:

whereas single-phase losses are:

where:
• Ib is the load current [A];
• r is the phase resistance per unit of length of the cable at 80 °C [Ω/km] (see
Table 1);
• L is the cable length [m].

Table 1: Resistance values [Ω/km] of single-core and multi-core

cables in copper and aluminium at 80 °C
Single-core cable Two-core/three-core cable
S
[mm2] Cu AI Cu AI
1.5 14.8 24.384 15.1 24.878
2.5 8.91 14.680 9.08 14.960
4 5.57 9.177 5.68 9.358
6 3.71 6.112 3.78 6.228
10 2.24 3.691 2.27 3.740
16 1.41 2.323 1.43 2.356
25 0.889 1.465 0.907 1.494
35 0.641 1.056 0.654 1.077
50 0.473 0.779 0.483 0.796
70 0.328 0.540 0.334 0.550
95 0.236 0.389 0.241 0.397
120 0.188 0.310 0.191 0.315
150 0.153 0.252 0.157 0.259
185 0.123 0.203 0.125 0.206
240 0.0943 0.155 0.0966 0.159
300 0.0761 0.125 0.078 0.129

318 Electrical devices | ABB

 1 Protection of feeders
1.3 Protection against overload

The Standard IEC 60364-4-43 “Electrical installation of buildings - Protection

against overcurrent” specifies coordination between conductors and overload
protective devices (normally placed at the beginning of the conductor to be
protected) so that it shall satisfy the two following conditions:

Where:
• Ib is the current for which the circuit is dimensioned;
• Iz is the continuous current carrying capacity of the cable;
• In is the rated current of the protective device; for adjustable protective releases,
the rated current In is the set current;
• I2 is the current ensuring effective operation in the conventional time of the
protective device.

Ib Iz 1.45Iz

1SDC010009F0001
In I2

According to condition (1) to correctly choose the protective device, it is

necessary to check that the circuit-breaker has a rated (or set) current that is:
• higher than the load current, to prevent unwanted tripping;
• lower than the current carrying capacity of the cable, to prevent cable overload.
The Standard allows an overload current that may be up to 45% greater than
the current carrying capacity of the cable but only for a limited period.
The verification of condition (2) is not necessary in the case of circuit-breakers
because the protective device is automatically tripped if:
• I2 = 1.3⋅In for circuit-breakers complying with IEC 60947-2 (circuit-breakers
for industrial use);
• I2 = 1.45⋅In for circuit-breakers complying with IEC 60898 (circuit-breakers for
household and similar installations).
Therefore, for circuit-breakers, if In ≤ Iz, the formula I2 ≤ 1.45⋅Iz will also be
verified.
When the protective device is a fuse, it is also essential to check formula (2)
because IEC 60269-2-1 on “Low-voltage fuses” states that a 1.6⋅In current
must automatically melt the fuse. In this case, formula (2) becomes
1.6⋅I n ≤ 1.45⋅I z or I n ≤ 0.9⋅I z.

ABB | Electrical devices 319

 1.3 Protection against overload

1 Protection of feeders
To summarize: to carry out by a fuse protection against overload, the following
must be achieved:

≤ ≤

and this means that the cable is not fully exploited.

1SDC010010F0001
Ib Iz

In

Circuit-breaker: choice of rated current

1SDC010011F0001
Ib 0.9 Iz

In
Fuse: choice of rated current

Where the use of a single conductor per phase is not feasible, and the currents
in the parallel conductors are unequal, the design current and requirements for
overload protection for each conductor shall be considered individually.

Examples
Example 1
Load specifications
Pr = 120 kW; Ur = 400 V; cosϕ = 0.9; three-phase load so Ib = 192.6 A

Cable specifications

Iz = 239 A

Protective device specifications

XT3N 250 TMD In 200; set current I1 = 1 x In = 200 A

320 Electrical devices | ABB

 1.3 Protection against overload

1 Protection of feeders
Example 2
Load specifications
Pr = 70 kW; cosϕ = 0.9; Ur = 400 V; three-phase load so Ib = 112 A

Cable specifications

Iz = 134 A

Protective device specifications

XT2N 160 Ekip LSI In160; set current I1 = 0.8 x In = 128 A

Example 3
Load specifications
Pr = 100 kW; cosϕ = 0.9; Ur = 400 V ; three-phase load so Ib = 160 A

Cable specifications

Iz = 190 A

Protective device specifications

XT3N 250 TMD In 200; set current I1 = 0.9 x In = 180 A

Example 4
Load specifications
Pr = 50 kW; cosϕ = 0.9; Ur = 230 V ; single-phase load so Ib = 241 A

Cable specifications
Iz = 262 A

Protective device specifications

XT4N 250 Ekip LSIG In 250; set current I1 = 0.98 x In = 245 A

ABB | Electrical devices 321

 1 Protection of feeders
1.4 Protection against short-circuit

A cable is protected against short-circuit if the specific let-through energy of

the protective device (I2t) is lower or equal to the withstood energy of the cable
(k2S2):

where
• I 2t is the specific let-through energy of the protective device which
can be read on the curves supplied by the manufacturer (see Part 1,
Chapter 2.4 “Specific let-through energy curves”) or from a direct
calculation in the case of devices that are not limiting and delaying;
• S is the cable cross section [mm2]; in the case of conductors in parallel it is
the cross section of the single conductor;
• k is a factor that depends on the cable insulating and conducting material.
The values of the most common installations are shown in Table 1; for a more
detailed calculation, see Annex C.

Table 1: Values of k for phase conductor

Conductor insulation

PVC PVC EPR Rubber Mineral

≤300 mm2 >300 mm2 XLPE 60 °C
PVC Bare
Initial temperature °C 70 70 90 60 70 105
Final temperature °C 160 140 250 200 160 250
Material of conductor:
Copper 115 103 143 141 115 135/115 a
Aluminium 76 68 94 93 - -
tin-soldered joints 115 - - - - -
in copper conductors
a
This value shall be used for bare cables exposed to touch.

NOTE 1 Other values of k are under consideration for.

- small conductors (particularly for cross section less than 10 mm2);
- duration of short-circuit exceeding 5 s;
- other types of joints in conductors;
1SDC010010F0201

- bare conductors.

NOTE 2 The nominal current of the short-circuit protective device may be greater than the current carrying
capacity of the cable.

NOTE 3 The above factors are based on IEC 60724.

322 Electrical devices | ABB

 1.4 Protection against short-circuit

1 Protection of feeders
Table 2 shows the maximum withstood energy for cables according to the cross
section, the conductor material and the type of insulation, which are calculated
by using the parameters of Table 1.

Table 2: Maximum withstood energy for cables k2 S2 [(kA)2 s]

Cross section [mm2 ]

Cable k 1.5 2.5 4 6 10 16 25 35
-2 -2 -1 -1 1
Cu 115 2.98·10 8.27·10 2.12·10 4.76·10 1.32 3.39 8.27 1.62·10
PVC -2 -2 -2 -1 -1
Al 76 1.30·10 3.61·10 9.24·10 2.08·10 5.78·10 1.48 3.61 7.08
-2 -1 -1 -1 1 1
Cu 143 4.60·10 1.28·10 3.27·10 7.36·10 2.04 5.23 1.28·10 2.51·10
EPR/XLPE -2 -2 -1 -1 -1 1
Al 94 1.99·10 5.52·10 1.41·10 3.18·10 8.84·10 2.26 5.52 1.08·10
-2 -1 -1 -1 1 1
Cu 141 4.47·10 1.24·10 3.18·10 7.16·10 1.99 5.09 1.24·10 2.44·10
Rubber -2 -2 -1 -1 -1 1
Al 93 1.95·10 5.41·10 1.38·10 3.11·10 8.65·10 2.21 5.41 1.06·10

Cross section [mm2 ]

Cable k 50 70 95 120 150 185 240 300
1 1 2 2 2 2 2 3
Cu 115 3.31·10 6.48·10 1.19·10 1.90·10 2.98·10 4.53·10 7.62·10 1.19·10
PVC

1SDC010002F0901
1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
Al 76 1.44·10 2.83·10 5.21·10 8.32·10 1.30·10 1.98·10 3.33·10 5.20·10
1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3
Cu 143 5.11·10 1.00·10 1.85·10 2.94·10 4.60·10 7.00·10 1.18·10 1.84·10
EPR/XLPE 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2
Al 94 2.21·10 4.33·10 7.97·10 1.27·10 1.99·10 3.02·10 5.09·10 7.95·10
1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3
Cu 141 4.97·10 9.74·10 1.79·10 2.86·10 4.47·10 6.80·10 1.15·10 1.79·10
G2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2
Al 93 2.16·10 4.24·10 7.81·10 1.25·10 1.95·10 2.96·10 4.98·10 7.78·10

The formula (1) must be verified along the whole length of the cable. Due to the
shape of the specific let-through energy curve of a circuit breaker, it is generally
sufficient to verify formula (1) only for the maximum and minimum short-circuit
current that may affect the cable. The maximum value is normally the value
of the three-phase short-circuit current at the beginning of the line, while the
minimum value is the value of the phase to neutral short-circuit current (phase
to phase if the neutral conductor is not distributed) or phase to earth at the
end of the cable.

ABB | Electrical devices 323

 1.4 Protection against short-circuit

1 Protection of feeders
2
[(KA) s] 102

10

10-1

10-2

10-3

1SDC010011F0001
10-1 1 10 [KA]

This verification can be simplified by comparing only the let-through energy value
of the circuit-breaker at the maximum short-circuit current with the withstood
energy of the cable and by ensuring that the circuit breaker trips instantaneously
at the minimum short-circuit current: the threshold of the short-circuit protection
(taking into consideration also the tolerances) shall therefore be lower than the
minimum short-circuit current at the end of the conductor.

324 Electrical devices | ABB

1 Protection of feeders
Calculation of short-circuit current at end of the conductor
Minimum short-circuit current can be calculated by the following approximate
formulas:

with non-distributed neutral conductor (2.1)

with distributed neutral conductor (2.2)

where:
• Ikmin is the minimum value of the prospective short-circuit current [kA];
• Ur is the supply voltage [V];
• U0 is the phase to earth supply voltage [V];
• ρ is the resistivity at 20 °C of the material of the conductors in Ωmm2/m and
is:
- 0.018 for copper;
- 0.027 for aluminium;
• L is the length of the protected conductor [m];
• S is the cross section of the conductor [mm2];
• ksec is the correction factor which takes into account the reactance of the
cables with cross section larger than 95 mm2:

S[mm2] 120 150 185 240 300

ksec 0.9 0.85 0.80 0.75 0.72

ABB | Electrical devices 325

 1.4 Protection against short-circuit

1 Protection of feeders
• kpar is the correcting coefficient for conductors in parallel:


number of parallel
conductors 2 3 4 5
kpar* 2 2.7 3 3.2
*kpar = 4 (n-1)/n where: n = number of conductors in parallel per phase

• m is the ratio between the resistances of the neutral conductor and the phase
conductor (if they are made of the same material m is the ratio between the
cross section of the phase conductor and the cross section of the neutral
conductor).
After calculating the minimum short-circuit current, verify that

where:
• I3 is the current that trips the magnetic protection of the circuit-breaker;
• 1.2 is the tolerance at the trip threshold.

Example
U Ur = 415 V
Ik = 30 kA
Choice of CB1
CB1
System data:
XT1N160 In160
Rated voltage 415 V
Ik = 30 kA
Cable Section 50 mm2

Cable data:
PVC Cu L = 150 m
1SDC010011F0201

Insulated copper conductor in PVC

Length = 150 m Iz = 134.0 A
S = 50 mm2
Iz = 134 A
L

326 Electrical devices | ABB

 1.4 Protection against short-circuit

1 Protection of feeders
Protection against short-circuit at the beginning of the conductor
XT1N 160 In160 (breaking capacity 36 kA@415 V)
I2t (@30 kA) = 7.5 10-1 (kA)2s
k2S2 = 1152 ⋅ 502 = 3.31.101 (kA)2s
The cable is therefore protected against short-circuit at the beginning of the
conductor.

Protection against short-circuit at end of the conductor

The minimum short-circuit current at end of the conductor (ksec=1 and kpar=1) is:

The magnetic threshold of the circuit breaker XT1N 160 In160 is set at 1600 A.
If tolerance is 20%, the circuit breaker shall definitely trip if the values exceed
1920 A; the cable is therefore fully protected against short-circuit.

Maximum protected length

The formula (3), when solved for the length, enables the maximum length pro-
tected by the protective device to be obtained for a precise instantaneous trip
threshold. In Table 3, the maximum protected length can be identified for a given
cross section of the cable and for the setting threshold of the instantaneous
protection of the circuit breaker against short-circuit:
- three-phase system, 400 V rated voltage;
- non-distributed neutral;
- copper conductor with resistivity equal to 0.018 Ωmm2/m.
The values on the table below take into account the 20% tolerance coefficient
for the magnetic trip value, the increase in cable resistivity due to heating caused
by the short-circuit current and the reduction of voltage due to the fault.
The correction factors shown after the table must be applied if the system
conditions are different from the reference conditions.

ABB | Electrical devices 327

 1.4 Protection against short-circuit

1 Protection of feeders
Table 3: Maximum protected length
section [mm2]
I3[A] 1.5 2.5 4 6 10 16 25 35 50 70 95 120 150 185 240 300
20 370 617
30 246 412 658
40 185 309 494 741
50 148 247 395 593
60 123 206 329 494
70 105 176 282 423 705
80 92 154 246 370 617
90 82 137 219 329 549
100 74 123 197 296 494 790
120 61 102 164 246 412 658
140 52 88 141 211 353 564
150 49 82 131 197 329 527
160 46 77 123 185 309 494 772
180 41 68 109 164 274 439 686
200 37 61 98 148 247 395 617
220 33 56 89 134 224 359 561 786
250 29 49 79 118 198 316 494 691
280 26 44 70 105 176 282 441 617
300 24 41 65 98 165 263 412 576
320 23 38 61 92 154 247 386 540 772
350 21 35 56 84 141 226 353 494 705
380 19 32 52 78 130 208 325 455 650
400 18 30 49 74 123 198 309 432 617
420 17 29 47 70 118 188 294 412 588
450 16 27 43 65 110 176 274 384 549 768
480 15 25 41 61 103 165 257 360 514 720
500 14 24 39 59 99 158 247 346 494 691
520 14 23 38 57 95 152 237 332 475 665
550 13 22 35 53. 90 144 224 314 449 629
580 12 21 34 51 85 136 213 298 426 596 809
600 12 20 32 49 82 132 206 288 412 576 782
620 11 19 31 47 80 127 199 279 398 558 757
650 11 19 30 45 76 122 190 266 380 532 722
680 10 18 29 43 73 116 182 254 363 508 690
700 10 17 28 42 71 113 176 247 353 494 670 847
750 16 26 39 66 105 165 230 329 461 626 790 840
800 15 24 37 62 99 154 216 309 432 586 667 787
850 14 23 34 58 93 145 203 290 407 552 627 741
900 13 21 32 55 88 137 192 274 384 521 593 700
950 13 20 31 52 83 130 182 260 364 494 561 663
1000 12 19 29 49 79 123 173 247 346 469 533 630 731
1250 15 23 40 63 99 138 198 277 375 427 504 585 711
1500 13 19 33 53 82 115 165 230 313 356 420 487 593
1600 12 18 31 49 77 108 154 216 293 333 394 457 556 667
2000 14 25 40 62 86 123 173 235 267 315 365 444 533
2500 11 20 32 49 69 99 138 188 213 252 292 356 427
3000 16 26 41 58 82 115 156 178 210 244 296 356
3200 15 25 39 54 77 108 147 167 197 228 278 333
4000 12 20 31 43 62 86 117 133 157 183 222 267
5000 10 16 25 35 49 69 94 107 126 146 178 213
6300 13 20 27 39 55 74 85 100 116 141 169
8000 10 15 22 31 43 59 67 79 91 111 133
9600 13 18 26 36 49 56 66 76 93 111
10000 12 17 25 35 47 53 63 73 89 107
12000 10 14 21 29 39 44 52 61 74 89
15000 12 16 23 31 36 42 49 59 71
20000 12 17 23 27 31 37 44 53
24000 10 14 20 22 26 30 37 44
30000 12 16 20 25 30 40 49

328 Electrical devices | ABB

 1.4 Protection against short-circuit

1 Protection of feeders
Correction factor for voltage other than 400 V: kv
Multiply the length value obtained from the table by the correction factor kv:

Ur [V] kv
(three-phase value)
230(*) 0.58
400 1
440 1.1
500 1.25
690 1.73

230 V single-phase is the equivalent of a three-phase 400 V system with distributed

(*)

neutral and with the cross section of the phase conductor the same as the cross section
area of the neutral conductor, so that kv is 0.58.

Correction factor for distributed neutral: kd

Multiply the length value obtained from the table by the correction factor kd:

where
• S is the phase cross section [mm2];
• SN is the neutral cross section [mm2].

In particular:

Correction factor for aluminium conductors: kr

If the cable is in aluminium, multiply the length value obtained from the table
above by the correction factor kr = 0.67.

ABB | Electrical devices 329

 1.4 Protection against short-circuit

1 Protection of feeders
To summarize:
On the table, for the cross section and magnetic trip threshold it is possible
to read a maximum protected value L0. This length shall then be multiplied, if
necessary, by the correction factors in order to obtain a value that is compatible
with the installation operating conditions:

Example 1
Neutral not distributed
Rated voltage = 400 V
Protective device: XT2N 160 TMA In100
Magnetic threshold: I3 = 1000 A (max setting)
Phase cross section = Neutral cross section = 70 mm2
The table shows that at I3 = 1000 A, the 70 mm2 cable is protected up to
346 m.

Example 2
Neutral distributed
Rated voltage = 400 V
Protective device: XT4N 250 TMA In200
Magnetic threshold: I3 = 2000 A (max setting)
Phase cross section = 300 mm2
Neutral cross section = 150 mm2
For I3 = 2000 A and S = 300 mm2, a protected length equivalent of L0= 533
m is obtained.

By applying the correction factor kd required when the neutral is distributed:

L= L0 . 0.39 = 533 . 0.39 = 207.9 m

This is the maximum protected length with neutral distributed.

330 Electrical devices | ABB

 1 Protection of feeders
1.5 Neutral and protective conductors

Neutral conductor
The neutral conductor is a conductor that is connected to the system neutral
point (which generally but not necessarily coincides with the star centre of the
secondary windings of the transformer or the windings of the generator); it is
able to contribute to the transmission of electric power, thereby making available
a voltage that is different from the phase to phase voltage. In certain cases and
under specific conditions, the functions of neutral conductor and protective
conductor can be combined in a single conductor (PEN).

Protection and disconnection of the neutral conductor

If fault conditions arise, a voltage to earth may occur on the neutral conductor.
This may be caused by a phase to neutral short-circuit and by the disconnection
of the neutral conductor due to accidental breaking or to tripping of single-pole
devices (fuses or single-pole circuit breakers).
If the neutral conductor only is disconnected in a four-conductor circuit, the
supply voltage to the single-phase loads may be altered so that they are supplied
by a voltage different from the U0 phase to neutral voltage (as shown in Fig. 1).
Therefore, all the necessary measures to prevent this type of fault shall be taken,
e.g. by not protecting the neutral conductor with single-pole devices.

P
P 3 . U0 . R 1
U1 =
P R1+ R2
N

1SDC010013F0001
U1 R1 R2

Figure 1: Disconnection of the neutral conductor

Moreover, in TN-C systems, voltage to earth arising on the neutral conductor
constitutes a hazard for people; in fact, since this conductor is also a protective
conductor, this voltage reaches the connected exposed conductive parts. For
TN-C systems, the Standards specify minimum cross sections (see next clause)
for the neutral conductor in order to prevent accidental breaking and they
forbid the use of any device (single-pole or multi-pole) that could disconnect
the PEN.
The need for protection on the neutral conductor and the possibility of
disconnecting the circuit depend on the distribution system:

ABB | Electrical devices 331

 1.5 Neutral and protective conductors

1 Protection of feeders
TT or TN systems:
• if the cross section of the neutral conductor is the same or larger than the
cross section of the phase conductor, there is neither the need to detect
overcurrents on the neutral conductor nor to use a breaking device (neutral
conductor is not protected or disconnected); this requirement applies only if
there are no harmonics that may, at any instant, cause r.m.s. current values
on the neutral conductor higher than the maximum current detected on the
phase conductors;
• if the cross section of the neutral conductor is less than the cross section of
the phase conductor, overcurrents on the neutral conductor must be detected
so as to have the phase conductors, but not necessarily the neutral conductor,
disconnected (neutral conductor protected but not disconnected): in this case
the overcurrents on the neutral conductor do not need to be detected if the
following conditions are simultaneously fulfilled:
1. the neutral conductor is protected against short-circuit by the
protective device of the phase conductors;
2. the maximum current that can flow through the neutral
conductor during normal service is lower than the neutral
current carrying capacity.
In TN-S systems, the neutral need not be disconnected if the supply conditions
are such that the neutral conductor can be considered to be reliable at earth
potential.
As already mentioned, in TN-C systems, the neutral conductor is also a
protective conductor and cannot therefore be disconnected. Furthermore, if
the neutral conductor is disconnected, the exposed conductive parts of the
single-phase equipment could take the system rated voltage to earth.
In certain specific cases, the neutral conductor has to be disconnected to
prevent currents circulating between parallel supply sources (see Figures 2
and 3).

Figure 2: Three-phase alternative power supply with a 4-pole switch

Power supply 1 Power supply 2

NOTE - This method

prevents electromagnetic
fields due to stray currents L1 L1
in the main supply system L2 L2
of an installation. The sum L3 L3
PEN
of the currents within one Supplier
PE
cable must be zero. This
ensures that the neutral
current will flow only in the
neutral conductor of the
respective switched on User
circuit. The 3rd harmonic
1SDC010012F0201

(150 Hz) current of the line

conductors will be added
with the same phase angle
to the neutral conductor
current.
Current using equipment

332 Electrical devices | ABB

 1.5 Neutral and protective conductors

1 Protection of feeders
Figure 3: Three-phase alternative power supply with non-suitable
3-pole switch

L1 L1
L2 L2
L3 L3
PEN
PE

NOTE – A three-phase
alternative power supply

1SDC010014F0001
with a non-suitable
3-pole switch, due to
unintentional circular
stray currents generating
electromagnetic fields.

IT system:
The Standard advises against distributing the neutral conductor in IT systems.
If the neutral conductor is distributed, the overcurrents must be detected on the
neutral conductor of each circuit in order to disconnect all the live conductors
on the corresponding circuit, including the neutral one (neutral conductor
protected and disconnected).
Overcurrents do not need to be detected on the neutral conductor in any of
the following cases:
• the neutral conductor is protected against short-circuit by a protective device
fitted upstream;
• the circuit is protected by a residual current device with rated residual current
lower than 0.15 times the current carrying capacity of the corresponding
neutral conductor. This device must disconnect all the live conductors, the
neutral conductor included.

For all distribution systems, whenever necessary, connection and disconnection

of the neutral conductor, shall ensure that:
• the neutral conductor is not disconnected before the phase conductor;
• the neutral conductor is connected at the same moment or before the phase
conductor.

ABB | Electrical devices 333

 1.5 Neutral and protective conductors

1 Protection of feeders

START

Upstream protection TT/TN System? SN ≥ S?

no for the neutral? no yes yes
no
yes

Is the circuit protected

by a RCD with Is the neutral protected by
I∆n≤ 0.15 x Neutral the short-circuit protection
no carrying capacity ? no
of the phase conductor?

yes yes

Neutral max current

<
Neutral carrying capacity (Iz)? no

yes

1SDC010013F0201

It is necessary to: It is necessary to: It is necessary to: It is necessary to: It is not necessary:
detect the neutral current - open all the contacts -open the phase contacts -detect the neutral current; -the presence of a
in order to open all the contacts (phase and neutral) It is not necessary to: -open the phase contacts; breaking device
(phase and neutral). It is not necessary to: -detect the neutral overcurrent; It is not necessary to: for the neutral.*
-detect the neutral current. -open the neutral contact. -open the neutral contact.

* in TT systems the
neutral conductor
shall be disconnected.

Neutral shall not be disconnected before the phase conductors

Neutral shall be reconnected at the same time as
or before the phase conductors

334 Electrical devices | ABB

 1.5 Neutral and protective conductors

1 Protection of feeders
Determination of the minimum cross section of the neutral conductor
The neutral conductor, if any, shall have the same cross section as the line
conductor:
• in single-phase, two-wire circuits whatever the section;
• in polyphase and single-phase three-wire circuits, when the size of the
line conductors is less than or equal to 16 mm2 in copper, or 25 mm2 in
aluminium.1 
The cross section of the neutral conductor can be less than the cross section of
the phase conductor when the cross section of the phase conductor is greater
than 16 mm2 with a copper cable, or 25 mm2 with an aluminium cable, if both
the following conditions are met:
• the cross section of the neutral conductor is at least 16 mm2 for copper
conductors and 25 mm2 for aluminium conductors;
• there is no high harmonic distortion of the load current. If there is high harmonic
distortion (the harmonic content is greater than 10%), as for example in
equipment with discharge lamps, the cross section of the neutral conductor
cannot be less than the cross section of the phase conductors.

Table 1: Minimum cross sections of the neutral conductor

Phase cross section Min. neutral cross section
S [mm2] SN [mm2]
Single-phase/two-phase circuits
Cu/Al Any S*
Three-phase circuits S ≤ 16 S*
Cu S > 16 16
Three-phase circuits S ≤ 25 S*
Al S > 25 25
*
for TN-C systems, the Standards specify a minimum cross section of 10 mm2 for
copper and 16 mm2 for aluminium conductors

1
The cross section of phase conductors shall be dimensioned in compliance with the
instructions of the Chapter 1.2.1 “Current carrying capacity and methods of installation”

ABB | Electrical devices 335

 1.5 Neutral and protective conductors

1 Protection of feeders
Protective conductor
Determination of the minimum cross sections
The minimum cross section of the protective conductor can be determined by
using the following table:

Table 2: Cross section of the protective conductor

Cross section of Minimum cross section of the corresponding

line conductor S protective conductor
[mm2 ] [mm2 ]

If the protective conductor is of the If the protective conductor is not of the same
same material as the line conductor material as the line conductor

k1 .
S ʺ 16 S S
k
2

k1 .
16 < S ʺ 35 16* 16
k
2

S* k1 . S
S > 35
2 k2 2

Where
k1 is the value of k for the line conductor, selected from Table 1 Chapter 1.4 according to the materials of

1SDC010014F0201
the conductor and insulation;
k2 is the value of k for the protective conductor.
* For a PEN conductor, the reduction of the cross section is permitted only in accordance with the rules for sizing of the neutral conductor.

For a more accurate calculation and if the protective conductor is subjected

to adiabatic heating from an initial known temperature to a final specified tem-
perature (applicable for fault extinction time no longer than 5s), the minimum
cross section of the protective conductor SPE can be obtained by using the
following formula:

where:
• SPE is the cross section of the protective conductor [mm2];
• I is the r.m.s. current flowing through the protective conductor in the event of
a fault with low impedance [A];
• t is the trip time of the protective device [s];

336 Electrical devices | ABB

 1.5 Neutral and protective conductors

1 Protection of feeders
• k is a constant which depends on the material of the protective conductor, on
the type of insulation and on initial and final temperature. The most common
values can be taken from Tables 3 and 4.

Table 3: Values of k for insulated protective conductors not incorpo-

rated in cables and not bunched with other cables

Temperature Material of conductor

Conductor insulation °C b Copper Aluminium Steel
Initial Final Values for k
70 °C PVC 30 160/140 a 143/133 a 95/88 a 52/49 a
a a a
90 °C PVC 30 143/133 143/133 95/88 52/49 a
90 °C thermosetting 30 250 176 116 64
60 °C rubber 30 200 159 105 58
85 °C rubber 30 220 168 110 60

1SDC010015F0201
Silicon rubber 30 350 201 133 73

a 2
The lower value applies to PVC insulated conductors of cross section greater than 300 mm .
b
Temperature limits for various types of insulation are given in IEC 60724.

Table 4: Values of k for protective conductors as a core incorporated

in a cable or bunched with other cables or insulated conductors

Temperature Material of conductor

Conductor insulation °C b Copper Aluminium Steel
Initial Final Values for k
70 °C PVC 70 160/140 a 115/103 a 76/68 a 42/37 a
90 °C PVC 90 160/140 a 100/86 a 66/57 a 36/31 a
90 °C thermosetting 90 250 143 94 52
60 °C rubber 60 200 141 93 51
85 °C rubber 85 220 134 89 48
1SDC010015F0201

Silicon rubber 180 350 132 87 47

a
The lower value applies to PVC insulated conductors of cross section greater than 300 mm2.
b
Temperature limits for various types of insulation are given in IEC 60724.

ABB | Electrical devices 337

 1.5 Neutral and protective conductors

1 Protection of feeders
Further values of k can be taken from the Tables in Annex D, which provides
the formula for accurate calculation of the value of k.

If Table 2 or formula (1) do not provide a standardized cross section, a larger

standardized cross section shall be chosen.

Regardless of whether Table 2 or formula (1) are used, the cross section of the
protective conductor, which is not part of the supply cable, shall be at least:
- 2.5 mm2 Cu/16 mm2 Al, if a mechanical protection is provided;
- 4 mm2 Cu/16 mm2 Al, if no mechanical protection is provided.

For current using equipment intended for permanent connection and with a
protective conductor current exceeding 10 mA, reinforced protective conductors
shall be designed as follows:
• either the protective conductor shall have a cross-sectional area of at least
10 mm2 Cu or 16 mm2 Al, through its total run;
• or a second protective conductor of at least the same cross-sectional area
as required for protection against indirect contact shall be laid up to a point
where the protective conductor has a cross-sectional area not less than
10 mm2 Cu or 16 mm2 Al. This requires that the appliance has a separate
terminal for a second protective conductor.

When overcurrent protective devices are used for protection against electric
shock, the protective conductor shall be incorporated in the same wiring system
as the live conductors or be located in their immediate proximity.

338 Electrical devices | ABB

 1 Protection of feeders
1.6 Busbar trunking systems (BTSs)

In electrical installations for industrial environments, busbar trunking systems

(BTSs) optimize the power distribution despite the inevitable modifications that
are carried out (additions, displacements, replacement of loads) and to facilitate
maintenance work and safety verifications.
They are mainly used for:
- supplying sources of light, safety and low power distribution;
- lighting lines (medium power);
- power supply and distribution (medium and large power);
- supplying moving equipment (bridge cranes).

Busbar trunking systems are subject to the following Standards:

- IEC 61439 – 1 “Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies – Part 1:
General rules”
- IEC 60439 – 2 “Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies – Part 2:
Particular requirements for busbar trunking systems (busways)”.

BTSs consist of:

- conductors/busbars;
- coupling: electrical and mechanical connecting elements for different elements;
- straight elements: base elements of the line for carrying energy from the source
to the loads;
- routing elements: flexible joints for the creation of curves or overcoming ob-
stacles, horizontal and vertical angles, tee joints and cross elements to create
any type of route;
- pull boxes: elements that enable lamps or operating machines to be supplied
directly with integrated protection (fuses or circuit breakers);
- suspensions/accessories: hanging and fixing elements for BTS and for any
support required for special loads (lighting components, etc).

Dimensioning of a BTS
To dimension a BTS, the load current must be determined using the following
data:

Power supply
• General type of load supply:
- single-phase
- three-phase.
• Type of BTS supply:
- from one end;
- from both ends;
- central power supply.
• Rated voltage
• Short-circuit current at the supply point
• Ambient temperature.

Loads

• Number, distribution, power and cosϕ and type of loads supplied by the same
BTS

ABB | Electrical devices 339

 1.6 Busbar trunking systems

1 Protection of feeders
BTS geometry

• Type of installation:
- flat;
- edge-on;
- vertical.
• Length.

NOTE: BTSs shall be placed at a distance from the walls and the ceilings in such a way
as to enable visual inspection of connections during assembly and to facilitate insertion
of the branch units.
If possible, it is preferable to install the BTS edge-on so as to improve mechanical resistance
and reduce any possible deposit of powder and polluting substances that might affect the
level of internal insulation.

Load current calculation for three-phase system

Load current Ib for a three-phase system is calculated by the following formula:

where:
• Pt is the sum of the active power of all the installed loads [W];
• b is the supply factor, which is:
- 1 if the BTS is supplied from one side only;
- 1/2 if the BTS is supplied from the centre or from both ends
simultaneously;
• Ur is the operating voltage [V];
• cosϕm is the average power factor of the loads.

Choice of BTS current carrying capacity

A BTS shall be chosen so that its current carrying capacity Iz complies with
the following formula:

where:
• IZ0 is the current that the BTS can carry for an indefinite time at the reference
temperature (40 °C);
• Ib is the load current;
• kt is the correction factor for ambient temperature values other than the refe-
rence ambient temperature shown on Table 1.

Table 1: Correction factor kt for ambient temperature other than 40 °C

Ambient
Temperature [°C] 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
kt 1.2 1.17 1.12 1.08 1.05 1 0.95 0.85

340 Electrical devices | ABB

 1.6 Busbar trunking systems

1 Protection of feeders
Note: the following tables show typical parameters of the BTS present on the
market

Table 2: Current carrying capacity IZ0 of copper BTS

Number of IZ0 rph* xph Ur
Size Generic type conductors [A] [mΩ/m] [mΩ/m] [V]
25 25A 4 cond. Cu 4 25 6.964 1.144 400
25 25A 4 cond. Cu 4 25 6.876 1.400 400
25 25A 4+4 cond. Cu 4+4 25 6.876 1.400 400
40 40A 4 cond. Cu 4 40 3.556 0.792 400
40 40A 4 cond. Cu 4 40 3.516 1.580 400
40 40A 4+4 cond. Cu 4+4 40 3.516 1.580 400
40 40A 4 cond. Cu 4 40 2.173 0.290 400
63 63A 4 cond. Cu 4 63 1.648 0.637 400
100 100A 4 cond. Cu 4 100 0.790 0.366 400
160 160A 4 cond. Cu 4 160 0.574 0.247 400
160 160A 4 cond. Cu 4 160 0.335 0.314 500
160 160A 5 cond. Cu 5 160 0.335 0.314 500
250 250A 4 cond. Cu 4 250 0.285 0.205 1000
250 250A 5 cond. Cu 5 250 0.285 0.205 1000
250 250A 4 cond. Cu 4 250 0.194 0.205 500
250 250A 5 cond. Cu 5 250 0.194 0.205 500
315 315A 4 cond. Cu 4 315 0.216 0.188 1000
315 315A 5 cond. Cu 5 315 0.216 0.188 1000
350 350A 4 cond. Cu 4 350 0.142 0.188 500
350 350A 5 cond. Cu 5 350 0.142 0.188 500
400 400A 4 cond. Cu 4 400 0.115 0.129 1000
400 400A 5 cond. Cu 5 400 0.115 0.129 1000
500 500A 4 cond. Cu 4 500 0.092 0.129 500
500 500A 5 cond. Cu 5 500 0.092 0.129 500
630 630A 4 cond. Cu 4 630 0.073 0.122 1000
630 630A 5 cond. Cu 5 630 0.073 0.122 1000
700 700A 4 cond. Cu 4 700 0.077 0.122 500
700 700A 5 cond. Cu 5 700 0.077 0.122 500
700 700A 5 cond. Cu 5 700 0.077 0.122 500
700 700A 4 cond. Cu 4 700 0.077 0.122 500

ABB | Electrical devices 341

 1.6 Busbar trunking systems

1 Protection of feeders
Table 2

Number of IZ0 rph* xph Ur

Size Generic type conductors [A] [mΩ/m] [mΩ/m] [V]
800 800A 4 cond. Cu 4 800 0.047 0.122 1000
800 800A 5 cond. Cu 5 800 0.047 0.122 1000
800 800A 4 cond. Cu 4 800 0.038 0.027 1000
800 800A 4 cond. Cu 4 800 0.072 0.122 500
800 800A 5 cond. Cu 5 800 0.072 0.122 500
1000 1000A 4 cond. Cu 4 1000 0.038 0.120 1000
1000 1000A 5 cond. Cu 5 1000 0.038 0.120 1000
1000 1000A 4 cond. Cu 4 1000 0.037 0.026 1000
1000 1000A 4 cond. Cu 4 1000 0.038 0.097 1000
1000 1000A 4 cond. Cu 4 1000 0.068 0.120 500
1000 1000A 5 cond. Cu 5 1000 0.068 0.120 500
1200 1200A 4 cond. Cu 4 1200 0.035 0.021 1000
1250 1250A 4 cond. Cu 4 1250 0.034 0.023 1000
1250 1250A 4 cond. Cu 4 1250 0.035 0.076 1000
1500 1500A 4 cond. Cu 4 1500 0.030 0.022 1000
1600 1600A 4 cond. Cu 4 1600 0.025 0.018 1000
1600 1600A 4 cond. Cu 4 1600 0.034 0.074 1000
2000 2000A 4 cond. Cu 4 2000 0.020 0.015 1000
2000 2000A 4 cond. Cu 4 2000 0.025 0.074 1000
2400 2400A 4 cond. Cu 4 2400 0.019 0.012 1000
2500 2500A 4 cond. Cu 4 2500 0.016 0.011 1000
2500 2500A 4 cond. Cu 4 2500 0.019 0.040 1000
3000 3000A 4 cond. Cu 4 3000 0.014 0.011 1000
3000 3000A 4 cond. Cu 4 3000 0.017 0.031 1000
3200 3200A 4 cond. Cu 4 3200 0.013 0.009 1000
3200 3200A 4 cond. Cu 4 3200 0.015 0.031 1000
4000 4000A 4 cond. Cu 4 4000 0.011 0.007 1000
4000 4000A 4 cond. Cu 4 4000 0.011 0.026 1000
5000 5000A 4 cond. Cu 4 5000 0.008 0.005 1000
5000 5000A 4 cond. Cu 4 5000 0.008 0.023 1000
*phase resistance at Iz0

342 Electrical devices | ABB

 1.6 Busbar trunking systems

1 Protection of feeders
Table 3: Current carrying capacity IZ0 of aluminium BTS

Number of IZ0 rph* xph Ur

Size Generic type conductors [A] [mΩ/m] [mΩ/m] [V]
160 160A 4 cond. Al 4 160 0.591 0.260 1000
160 160A 5 cond. Al 5 160 0.591 0.260 1000
160 160A 4 cond. Al 4 160 0.431 0.260 500
160 160A 5 cond. Al 5 160 0.431 0.260 500
250 250A 4 cond. Al 4 250 0.394 0.202 1000
250 250A 5 cond. Al 5 250 0.394 0.202 1000
250 250A 4 cond. Al 4 250 0.226 0.202 500
250 250A 5 cond. Al 5 250 0.226 0.202 500
315 315A 4 cond. Al 4 315 0.236 0.186 1000
315 315A 5 cond. Al 5 315 0.236 0.186 1000
315 315A 4 cond. Al 4 315 0.181 0.186 500
315 315A 5 cond. Al 5 315 0.181 0.186 500
400 400A 4 cond. Al 4 400 0.144 0.130 1000
400 400A 5 cond. Al 5 400 0.144 0.130 1000
400 400A 4 cond. Al 4 400 0.125 0.130 500
400 400A 5 cond. Al 5 400 0.125 0.130 500
500 500A 4 cond. Al 4 500 0.102 0.127 500
500 500A 5 cond. Al 5 500 0.102 0.127 500
630 630A 4 cond. Al 4 630 0.072 0.097 1000
630 630A 5 cond. Al 5 630 0.072 0.097 1000
630 630A 4 cond. Al 4 630 0.072 0.029 1000
630 630A 4 cond. Al 4 630 0.073 0.097 500
630 630A 5 cond. Al 5 630 0.073 0.097 500
800 800A 4 cond. Al 4 800 0.062 0.096 1000
800 800A 5 cond. Al 5 800 0.062 0.096 1000
800 800A 4 cond. Al 4 800 0.067 0.027 1000
800 800A 4 cond. Al 4 800 0.071 0.096 500
800 800A 5 cond. Al 5 800 0.071 0.096 500
1000 1000A 4 cond. Al 4 1000 0.062 0.023 1000
1000 1000A 4 cond. Al 4 1000 0.068 0.087 1000
1200 1200A 4 cond. Al 4 1200 0.054 0.023 1000
1250 1250A 4 cond. Al 4 1250 0.044 0.021 1000
1250 1250A 4 cond. Al 4 1250 0.044 0.066 1000
1500 1500A 4 cond. Al 4 1500 0.041 0.023 1000
1600 1600A 4 cond. Al 4 1600 0.035 0.017 1000
1600 1600A 4 cond. Al 4 1600 0.041 0.066 1000
2000 2000A 4 cond. Al 4 2000 0.029 0.016 1000
2000 2000A 4 cond. Al 4 2000 0.034 0.053 1000
2250 2250A 4 cond. Al 4 2250 0.032 0.049 1000
2400 2400A 4 cond. Al 4 2400 0.028 0.012 1000
2500 2500A 4 cond. Al 4 2500 0.022 0.011 1000
2500 2500A 4 cond. Al 4 2500 0.022 0.034 1000
3000 3000A 4 cond. Al 4 3000 0.020 0.011 1000
3200 3200A 4 cond. Al 4 3200 0.017 0.009 1000
3200 3200A 4 cond. Al 4 3200 0.020 0.034 1000
4000 4000A 4 cond. Al 4 4000 0.014 0.008 1000
4000 4000A 4 cond. Al 4 4000 0.017 0.024 1000
4500 4500A 4 cond. Al 4 4500 0.014 0.024 1000
*phase resistance at Iz0

ABB | Electrical devices 343

 1.6 Busbar trunking systems

1 Protection of feeders
BTS protection
Protection against overload
BTSs are protected against overload by using the same criterion as that used
for the cables. The following formula shall be verified:

where:
• Ib is the current for which the circuit is designed;
• In is the rated current of the protective device; for adjustable protective devices,
the rated current In is the set current;
• Iz is the continuous current carrying capacity of the BTS.

NOTE - The protection Protection against short-circuit 

against short-circuit does
not need to be checked The BTS must be protected against thermal overload and electrodynamic effects
if MCBs up to 63 A are due to the short-circuit current.
used whenever correctly
dimensioned for overload Protection against thermal overload
protection. In such
cases, in fact, protection
The following formula shall be fulfilled:
against both thermal and
electrodynamic effects
is certainly adequate
because of the energy and where:
peak limitations offered by • I2tCB is the specific let-through energy of the circuit-breaker at the maximum
these protective devices. short-circuit current value at the installation point. This can be extrapolated
from the curves shown in Part 1 Chapter 1.4;
• I2tBTS is the withstood energy of the BTS and it is normally given by the ma-
nufacturer (see Tables 4 and 5).

Protection against electrodynamic effects

The following formula shall be fulfilled:

where:
• Ikp CB is the peak limited by the circuit-breaker at the maximum short-circuit
current value at the installation point. This can be extrapolated from the limi-
tation curves;
• Ikp BTS is the maximum peak current value of the BTS (see Tables 4 and 5).

344 Electrical devices | ABB

 1.6 Busbar trunking systems

1 Protection of feeders

START

Ib

yes
Temperature
<> 40 °C ?

no

kt from
kt=1 Table 1

BTS choice
(I b < kt*IZ0 =IZ )

Voltage drop no
OK ?

yes

Circuit-breaker
choice

no
Ib < InCB < IZ ?

yes

no
1SDC010017F0201

I2 t CB < I2 t BTS ?

yes

no
IkpCB < I kp BTS ?

yes

END

ABB | Electrical devices 345

 1.6 Busbar trunking systems

1 Protection of feeders
Table 4: Values of the withstood energy and peak current of copper BTS

I2tph I2tN I2tPE Ipeakph IpeakN

Size Generic type [(kA)2s] [(kA)2s] [(kA)2s] [kA] [kA]
25 25A 4 cond. Cu 0.48 0.48 0.48 10 10
25 25A 4 cond. Cu 0.64 0.64 0.64 10 10
25 25A 4+4 cond. Cu 0.64 0.64 0.64 10 10
40 40A 4 cond. Cu 0.73 0.73 0.73 10 10
40 40A 4 cond. Cu 1 1 1 10 10
40 40A 4+4 cond. Cu 1 1 1 10 10
40 40A 4 cond. Cu 7.29 7.29 7.29 10 10
63 63A 4 cond. Cu 7.29 7.29 7.29 10 10
100 100A 4 cond. Cu 20.25 20.25 20.25 10 10
160 160A 4 cond. Cu 30.25 30.25 30.25 10 10
160 160A 4 cond. Cu 100 60 60 17 10.2
160 160A 5 cond. Cu 100 100 100 17 10.2
160 160A 4 cond. Cu 100 100 100 17 10.2
250 250A 4 cond. Cu 312.5 187.5 187.5 52.5 31.5
250 250A 5 cond. Cu 312.5 312.5 312.5 52.5 31.5
250 250A 4 cond. Cu 169 101.4 101.4 26 15.6
250 250A 5 cond. Cu 169 169 169 26 15.6
250 250A 4 cond. Cu 169 169 169 26 15.6
315 315A 4 cond. Cu 312.5 187.5 187.5 52.5 31.5
315 315A 5 cond. Cu 312.5 312.5 312.5 52.5 31.5
350 350A 4 cond. Cu 169 101.4 101.4 26 15.6
350 350A 5 cond. Cu 169 169 169 26 15.6
350 350A 4 cond. Cu 169 169 169 26 15.6
400 400A 4 cond. Cu 900 540 540 63 37.8
400 400A 5 cond. Cu 900 900 900 63 37.8
500 500A 4 cond. Cu 756.25 453.75 453.75 58 34.8
500 500A 5 cond. Cu 756.25 756.25 756.25 58 34.8
500 500A 4 cond. Cu 756.25 756.25 756.25 58 34.8
630 630A 4 cond. Cu 1296 777.6 777.6 75.6 45.4
630 630A 5 cond. Cu 1296 1296 1296 75.6 45.4
700 700A 4 cond. Cu 756.25 453.75 453.75 58 34.8
700 700A 5 cond. Cu 756.25 756.25 756.25 58 34.8
700 700A 4 cond. Cu 756.25 756.25 756.25 58 34.8

346 Electrical devices | ABB

 1.6 Busbar trunking systems

1 Protection of feeders

I2tph I2tN I2tPE Ipeakph IpeakN

Size Generic type [(kA)2s] [(kA)2s] [(kA)2s] [kA] [kA]
800 800A 4 cond. Cu 1296 777.6 777.6 75.6 45.4
800 800A 5 cond. Cu 1296 1296 1296 75.6 45.4
800 800A 4 cond. Cu 3969 3969 2381.4 139 83.4
800 800A 4 cond. Cu 756.25 453.75 453.75 58 34.8
800 800A 5 cond. Cu 756.25 756.25 756.25 58 34.8
800 800A 4 cond. Cu 756.25 756.25 756.25 58 34.8
1000 1000A 4 cond. Cu 1296 777.6 777.6 75.6 45.4
1000 1000A 5 cond. Cu 1296 1296 1296 75.6 45.4
1000 1000A 4 cond. Cu 3969 3969 2381.4 139 83.4
1000 1000A 4 cond. Cu 1600 1600 960 84 50.4
1000 1000A 4 cond. Cu 1024 614.4 614.4 60 36
1000 1000A 5 cond. Cu 1024 1024 1024 60 36
1000 1000A 4 cond. Cu 1024 1024 1024 60 36
1200 1200A 4 cond. Cu 7744 7744 4646.4 194 116.4
1250 1250A 4 cond. Cu 7744 7744 4646.4 194 116.4
1250 1250A 4 cond. Cu 2500 2500 1500 105 63
1500 1500A 4 cond. Cu 7744 7744 4646.4 194 116.4
1600 1600A 4 cond. Cu 7744 7744 4646.4 194 116.4
1600 1600A 4 cond. Cu 2500 2500 1500 105 63
2000 2000A 4 cond. Cu 7744 7744 4646.4 194 116.4
2000 2000A 4 cond. Cu 3600 3600 2160 132 79.2
2400 2400A 4 cond. Cu 7744 7744 4646.4 194 116.4
2500 2500A 4 cond. Cu 7744 7744 4646.4 194 116.4
2500 2500A 4 cond. Cu 4900 4900 2940 154 92.4
3000 3000A 4 cond. Cu 30976 30976 18585.6 387 232.2
3000 3000A 4 cond. Cu 8100 8100 4860 198 118.8
3200 3200A 4 cond. Cu 30976 30976 18585.6 387 232.2
3200 3200A 4 cond. Cu 8100 8100 4860 198 118.8
4000 4000A 4 cond. Cu 30976 30976 18585.6 387 232.2
4000 4000A 4 cond. Cu 8100 8100 4860 198 118.8
5000 5000A 4 cond. Cu 30976 30976 18585.6 387 232.2
5000 5000A 4 cond. Cu 10000 10000 6000 220 132

ABB | Electrical devices 347

 1.6 Busbar trunking systems

1 Protection of feeders
Table 5: Values of the withstood energy and peak current of
aluminium BTS
I2tph I2tN I2tPE Ipeakph IpeakN
Size Generic type [(kA)2s] [(kA)2s] [(kA)2s] [kA] [kA]
160 160A 4 cond. Al 112.5 67.5 67.5 30 18
160 160A 5 cond. Al 112.5 112.5 112.5 30 18
160 160A 4 cond. Al 100 60 60 17 10.2
160 160A 5 cond. Al 100 100 100 17 10.2
160 160A 4 cond. Al 100 100 100 17 10.2
250 250A 4 cond. Al 312.5 187.5 187.5 52.5 31.5
250 250A 5 cond. Al 312.5 312.5 312.5 52.5 31.5
250 250A 4 cond. Al 169 101.4 101.4 26 15.6
250 250A 5 cond. Al 169 169 169 26 15.6
250 250A 4 cond. Al 169 169 169 26 15.6
315 315A 4 cond. Al 625 375 375 52.5 31.5
315 315A 5 cond. Al 625 625 625 52.5 31.5
315 315A 4 cond. Al 169 101.4 101.4 26 15.6
315 315A 5 cond. Al 169 169 169 26 15.6
315 315A 4 cond. Al 169 169 169 26 15.6
400 400A 4 cond. Al 900 540 540 63 37.8
400 400A 5 cond. Al 900 900 900 63 37.8
400 400A 4 cond. Al 625 375 375 52.5 31.5
400 400A 5 cond. Al 625 625 625 52.5 31.5
400 400A 4 cond. Al 625 625 625 52.5 31.5
500 500A 4 cond. Al 625 375 375 52.5 31.5
500 500A 5 cond. Al 625 625 625 52.5 31.5
500 500A 4 cond. Al 625 625 625 52.5 31.5
630 630A 4 cond. Al 1296 777.6 777.6 75.6 45.4
630 630A 5 cond. Al 1296 1296 1296 75.6 45.4
630 630A 4 cond. Al 1444 1444 866.4 80 48
630 630A 4 cond. Al 1024 614.4 614.4 67.5 40.5
630 630A 5 cond. Al 1024 1024 1024 67.5 40.5

348 Electrical devices | ABB

 1.6 Busbar trunking systems

1 Protection of feeders

I2tph I2tN I2tPE Ipeakph IpeakN

Size Generic type [(kA)2s] [(kA)2s] [(kA)2s] [kA] [kA]
630 630A 4 cond. Al 1024 1024 1024 67.5 40.5
800 800A 4 cond. Al 1296 777.6 777.6 75.6 45.4
800 800A 5 cond. Al 1296 1296 1296 75.6 45.4
800 800A 4 cond. Al 1764 1764 1058.4 88 52.8
800 800A 4 cond. Al 1024 614.4 614.4 67.5 40.5
800 800A 5 cond. Al 1024 1024 1024 67.5 40.5
800 800A 4 cond. Al 1024 1024 1024 67.5 40.5
1000 1000A 4 cond. Al 6400 6400 3840 176 105.6
1000 1000A 4 cond. Al 1600 1600 960 84 50.4
1200 1200A 4 cond. Al 6400 6400 3840 176 105.6
1250 1250A 4 cond. Al 6400 6400 3840 176 105.6
1250 1250A 4 cond. Al 2500 2500 1500 105 63
1500 1500A 4 cond. Al 6400 6400 3840 176 105.6
1600 1600A 4 cond. Al 6400 6400 3840 176 105.6
1600 1600A 4 cond. Al 2500 2500 1500 105 63
2000 2000A 4 cond. Al 6400 6400 3840 176 105.6
2000 2000A 4 cond. Al 3600 3600 2160 132 79.2
2250 2250A 4 cond. Al 4900 4900 2940 154 92.4
2400 2400A 4 cond. Al 25600 25600 15360 352 211.2
2500 2500A 4 cond. Al 25600 25600 15360 352 211.2
2500 2500A 4 cond. Al 8100 8100 4860 198 118.8
3000 3000A 4 cond. Al 25600 25600 15360 352 211.2
3200 3200A 4 cond. Al 25600 25600 15360 352 211.2
3200 3200A 4 cond. Al 8100 8100 4860 198 118.8
4000 4000A 4 cond. Al 25600 25600 15360 352 211.2
4000 4000A 4 cond. Al 8100 8100 4860 198 118.8
4500 4500A 4 cond. Al 10000 10000 6000 220 132

ABB | Electrical devices 349

 1.6 Busbar trunking systems

1 Protection of feeders
Protection of the outgoing feeders
If the outgoing feeder, which generally consists of cable duct, is not already
protected against short-circuit and overload by the device located upstream
of the cable, the following measures shall be taken:

- protection against short-circuit:

there is no need to protect the feeder against the short-circuit if simultaneously:
a. the length does not exceed 3 metres;
b. the risk of short-circuit is minimized;
c. there is no inflammable material nearby.

In explosive environments and environments with greater risk of fire, protection

against short-circuit is always required;

- protection against overload:

the current carrying capacity of the feeder is generally lower than that of the
BTS. It is therefore necessary to protect also the feeder against overload.
The protection device against overload can be placed inside the pull box or
on the incoming panel.
In the latter case, protection against overload can also be provided by the
circuit-breakers protecting the single outgoing feeder from the panel only if the
sum of their rated currents is lower or equal to the current carrying capacity Iz
of the outgoing feeder.
In locations with greater risk of fire, the overload protection device shall be
installed at the outgoing point, i.e. inside the pull box.

Voltage drop
If a BTS is particularly long, the value of the voltage drop must be verified.
For three-phase systems with a power factor (cosϕm) not lower than 0.8, the
voltage drop can be calculated by using the following simplified formula:

For single-phase BTS the formula is:

where:
• a is the current distribution factor, which depends on the circuit supply and
the arrangement of the electric loads along the BTS, as shown in Table 6:

350 Electrical devices | ABB

 1.6 Busbar trunking systems

1 Protection of feeders
Table 6: Current distribution factor
Type of Arrangement Current distribution
supply of loads factor
From one end only Load concentrated at the end 1
Evenly distributed load 0.5
From both ends Evenly distributed load 0.25
Central Load concentrated at the ends 0.25
Evenly distributed load 0.125

• Ib is the load current [A];

• L is the BTS length [m];
• rt is the phase resistance per unit of length of BTS, measured under thermal
steady-state conditions [mΩ/m];
• x is the phase reactance per unit of length of BTS [mΩ/m];
• cosϕm is average power factor of the loads.

Percentage voltage drop is obtained from:

where Ur is rated voltage.

To reduce the voltage drop in very long BTS the power can be supplied at an
intermediate position rather than at the end (see Table 6).

Calculation of voltage drop for unevenly distributed loads

If the loads cannot be considered to be evenly distributed, the voltage drop can
be calculated more accurately by using the formulas below.
L3
L2
L1

1SDC010015F0001

l1 l2 l3

L L L

For the distribution of the three-phase loads shown in the figure, the voltage
drop can be calculated by the following formula if the BTS has a constant cross
section (as usual):

ABB | Electrical devices 351

 1.6 Busbar trunking systems

1 Protection of feeders
Generally speaking, this formula becomes:

where:
• rt is the phase resistance per unit of length of BTS, measured under thermal
steady-state conditions [mΩ/m];
• x is the phase reactance per unit of length of BTS [mΩ/m];
• cosϕm is average power factor of the i-th load;
• Ii is i-th load current [A];
• Li is the distance of the i-th load from the beginning of the BTS [m].

Joule-effect losses
Joule-effect losses are due to the electrical resistance of the BTS.
The losses are dissipated in heat and contribute to the heating of the trunking
and of the environment. Calculation of power losses is useful for correctly
dimensioning the air-conditioning system for the building.
Three-phase losses are:

while single-phase losses are:

where:
• Ib is the current used [A];
• rt is the phase resistance per unit of length of BTS measured under thermal
steady-state conditions [mΩ/m];
• L is the length of BTS [m].
For accurate calculations, losses must be assessed section by section on the
basis of the currents flowing through them; e.g. in the case of distribution of
loads shown in the previous figure:

Length Current Losses

1° section L 1 I1+I2+I3 P1=3rtL1(I1+I2+I3)2
2° section L2-L1 I2+I3 P2=3rt(L2-L1)(I2+I3)2
3° section L3-L2 I 3 P3=3rt(L3-L2)(I3)2
Total losses in BTS Ptot=P1+P2+P3

352 Electrical devices | ABB

 2 Protection of electrical equipment
2.1 Protection and switching of lighting
circuits
Introduction
Upon supply of a lighting installation, for a brief period an initial current exceed-
ing the rated current (corresponding to the power of the lamps) circulates on the
network. This possible peak has a value of approximately 15÷20 times the rated
current, and is present for a few milliseconds according to the type of lighting;
there may also be an inrush current with a value of approximately 1.5÷3 times
the rated current, lasting up to some minutes. The correct dimensioning of the
switching and protection devices must take these problems into account.
Peak current diagram Inrush current diagram
I [A] I [A]

Peak
15√20 In

Inrush

1SDC010003F0901
1.5√3 In
In

4-5 milliseconds Time [milliseconds] 3- 5 min. Time [minutes]

The most commonly used lamps are of the following types:

- incandescent;
- halogen;
- fluorescent;
- high intensity discharge: mercury vapour, metal halide and sodium vapour.

Incandescent lamps
Incandescent lamps are made up of a glass bulb containing a vacuum or inert
gas and a tungsten filament. The current flows through this filament, heating
it until light is emitted.
The electrical behaviour of these lamps involves a high peak current, equal to
approximately 15 times the rated current; after a few milliseconds the current
returns to the rated value. The peak is caused by the lamp filament which,
initially cold, presents a very low electrical resistance. Subsequently, due to the
very fast heating of the element, the resistance value increases considerably,
causing the decrease in the current absorbed.

ABB | Electrical devices 353

 2.1 Protection and switching of lighting circuits

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Halogen lamps
Halogen lamps are a special type of incandescent lamp in which the gas contai-
ned within the bulb prevents the vaporized material of the tungsten filament from
depositing on the surface of the bulb and forces re-deposition on the filament.
This phenomenon slows the deterioration of the filament, improves the quality
of the light emitted and increases the life of the lamp.
The electrical behaviour of these lamps is the same as that of incandescent
lamps.

Fluorescent lamps
Fluorescent lamps are a so-called discharge light source. The light is produced
by a discharge within a transparent enclosure (glass, quartz, etc. depending on
the type of lamp) which contains mercury vapour at low pressure.
Once the discharge has started, the gas within the enclosure emits energy in
the ultraviolet range which strikes the fluorescent material; in turn, this mate-
rial transforms the ultraviolet radiation into radiation which has a wavelength
within the visible spectrum. The colour of the light emitted depends upon the
fluorescent material used.
The discharge is created by an appropriate peak in voltage, generated by a
starter. Once the lamp has been switched on, the gas offers an ever lower
resistance, and it is necessary to stabilize the intensity of the current, using
a controller (reactor); this lowers the power factor to approximately 0.4÷0.6;
normally a capacitor is added to increase the power factor to a value of more
than 0.9
There are two types of controllers, magnetic (conventional) and electronic,
which absorb from 10% to 20% of the rated power of the lamp. Electronic
controllers offer specific advantages such as a saving in the energy absorbed,
a lower dissipation of heat, and ensure a stable, flicker-free light. Some types
of fluorescent lamps with electronic reactors do not need a starter.
Compact fluorescent lamps are made up of a folded tube and a plastic base
which contains, in some cases, a conventional or electronic controller.
The value of the inrush current depends upon the presence of a power factor
correction capacitor:
- non PFC lamps have inrush currents equal to approximately twice the rated
current and a turn-on time of about ten seconds;
- in PFC lamps, the presence of the capacitor allows the reduction of the turn-
on time to a few seconds, but requires a high peak current, determined by
the charge of the capacitor, which can reach 20 times the rated current.
If the lamp is fitted with an electronic controller, the initial transient current may
lead to peak currents equal to, at maximum, 10 times the rated current.

354 Electrical devices | ABB

 2.1 Protection and switching of lighting circuits

2 Protection of electrical equipment

High intensity discharge lamps: mercury vapour, metal
halide and sodium vapour
The functioning of high intensity discharge lamps is the same as that of
fluorescent lamps with the difference that the discharge occurs in the presence
of a gas at high pressure. In this case, the arc is able to vaporize the metallic
elements contained in the gas, releasing energy in the form of radiation which
is both ultraviolet and within the visible spectrum. The special type of bulb
glass blocks the ultraviolet radiation and allows only the visible radiation to pass
through. There are three main types of high intensity discharge lamps: mercury
vapour, metal halide and sodium vapour. The colour characteristics and the
efficiency of the lamp depend upon the different metallic elements present in
the gas, which are struck by the arc.
High intensity discharge lamps require a suitably sized controller and a heating
period which can last some minutes before the emission of the rated light
output. A momentary loss of power makes the restarting of the system and
the heating necessary.
Non PFC lamps have inrush currents of up to twice the rated current for
approximately 5 minutes.
PFC lamps have a peak current equal to 20 times the rated current, and an
inrush current of up to twice the rated current for approximately 5 minutes.

Lamp type Peak current Inrush current Turn-on time
Incandescent lamps 15In - -
Halogen lamps 15In - -
Fluorescent Non PFC - 2In 10 s
lamp PFC 20In 1÷6 s
High intensity Non PFC − 2In 2÷8 min
discharge lamps PFC 20In 2In 2÷8 min

Protection and switching devices

IEC 60947-4-1 identifies two specific utilization categories for lamp control
contactors:
• AC-5a switching of electric discharge lamps controls;
• AC-5b switching of incandescent lamps.
The documentation supplied by the manufacturer includes tables for contactor
selection, according to the number of lamps to be controlled, and to their type.

ABB | Electrical devices 355

 2.1 Protection and switching of lighting circuits

2 Protection of electrical equipment

For the selection of a protection device the following verifications shall be
carried out:

- the trip characteristic curve shall be above the turning-on characteristic curve
of the lighting device to avoid unwanted trips; an approximate example is
shown in Figure1;

- coordination shall exist with the contactor under short-circuit conditions

(lighting installations are not generally characterized by overloads).

With reference to the above verification criteria, the following tables show the ma-
ximum number of lamps per phase which can be controlled by the combination
of ABB circuit-breakers and contactors for some types of lamps, according to
their power and absorbed current Ib(*) , for three phase installations with a rated
voltage of 400 V and a maximum short-circuit current of 15 kA.

 (*) For calculation see Annex B Calculation of load current Ib

Table 1: Incandescent and halogen lamps

Ur= 400 V Ik= 15 kA

Incandescent/halogen lamps
Circuit-breaker type S200P D20 S200P D20 S200P D25 S200P D32 S200P D50
Setting Ekip LS/I ---- ---- ---- ---- ----
Contactor type A26 A26 A26 A26 A30
Rated Power [W] Rated current Ib [A]
60 0.27 57 65 70 103 142
100 0.45 34 38 42 62 85
200 0.91 17 19 20 30 42
300 1.37 11 12 13 20 28
500 2.28 6 7 8 12 16
1000 4.55 3 4 4 6 8

356 Electrical devices | ABB

 2.1 Protection and switching of lighting circuits

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Figure 1: Approximate diagram for the coordination of lamps with
protection and switching devices

[t]

Contactor Icw

Turning-on characteristics

1SDC010004F0901
[A]

Circuit-breaker characteristics

XT2N160 In63 XT2N160 In63 XT2N160 In100 XT2N160 In100 XT2N160 In100 XT2N160 In160
L= 0.68-12s S=8-0.1 L= 0.96-12s S=10-0.1 L= 0.68-12s S=8-0.1 L= 0.76-12s S=8-0.1 L= 0.96-12s S=10-0.1 L= 0.72-12s S=7-0.1
A40 A50 A63 A75 A95 A110
N° lamps per phase
155 220 246 272 355 390
93 132 147 163 210 240
46 65 73 80 105 120
1SDC010032F0201

30 43 48 53 70 80
18 26 29 32 42 48
9 13 14 16 21 24

ABB | Electrical devices 357

 2.1 Protection and switching of lighting circuits

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Table 2: Fluorescent lamps
Ur= 400 V Ik= 15 kA

Fluorescent lamps non PFC

Circuit-breaker type S200P D16 S200P D20 S200P D20 S200P D32 S200P D40
Setting Ekip LS/I
Contactor type A26 A26 A26 A26 A30
Rated Power [W] Rated current Ib [A]
20 0.38 40 44 50 73 100
40 0.45 33 37 42 62 84
65 0.7 21 24 27 40 54
80 0.8 18 21 23 35 47
100 1.15 13 14 16 24 33
110 1.2 12 14 15 23 31

Ur= 400 V Ik= 15 kA

Fluorescent lamps PFC

Circuit-breaker type S200P D25 S200P D25 S200P D32
Setting Ekip LS/I --- --- ---
Contactor type A26 A26 A26
Rated Power [W] Rated current Ib [A]
20 0.18 83 94 105
40 0.26 58 65 75
65 0.42 35 40 45
80 0.52 28 32 36
100 0.65 23 26 29
110 0.7 21 24 27

358 Electrical devices | ABB

 2.1 Protection and switching of lighting circuits

2 Protection of electrical equipment

S200P D50 S200P D63 XT2N160 In100 XT2N160 In100 XT2N160 In100 XT2N160 In160
L= 0.68-12s S=10-0.1 L= 0.76-12s S=10-0.1 L= 0.96-12s S=10-0.1 L= 0.68-12s S=10-0.1
A40 A50 A63 A75 A95 A110
N° lamps per phase
110 157 173 192 250 278
93 133 145 162 210 234
60 85 94 104 135 150

1SDC010033F0201
52 75 82 91 118 132
36 52 57 63 82 92
35 50 55 60 79 88

S200P D40 S200P D63 XT2N160 In63 XT2N160 In63 XT2N160 In100 XT2N160 In100 XT2N160 In100
--- --- L= 0.68-12s S=8-0.1 L= 1-12s S=10-0.1 L= 0.68-12s S=10-0.1 L= 0.76-12s S=10-0.1 L= 0.96-12s S=10-0.1
A26 A30 A40 A50 A63 A75 A95
N° lamps per phase
155 215 233 335 360 400 530
107 150 160 230 255 280 365
66 92 100 142 158 173 225
53 74 80 115 126 140 180
43 59 64 92 101 112 145
40 55 59 85 94 104 135

ABB | Electrical devices 359

 2.1 Protection and switching of lighting circuits

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Table 3: High intensity discharge lamps

Ur= 400 V Ik= 15 kA

Fluorescent lamps non PFC
Circuit-breaker type S200P D16 S200P D20 S200P D20 S200P D32 S200P D40
Setting Ekip LS/I
Contactor type A26 A26 A26 A26 A30
Rated Power [W] Rated current Ib [A]
150 1.8 6 7 8 11 15
250 3 4 4 5 7 9
400 4.4 3 3 3 4 6
600 6.2 1 2 2 3 4
1000 10.3 - 1 1 2 3

Ur= 400 V Ik= 15 kA

Fluorescent lamps PFC
Circuit-breaker type S200P D16 S200P D20 S200P D20 S200P D32 S200P D40
Setting Ekip LS/I --- --- --- --- ---
Contactor type A26 A26 A26 A26 A30
Rated Power [W] Rated current Ib [A]
150 1 13 14 15 23 28
250 1.5 8 9 10 15 18
400 2.5 5 5 6 9 11
600 3.3 4 4 5 7 8
1000 6.2 - - - 4 4

360 Electrical devices | ABB

 2.1 Protection and switching of lighting circuits

2 Protection of electrical equipment

S200P D40 S200P D50 S200P D63 XT2N160 In100 XT2N160 In100 XT2N160 In160
L=0.8-12s S=6.5-0.1s L=1-12s S=8-0.1s L=0.8-12s S=6.5-0.1s
A40 A50 A63 A75 A95 A110
N° lamps per phase
17 23 26 29 38 41
10 14 16 17 23 25
7 9 10 12 15 17
5 7 8 8 11 12
3 4 5 5 6 7

S200P D40 XT2N160 In100 XT2N160 In100 XT2N160 In100 XT2N160 In160 XT2N160 In160
--- L= 0.8-12s S=6.5-0.1s L= 0.88-12s S=6.5-0.1s L= 1-12s S=6.5-0.1s L= 0.84-12s S=4.5-0.1s L=0.88-12s S=4.5-0.1s
A40 A50 A63 A75 A95 A110
N° lamps per phase
30 50 58 63 81 88
20 33 38 42 54 59

1SDC010034F0201
12 20 23 25 32 36
9 15 17 19 24 27
5 8 9 10 13 14

Example:
Switching and protection of a lighting system, supplied by a three phase
network at 400 V 15 kA, made up of 55 incandescent lamps, of 200 W each,
per phase.
In Table 1, on the row corresponding to 200 W, select the cell showing the
number of controllable lamps immediately above the number of lamps per
phase present in the installation. In the specific case, corresponding to the cell
for 65 lamps per phase the following equipment are suggested:
- SACE Tmax XT2N160 In63 circuit-breaker with Ekip LS/I type electronic
release, with protection L set at 0.96, t1 at 12s and protection S set at 10,
t2 at 0.1s;
- A50 contactor.

ABB | Electrical devices 361

 2 Protection of electrical equipment
2.2 Protection and switching of generators

The need to guarantee an ever greater continuity of service has led to an increase
in the use of emergency supply generators, either as an alternative to, or in
parallel with the public utility supply network.

Typical configurations include:

• “Island supply” (independent functioning) of the priority loads in the case of a
lack of energy supply through the public network;
• supply to the user installation in parallel with the public supply network.

Unlike the public supply network, which has a constant contribution, in case
of a short-circuit, the current supplied by the generator is a function of the
parameters of the machine itself, and decreases with time; it is possible to
identify the following successive phases:
1. a subtransient phase: with a brief duration (10÷50 ms), characterized by
the subtransient reactance X”d (5÷20% of the rated impedance value),
and by the subtransient time constant T”d (5÷30 ms);
2. a transitory phase: may last up to some seconds (0.5÷2.5 s), and is
characterized by the transitory reactance X’d (15÷40% of the rated
impedance value), and by the transitory time constant T’d (0.03÷2.5 s);
3. a synchronous phase: may persist until the tripping of external protection,
and is characterized by the synchronous reactance Xd (80÷300% of the
rated impedance value).

t [s] 101
Synchronous
phase

Transient
phase

10-1

Subtransient
phase
10-2
1SDC010018F0201

10-3
1 10 102
x Irg

362 Electrical devices | ABB

 2.2 Protection and switching of generators

2 Protection of electrical equipment

As a first approximation, it can be estimated that the maximum value of the
short-circuit current of a generator, with rated power Srg, at the rated voltage
of the installation Ur, is equal to:

where
Irg is the rated current of the generator:

The circuit-breaker for the protection of the generator shall be selected according
to the following criteria:
• the set current higher than the rated current of the generator: I1 ≥ Irg;
• breaking capacity Icu or Ics higher than the maximum value of short-circuit
current at the installation point:
- in the case of a single generator: Icu(Ics) ≥ Ikg;
- in the case of n identical generators in parallel: Icu(Ics) ≥ Ikg·(n-1);
- in the case of operation in parallel with the network: Icu(Ics) ≥ IkNet,
as the short-circuit contribution from the network is normally
greater than the contribution from the generator;
• for circuit-breakers with thermomagnetic releases: low magnetic trip threshold:
I3 =2.5/3·In;
• for circuit-breakers with electronic releases:
-trip threshold of the delayed short-circuit protection function (S),
set between 1.5 and 4 times the rated current of the generator, in
such a way as to “intercept” the decrement curve of the generator:
I2 = (1.5÷4)·Irg; if the function S is not present, function I can be set
at the indicated values I3 = (1.5÷4)·Irg;
-trip threshold of the instantaneous short-circuit protection function
(I3) set at a value greater than the rated short-circuit current of the
generator, so as to achieve discrimination with the devices installed
downstream, and to allow fast tripping in the event of a short-circuit
upstream of the device (working in parallel with other generators or
with the network):

ABB | Electrical devices 363

 2.2 Protection and switching of generators

2 Protection of electrical equipment

The following tables give ABB SACE suggestions for the protection and switching
of generators; the tables refer to 400 V (Table 1), 440 V (Table 2), 500 V (Table
3) and 690 V (Table 4). Molded-case circuit-breakers can be equipped with
both thermomagnetic (TMG) as well as electronic releases.
Table 1 400 V Table 2 440 V
Srg [kVA] MCB MCCB ACB Srg [kVA] MCB MCCB ACB
4 S200 B6 4 S200 B6
6 S200 B10 6 S200 B8
7 7 S200 B10
S200 B13
9 9 S200 B13
11 S200 B16 11 S200 B16
14 14 S200 B20
S200 B25
17 17 S200 B25
19 19
21 S200 B32 21 S200 B32
22 22
28 XT1 160 28 S200 B40 XT1 160
S200 B50 XT2 160 XT2 160
31 31
S200 B50
35 35
38 S200 B63 38
42 42 S200 B63
44 44
48 S280 B80 48
55 S280 B80
55
69 S280 B100 69 S280 B100
80 80
87 87
100 100
111 111
138 XT3 250 138
159 XT4 250
159
173 XT3 250
173 XT4 250
180 180
190 190
T4 320
208 208
218 218 T4 320
242 T5 400 242
277 277 T5 400
308 308
311 311
346 T5 630 X1 630 346
381 T5 630 X1 630
381
415 415
436 436
T6 800 X1 800
484 484 T6 800 X1 800**
554 554
T7 1000 X1 1000**
692 692
T7 1000 X1 1000**
727 727
T7 1250 X1 1250*
1250**
865 865 T7 1250 X1 1250**
1107 T7 1600 X1 1600** 1107 T7 1600 X1 1600**
1730 E3 2500 1730 E3 2500
2180 2180
1SDC010016F0001

E3 3200
2214 2214 E3 3200
2250 E4 4000 2250
2500 2500 E4 3600
2800 E6 5000 2800 E4 4000
3150 3150
E6 6300 E6 5000
3500 3500
** also Emax CB type E1 can be used for this application

364 Electrical devices | ABB

 2.2 Protection and switching of generators

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Table 3 500 V Table 4 690 V

Srg [kVA] MCB MCCB ACB Srg [kVA] MCB MCCB ACB
4 4
6 6
7 7
9 9
11 11
14 14
17 17
19 19
21 21
22 22
28 28
31 31
35 35
38 XT1 160 38 XT1 160
42 XT2 160 42 XT2 160
44 44
48 48
55 55
69 69
80 80
87 87
100 100
111 111
138 138
159 159
173 173
XT3 250
180 XT4 250 180
190 190
208 208
218 218 XT3 250
T4 320 XT4 250
242 242
277 277
308 308
T5 400
311 311
T4 320
346 346
381 381
415 415
T5 630 X1 630 T5 400
436 436
484 484
554 554
T6 800 X1 800** T5 630 X1 630
692 692
727 727
T7 1000 X1 1000**
865 865 T6 800 X1 800**
1107 T7 1600 X1 1600** 1107 T7 1000 X1 1000**
1730 E2 2000 1730 T7 1600 X1 1600**
2180 2180
1SDC010017F0001

2214 E3 3200 2214 E2 2000

2250 2250
2500 2500
E3 2500
2800 E4 4000 2800
3150 3150
E3 3200
3500 E6 5000 3500
** also Emax CB type E1 can be used for this application

ABB | Electrical devices 365

 2.2 Protection and switching of generators

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Example:
Protection of a generator with Srg = 100 kVA, in a system with a rated voltage
of 440 V.
The generator parameters are:
Ur = 440 V
Srg = 100 kVA
f = 50 Hz
Irg = 131.2 A
X’’d = 6.5 % (subtransient reactance)
X’d = 17.6 % (transient reactance)
Xd = 230 % (synchronous reactance)
T’’d = 5.5 ms (subtransient time constant)
T’d = 39.3 ms (transient time constant)

From table 2, an SACE Tmax XT2N160 circuit-breaker is selected, with In = 160

A, with electronic trp unit Ekip G LS/I. For correct protection of the generator,
the following settings are selected:

function L: 0.84 – 3s, corresponding to 134.4 A, value greater than Irg

function I: 1.5

Time-Current Curves
10 4 s

10 3 s
XT2 160

10 2 s

10 1 s

1s
100 kVA generator
decrement curve
-1
10 s
1SDC010019F0201

10-2s

10-1kA 1kA 101kA

366 Electrical devices | ABB

 2 Protection of electrical equipment
2.3 Protection and switching of motors

Electromechanical starter
The starter is designed to:
- start motors;
- ensure continuous functioning of motors;
- disconnect motors from the supply line;
- guarantee protection of motors against working overloads.
The starter is typically made up of a switching device (contactor) and an overload
protection device (thermal release).
The two devices must be coordinated with equipment capable of providing
protection against short-circuit (typically a circuit-breaker with magnetic release
only), which is not necessarily part of the starter.

The characteristics of the starter must comply with the international Standard
IEC 60947-4-1, which defines the above as follows:

Contactor: a mechanical switching device having only one position of

rest, operated otherwise than by hand, capable of making, carrying and
breaking currents under normal circuit conditions including operating overload
conditions.

Thermal release: thermal overload relay or release which operates in the case
of overload and also in case of loss of phase.

Circuit-breaker: defined by IEC 60947-2 as a mechanical switching device,

capable of making, carrying and breaking currents under normal circuit
conditions and also making, carrying for a specified time and breaking currents
under specified abnormal circuit conditions.

The main types of motor which can be operated and which determine
the characteristics of the starter are defined by the following utilization
categories:

Table 1: Utilization categories and typical applications

Current type Utilization categories Typical applications
Slip-ring motors: starting,
AC-2 switching off
Alternating Current ac Squirrel-cage motors: starting,
AC-3 switching off during running(1)
Squirrel-cage motors: starting,
AC-4 plugging, inching

AC-3 categories may be used for occasionally inching or plugging for limited time periods
(1)

such as machine set-up; during such limited time periods the number of such operations
should not exceed five per minutes or more than ten in a 10 minutes period.

ABB | Electrical devices 367

 2.3 Protection and switching of motors

2 Protection of electrical equipment

The choice of the starting method and also, if necessary, of the type of motor to
be used depends on the typical resistant torque of the load and on the short-
circuit power of the motor supplying network.

With alternating current, the most commonly used motor types are as
follows:
- asynchronous three-phase squirrel-cage motors (AC-3): the most widespread
type due to the fact that they are of simple construction, economical and
sturdy; they develop high torque with short acceleration times, but require
elevated starting currents;
- slip-ring motors (AC-2): characterized by less demanding starting conditions,
and have quite a high starting torque, even with a supply network of low
power.

Starting methods
The most common starting methods for asynchronous squirrel-cage motors
are detailed below:

Direct starting
With direct starting, the DOL (Direct On Line) starter, with the closing of line
contactor KL, the line voltage is applied to the motor terminals in a single
operation. Hence a squirrel-cage motor develops a high starting torque with a
relatively reduced acceleration time. This method is generally used with small
and medium power motors which reach full working speed in a short time.
These advantages are, however, accompanied by a series of drawbacks,
including, for example:
- high current consumption and associated voltage drop which may cause
damages to the other parts of the system connected to the network;
- violent acceleration which has negative effects on mechanical transmission
components (belts, chains and mechanical joints), reducing working life.

MCCB

KL

TOR
1SDC010018F0001

Motor

368 Electrical devices | ABB

 2.3 Protection and switching of motors

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Other types of starting for squirrel-cage motors are accomplished by reducing
the supply voltage of the motor: this leads to a reduction in the starting current
and of the motor torque, and an increase in the acceleration time.

Star-Delta starter
The most common reduced voltage starter is the Star-Delta starter (Y-∆), in
which:
- on starting, the stator windings are star-connected, thus achieving the
reduction of peak inrush current;
- once the normal speed of the motor is nearly reached, the switchover to delta
is carried out.
After the switchover, the current and the torque follow the progress of the curves
associated with normal service connections (delta).

As can be easily checked, starting the motor with star-connection gives a

voltage reduction of √3, and the current absorbed from the line is reduced by
1/3 compared with that absorbed with delta-connection.
The start-up torque, proportional to the square of the voltage, is reduced by
3 times, compared with the torque that the same motor would supply when
delta-connected.
This method is generally applied to motors with power from 15 to 355 kW, but
intended to start with a low initial resistant torque.

MCCB

KL K∆ KY

TOR
1SDC010019F0001

Motor

Starting sequence
By pressing the start button, contactors KL and KY are closed. The timer starts
to measure the start time with the motor connected in star. Once the set time
has elapsed, the first contact of the timer opens the KY contactor and the
second contact, delayed by approximately 50 ms, closes the K∆ contactor.
With this new configuration, contactors KL and K∆ closed, the motor becomes
delta-connected.

ABB | Electrical devices 369

 2.3 Protection and switching of motors

2 Protection of electrical equipment

The thermal release TOR, inserted in the delta circuit, can detect any 3rd harmonic
currents, which may occur due to saturation of the magnetic pack and by adding
to the fundamental current, overload the motor without involving the line.

With reference to the connection diagram, the equipment used for a Star/Delta
starter must be able to carry the following currents:

KL line contactor and K∆ delta contactor

3

KY star contactor
3

overload protection release

3
where Ir is the rated current of the motor.

Starting with autotransformers

Starting with autotransformers is the most functional of the methods used
for reduced voltage starting, but is also the most expensive. The reduction of
the supply voltage is achieved by using a fixed tap autotransformer or a more
expensive multi tap autotransformer.
Applications can be found with squirrel-cage motors which generally have a
power from 50 kW to several hundred kilowatts, and higher power double-
cage motors.

MCCB

K2 K3 K1
1SDC010020F0001

TOR

Motor

The autotransformer reduces the network voltage by the factor K (K=1.25÷1.8),

and as a consequence the start-up torque is reduced by K2 times compared
with the value of the full rated voltage.
On starting, the motor is connected to the taps of the autotransformer and the
contactors K2 and K1 are closed.

370 Electrical devices | ABB

 2.3 Protection and switching of motors

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Therefore, the motor starts at a reduced voltage, and when it has reached
approximately 80% of its normal speed, contactor K1 is opened and main
contactor K3 is closed. Subsequently, contactor K2 is opened, excluding the
autotransformer so as to supply the full network voltage.

Starting with inductive reactors or resistors

This type of starting is used for simple or double-cage rotors. The reduction of
the supply voltage is achieved by the insertion of inductive reactors or resistors,
in series to the stator. On start-up, the current is limited to 2.5÷3.5 times the
rated value.
On starting, the motor is supplied via contactor K2; once the normal speed is
reached, the reactors are short-circuited by the closing of contactor K1, and
are then excluded by the opening of contactor K2.
It is possible to achieve exclusions by step of the resistors or reactors with time-
delayed commands, even for motors with power greater than 100 kW.
The use of reactors notably reduces the power factor, while the use of resistors
causes the dissipation of a high power (Joule effect), even if limited to the
starting phase.
For a reduction K (0.6÷0.8) of the motor voltage, the torque is reduced by K2
times (0.36÷0.64).

K1 K2

Inductance
1SDC010021F0001

TOR

Motor

In compliance with the above mentioned Standard, starters can also be classified
according to tripping time (trip classes), and according to the type of coordination
achieved with the short-circuit protection device (Type 1 and Type 2).

ABB | Electrical devices 371

 2.3 Protection and switching of motors

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Trip classes
The trip classes differentiate between the thermal releases according to their
trip curve.
The trip classes are defined in the following table 2:
Table 2: Trip class

Trip Class Tripping time in seconds (Tp)

10A 2 < Tp ≤ 10
10 4 < Tp ≤ 10
20 6 < Tp ≤ 20
30 9 < Tp ≤ 30

where Tp is the cold trip time of the thermal release at 7.2 times the set current
value (for example: a release in class 10 at 7.2 times the set current value must
not trip within 4 s, but must trip within 10 s).
It is normal procedure to associate class 10 with a normal start-up type, and
class 30 with a heavy duty start-up type.

Coordination type
Type 1
It is acceptable that in the case of short-circuit the contactor and the thermal
release may be damaged. The starter may still not be able to function and must
be inspected; if necessary, the contactor and/or the thermal release must be
replaced, and the breaker release reset.

Type 2
In the case of short-circuit, the thermal release must not be damaged, while the
welding of the contactor contacts is allowed, as they can easily be separated
(with a screwdriver, for example), without any significant deformation.

In order to clearly determine a coordination type, and therefore the equipment

necessary to achieve it, the following must be known:
• power of the motor in kW and type;
• rated system voltage;
• rated motor current;
• short-circuit current at installation point;
• starting type: DOL or Y/∆ - normal or heavy duty – Type 1 or Type 2.

The requested devices shall be coordinated with each other in accordance with
the prescriptions of the Standard.
For the most common voltages and short-circuit values (400 V - 440 V - 500 V -
690 V 35 kA - 50 kA) and for the most frequently used starting types, such as
direct starting and Star/Delta starting, for asynchronous squirrel-cage motor
(AC-3), ABB supplies solutions with:
• magnetic circuit-breaker - contactor - thermal release;
• thermomagnetic circuit-breaker - contactor;
• circuit-breaker with Ekip M LIU-LRIU or PR222MP electronic release - con-
tactor.
372 Electrical devices | ABB
 2.3 Protection and switching of motors

2 Protection of electrical equipment

The following is an example of the type of tables available:

Table 3: 400 V 35 kA DOL Normal Type 2

(Tmax XT/T – Contactor – TOR/EOL)

Motor Moulded Case Circuit Breaker Contactor Overload Relay

Current setting range
Rated Rated
I3 [A]
Power Current Type Type Type
[A]
[kW] [A] min max
0,37 1,1 XT2N160 MF 2 28 A9 TA25DU1.4 1 1,4
0,55 1,5 XT2N160 MF 2 28 A9 TA25DU1.8 1,3 1,8
0,75 1,9 XT2N160 MF 2 28 A9 TA25DU2.4 1,7 2,4
1,1 2,7 XT2N160 MF 4 56 A9 TA25DU4 2,8 4
1,5 3,6 XT2N160 MF 4 56 A16 TA25DU5 3,5 5
2,2 4,9 XT2N160 MF 8.5 120 A26 TA25DU6.5 4,5 6,5
3 6,5 XT2N160 MF 8.5 120 A26 TA25DU8.5 6 8,5
4 8,5 XT2N160 MF 12.5 175 A30 TA25DU11 7,5 11
5,5 11,5 XT2N160 MF 12.5 175 A30 TA25DU14 10 14
7,5 15,5 XT2N160 MA 20 210 A30 TA25DU19 13 19
11 22 XT2N160 MA 32 288 A30 TA42DU25 18 25
15 29 XT2N160 MA 52 392 A50 TA75DU42 29 42
18,5 35 XT2N160 MA 52 469 A50 TA75DU52 36 52
22 41 XT2N160 MA 52 547 A50 TA75DU52 36 52
30 55 XT2N160 MA 80 840 A63 TA75DU80 60 80
37 66 XT2N160 MA 80 960 A75 TA75DU80 60 80
45 80 XT2N160 MA 100 1200 A95 TA110DU110 80 110
55 97 XT3N250 MA 160 1440 A110 TA110DU110 80 110
75 132 XT3N250 MA 200 1800 A145 TA200DU175 130 175
90 160 XT3N250 MA 200 2400 A185 TA200DU200 150 200
110 195 T4N320 PR221-I In320 2720 A210 E320DU320 100 320
132 230 T5N400 PR221-I In400 3200 A260 E320DU320 100 320
160 280 T5N400 PR221-I In400 4000 A300 E320DU320 100 320
200 350 T5N630 PR221-I In630 5040 AF400 E500DU500 150 500
250 430 T6N630 PR221-I In630 6300 AF460 E500DU500 150 500
290 520 T6N800 PR221-I In800 7200 AF580 E800DU800 250 800
315 540 T6N800 PR221-I In800 8000 AF580 E800DU800 250 800
355 610 T6N800 PR221-I In800 8000 AF750 E800DU800 250 800
MA: magnetic only adjustable release
MF: fixed magnetic only release

ABB | Electrical devices 373

 2.3 Protection and switching of motors

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Table 4: 400 V 50 kA DOL Normal Type 2
(Tmax XT/T – Contactor – TOR/EOL)

Motor Moulded Case Circuit Breaker Contactor Overload Relay

Current setting range
Rated Rated
I3 [A]
Power Current Type Type Type
[A]
[kW] [A] min max
0,37 1,1 XT2S160 MF 2 28 A9 TA25DU1.4 1 1,4
0,55 1,5 XT2S160 MF 2 28 A9 TA25DU1.8 1,3 1,8
0,75 1,9 XT2S160 MF 2 28 A9 TA25DU2.4 1,7 2,4
1,1 2,7 XT2S160 MF 4 56 A9 TA25DU4 2,8 4
1,5 3,6 XT2S160 MF 4 56 A16 TA25DU5 3,5 5
2,2 4,9 XT2S160 MF 8.5 120 A26 TA25DU6.5 4,5 6,5
3 6,5 XT2S160 MF 8.5 120 A26 TA25DU8.5 6 8,5
4 8,5 XT2S160 MF 12.5 175 A30 TA25DU11 7,5 11
5,5 11,5 XT2S160 MF 12.5 175 A30 TA25DU14 10 14
7,5 15,5 XT2S160 MA 20 210 A30 TA25DU19 13 19
11 22 XT2S160 MA 32 288 A30 TA42DU25 18 25
15 29 XT2S160 MA 52 392 A50 TA75DU42 29 42
18,5 35 XT2S160 MA 52 469 A50 TA75DU52 36 52
22 41 XT2S160 MA 52 547 A50 TA75DU52 36 52
30 55 XT2S160 MA 80 840 A63 TA75DU80 60 80
37 66 XT2S160 MA 80 960 A75 TA75DU80 60 80
45 80 XT2S160 MA 100 1200 A95 TA110DU110 80 110
55 97 XT3S250 MA 160 1440 A110 TA110DU110 80 110
75 132 XT3S250 MA 200 1800 A145 TA200DU175 130 175
90 160 XT3S250 MA 200 2400 A185 TA200DU200 150 200
110 195 T4S320 PR221-I In320 2720 A210 E320DU320 100 320
132 230 T5S400 PR221-I In400 3200 A260 E320DU320 100 320
160 280 T5S400 PR221-I In400 4000 A300 E320DU320 100 320
200 350 T5S630 PR221-I In630 5040 AF400 E500DU500 150 500
250 430 T6S630 PR221-I In630 6300 AF460 E500DU500 150 500
290 520 T6S800 PR221-I In800 7200 AF580 E800DU800 250 800
315 540 T6S800 PR221-I In800 8000 AF580 E800DU800 250 800
355 610 T6S800 PR221-I In800 8000 AF750 E800DU800 250 800
MA: magnetic only adjustable release
MF: fixed magnetic only release

374 Electrical devices | ABB

 2.3 Protection and switching of motors

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Table 5: 400 V 70 kA DOL Normal Type 2
(Tmax XT/T – Contactor – TOR/EOL)

Motor Moulded Case Circuit Breaker Contactor Overload Relay

Current setting range
Rated Rated
I3 [A]
Power Current Type Type Type
[A]
[kW] [A] min max
0,37 1,1 XT2H160 MF 2 28 A9 TA25DU1.4 1 1,4
0,55 1,5 XT2H160 MF 2 28 A9 TA25DU1.8 1,3 1,8
0,75 1,9 XT2H160 MF 2 28 A9 TA25DU2.4 1,7 2,4
1,1 2,7 XT2H160 MF 4 56 A16 TA25DU4 2,8 4
1,5 3,6 XT2H160 MF 4 56 A26 TA25DU5 3,5 5
2,2 4,9 XT2H160 MF 8.5 120 A26 TA25DU6.5 4,5 6,5
3 6,5 XT2H160 MF 8.5 120 A26 TA25DU8.5 6 8,5
4 8,5 XT2H160 MF 12.5 175 A30 TA25DU11 7,5 11
5,5 11,5 XT2H160 MF 12.5 175 A50 TA25DU14 10 14
7,5 15,5 XT2H160 MA 20 210 A50 TA25DU19 13 19
11 22 XT2H160 MA 32 288 A50 TA42DU25 18 25
15 29 XT2H160 MA 52 392 A50 TA75DU42 29 42
18,5 35 XT2H160 MA 52 469 A50 TA75DU52 36 52
22 41 XT2H160 MA 52 547 A50 TA75DU52 36 52
30 55 XT2H160 MA 80 840 A63 TA75DU80 60 80
37 66 XT2H160 MA 80 960 A75 TA75DU80 60 80
45 80 XT2H160 MA 100 1200 A95 TA110DU110 80 110
55 97 XT4H250 Ekip-I In160 1360 A110 TA110DU110 80 110
75 132 XT4H250 Ekip-I In250 1875 A145 E200DU200 60 200
90 160 XT4H250 Ekip-I In250 2500 A185 E200DU200 60 200
110 195 T4H320 PR221-I In320 2720 A210 E320DU320 100 320
132 230 T5H400 PR221-I In400 3200 A260 E320DU320 100 320
160 280 T5H400 PR221-I In400 4000 A300 E320DU320 100 320
200 350 T5H630 PR221-I In630 5040 AF400 E500DU500 150 500
250 430 T6H630 PR221-I In630 6300 AF460 E500DU500 150 500
290 520 T6H800 PR221-I In800 7200 AF580 E800DU800 250 800
315 540 T6H800 PR221-I In800 8000 AF580 E800DU800 250 800
355 610 T6H800 PR221-I In800 8000 AF750 E800DU800 250 800
MA: magnetic only adjustable release
MF: fixed magnetic only release

ABB | Electrical devices 375

 2.3 Protection and switching of motors

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Table 6: 400 V 80 kA DOL Normal Type 2
(Tmax XT/T – Contactor – TOR/EOL)

Motor Moulded Case Circuit Breaker Contactor Overload Relay

Current setting range
Rated Rated
I3 [A]
Power Current Type Type Type
[A]
[kW] [A] min max
0,37 1,1 XT2L160 MF 2 28 A9 TA25DU1.4 1 1,4
0,55 1,5 XT2L160 MF 2 28 A9 TA25DU1.8 1,3 1,8
0,75 1,9 XT2L160 MF 2 28 A9 TA25DU2.4 1,7 2,4
1,1 2,7 XT2L160 MF 4 56 A16 TA25DU4 2,8 4
1,5 3,6 XT2L160 MF 4 56 A26 TA25DU5 3,5 5
2,2 4,9 XT2L160 MF 8.5 120 A26 TA25DU6.5 4,5 6,5
3 6,5 XT2L160 MF 8.5 120 A26 TA25DU8.5 6 8,5
4 8,5 XT2L160 MF 12.5 175 A30 TA25DU11 7,5 11
5,5 11,5 XT2L160 MF 12.5 175 A50 TA25DU14 10 14
7,5 15,5 XT2L160 MA 20 210 A50 TA25DU19 13 19
11 22 XT2L160 MA 32 288 A50 TA42DU25 18 25
15 29 XT2L160 MA 52 392 A50 TA75DU42 29 42
18,5 35 XT2L160 MA 52 469 A50 TA75DU52 36 52
22 41 XT2L160 MA 52 547 A50 TA75DU52 36 52
30 55 XT2L160 MA 80 840 A63 TA75DU80 60 80
37 66 XT2L160 MA 80 960 A75 TA75DU80 60 80
45 80 XT2L160 MA 100 1200 A95 TA110DU110 80 110
55 97 XT4L250 Ekip-I In160 1360 A110 TA110DU110 80 110
75 132 XT4L250 Ekip-I In250 1875 A145 E200DU200 60 200
90 160 XT4L250 Ekip-I In250 2500 A185 E200DU200 60 200
110 195 T4L320 PR221-I In320 2720 A210 E320DU320 100 320
132 230 T5L400 PR221-I In400 3200 A260 E320DU320 100 320
160 280 T5L400 PR221-I In400 4000 A300 E320DU320 100 320
200 350 T5L630 PR221-I In630 5040 AF400 E500DU500 150 500
250 430 T6L630 PR221-I In630 6300 AF460 E500DU500 150 500
290 520 T6L800 PR221-I In800 7200 AF580 E800DU800 250 800
315 540 T6L800 PR221-I In800 8000 AF580 E800DU800 250 800
355 610 T6L800 PR221-I In800 8000 AF750 E800DU800 250 800
MA: magnetic only adjustable release
MF: fixed magnetic only release

376 Electrical devices | ABB

 2.3 Protection and switching of motors

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Table 7: 400 V 35 kA DOL Normal Type 2
(Tmax XT/T – Contactor – EOL)

Motor Moulded Case Circuit Breaker Contactor Overload Relay

Current setting range
Rated Rated
I3 [A]
Power Current Type Type Type
[A]
[kW] [A] min max
0,37 1,1 XT2N160 MF 2 28 A9 E16DU2.7 0,9 2,7
0,55 1,5 XT2N160 MF 2 28 A9 E16DU2.7 0,9 2,7
0,75 1,9 XT2N160 MF 2 28 A9 E16DU2.7 0,9 2,7
1,1 2,7 XT2N160 MF 4 56 A9 E16DU6.3 2 6,3
1,5 3,6 XT2N160 MF 4 56 A16 E16DU6.3 2 6,3
2,2 4,9 XT2N160 MF 8.5 120 A26 E16DU6.3 2 6,3
3 6,5 XT2N160 MF 8.5 120 A26 E16DU18.9 5,7 18,9
4 8,5 XT2N160 MF 12.5 175 A30 E16DU18.9 5,7 18,9
5,5 11,5 XT2N160 MF 12.5 175 A30 E16DU18.9 5,7 18,9
7,5 15,5 XT2N160 MA 20 210 A30 E16DU18.9 5,7 18,9
11 22 XT2N160 MA 32 288 A30 E45DU45 15 45
15 29 XT2N160 MA 52 392 A50 E45DU45 15 45
18,5 35 XT2N160 MA 52 469 A50 E80DU80 27 80
22 41 XT2N160 MA 52 547 A50 E80DU80 27 80
30 55 XT2N160 MA 80 840 A63 E80DU80 27 80
37 66 XT2N160 MA 80 960 A75 E80DU80 27 80
45 80 XT2N160 MA 100 1200 A95 E140DU140 50 140
55 97 XT3N250 MA 160 1440 A110 E200DU200 60 200
75 132 XT3N250 MA 200 1800 A145 E200DU200 60 200
90 160 XT3N250 MA 200 2400 A185 E200DU200 60 200
110 195 T4N320 PR221-I In320 2720 A210 E320DU320 100 320
132 230 T5N400 PR221-I In400 3200 A260 E320DU320 100 320
160 280 T5N400 PR221-I In400 4000 A300 E320DU320 100 320
200 350 T5N630 PR221-I In630 5040 AF400 E500DU500 150 500
250 430 T6N630 PR221-I In630 6300 AF460 E500DU500 150 500
290 520 T6N800 PR221-I In800 7200 AF580 E800DU800 250 800
315 540 T6N800 PR221-I In800 8000 AF580 E800DU800 250 800
355 610 T6N800 PR221-I In800 8000 AF750 E800DU800 250 800

ABB | Electrical devices 377

 2.3 Protection and switching of motors

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Table 8: 400 V 50 kA DOL Normal Type 2
(Tmax XT/T – Contactor – EOL)

Motor Moulded Case Circuit Breaker Contactor Overload Relay

Current setting range
Rated Rated
I3 [A]
Power Current Type Type Type
[A]
[kW] [A] min max
0,37 1,1 XT2S160 MF 2 28 A9 E16DU2.7 0,9 2,7
0,55 1,5 XT2S160 MF 2 28 A9 E16DU2.7 0,9 2,7
0,75 1,9 XT2S160 MF 2 28 A9 E16DU2.7 0,9 2,7
1,1 2,7 XT2S160 MF 4 56 A9 E16DU6.3 2 6,3
1,5 3,6 XT2S160 MF 4 56 A16 E16DU6.3 2 6,3
2,2 4,9 XT2S160 MF 8.5 120 A26 E16DU6.3 2 6,3
3 6,5 XT2S160 MF 8.5 120 A26 E16DU18.9 5,7 18,9
4 8,5 XT2S160 MF 12.5 175 A30 E16DU18.9 5,7 18,9
5,5 11,5 XT2S160 MF 12.5 175 A30 E16DU18.9 5,7 18,9
7,5 15,5 XT2S160 MA 20 210 A30 E16DU18.9 5,7 18,9
11 22 XT2S160 MA 32 288 A30 E45DU45 15 45
15 29 XT2S160 MA 52 392 A50 E45DU45 15 45
18,5 35 XT2S160 MA 52 469 A50 E80DU80 27 80
22 41 XT2S160 MA 52 547 A50 E80DU80 27 80
30 55 XT2S160 MA 80 840 A63 E80DU80 27 80
37 66 XT2S160 MA 80 960 A75 E80DU80 27 80
45 80 XT2S160 MA 100 1200 A95 E140DU140 50 140
55 97 XT3S250 MA 160 1440 A110 E200DU200 60 200
75 132 XT3S250 MA 200 1800 A145 E200DU200 60 200
90 160 XT3S250 MA 200 2400 A185 E200DU200 60 200
110 195 T4S320 PR221-I In320 2720 A210 E320DU320 100 320
132 230 T5S400 PR221-I In400 3200 A260 E320DU320 100 320
160 280 T5S400 PR221-I In400 4000 A300 E320DU320 100 320
200 350 T5S630 PR221-I In630 5040 AF400 E500DU500 150 500
250 430 T6S630 PR221-I In630 6300 AF460 E500DU500 150 500
290 520 T6S800 PR221-I In800 7200 AF580 E800DU800 250 800
315 540 T6S800 PR221-I In800 8000 AF580 E800DU800 250 800
355 610 T6S800 PR221-I In800 8000 AF750 E800DU800 250 800

378 Electrical devices | ABB

 2.3 Protection and switching of motors

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Table 9: 400 V 70 kA DOL Normal Type 2
(Tmax XT/T – Contactor – EOL)

Motor Moulded Case Circuit Breaker Contactor Overload Relay

Current setting range
Rated Rated
I3 [A]
Power Current Type Type Type
[A]
[kW] [A] min max
0,37 1,1 XT2H160 MF 2 28 A9 E16DU2.7 0,9 2,7
0,55 1,5 XT2H160 MF 2 28 A9 E16DU2.7 0,9 2,7
0,75 1,9 XT2H160 MF 2 28 A9 E16DU2.7 0,9 2,7
1,1 2,7 XT2H160 MF 4 56 A16 E16DU6.3 2 6,3
1,5 3,6 XT2H160 MF 4 56 A26 E16DU6.3 2 6,3
2,2 4,9 XT2H160 MF 8.5 120 A26 E16DU6.3 2 6,3
3 6,5 XT2H160 MF 8.5 120 A26 E16DU18.9 5,7 18,9
4 8,5 XT2H160 MF 12.5 175 A30 E16DU18.9 5,7 18,9
5,5 11,5 XT2H160 MF 12.5 175 A50 E16DU18.9 5,7 18,9
7,5 15,5 XT2H160 MA 20 210 A50 E16DU18.9 5,7 18,9
11 22 XT2H160 MA 32 288 A50 E45DU45 15 45
15 29 XT2H160 MA 52 392 A50 E45DU45 15 45
18,5 35 XT2H160 MA 52 469 A50 E80DU80 27 80
22 41 XT2H160 MA 52 547 A50 E80DU80 27 80
30 55 XT2H160 MA 80 840 A63 E80DU80 27 80
37 66 XT2H160 MA 80 960 A75 E80DU80 27 80
45 80 XT2H160 MA 100 1200 A95 E140DU140 50 140
55 97 XT4H250 Ekip-I In160 1360 A110 E200DU200 60 200
75 132 XT4H250 Ekip-I In250 1875 A145 E200DU200 60 200
90 160 XT4H250 Ekip-I In250 2500 A185 E200DU200 60 200
110 195 T4H320 PR221-I In320 2720 A210 E320DU320 100 320
132 230 T5H400 PR221-I In400 3200 A260 E320DU320 100 320
160 280 T5H400 PR221-I In400 4000 A300 E320DU320 100 320
200 350 T5H630 PR221-I In630 5040 AF400 E500DU500 150 500
250 430 T6H630 PR221-I In630 6300 AF460 E500DU500 150 500
290 520 T6H800 PR221-I In800 7200 AF580 E800DU800 250 800
315 540 T6H800 PR221-I In800 8000 AF580 E800DU800 250 800
355 610 T6H800 PR221-I In800 8000 AF750 E800DU800 250 800

ABB | Electrical devices 379

 2.3 Protection and switching of motors

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Table 10: 400 V 80 kA DOL Normal Type 2
(Tmax XT/T – Contactor – EOL)

Motor Moulded Case Circuit Breaker Contactor Overload Relay

Current setting range
Rated Rated
I3 [A]
Power Current Type Type Type
[A]
[kW] [A] min max
0,37 1,1 XT2L160 MF 2 28 A9 E16DU2.7 0,9 2,7
0,55 1,5 XT2L160 MF 2 28 A9 E16DU2.7 0,9 2,7
0,75 1,9 XT2L160 MF 2 28 A9 E16DU2.7 0,9 2,7
1,1 2,7 XT2L160 MF 4 56 A16 E16DU6.3 2 6,3
1,5 3,6 XT2L160 MF 4 56 A26 E16DU6.3 2 6,3
2,2 4,9 XT2L160 MF 8.5 120 A26 E16DU6.3 2 6,3
3 6,5 XT2L160 MF 8.5 120 A26 E16DU18.9 5,7 18,9
4 8,5 XT2L160 MF 12.5 175 A30 E16DU18.9 5,7 18,9
5,5 11,5 XT2L160 MF 12.5 175 A50 E16DU18.9 5,7 18,9
7,5 15,5 XT2L160 MA 20 210 A50 E16DU18.9 5,7 18,9
11 22 XT2L160 MA 32 288 A50 E45DU45 15 45
15 29 XT2L160 MA 52 392 A50 E45DU45 15 45
18,5 35 XT2L160 MA 52 469 A50 E80DU80 27 80
22 41 XT2L160 MA 52 547 A50 E80DU80 27 80
30 55 XT2L160 MA 80 840 A63 E80DU80 27 80
37 66 XT2L160 MA 80 960 A75 E80DU80 27 80
45 80 XT2L160 MA 100 1200 A95 E140DU140 50 140
55 97 XT4L250 Ekip-I In160 1360 A110 E200DU200 60 200
75 132 XT4L250 Ekip-I In250 1875 A145 E200DU200 60 200
90 160 XT4L250 Ekip-I In250 2500 A185 E200DU200 60 200
110 195 T4L320 PR221-I In320 2720 A210 E320DU320 100 320
132 230 T5L400 PR221-I In400 3200 A260 E320DU320 100 320
160 280 T5L400 PR221-I In400 4000 A300 E320DU320 100 320
200 350 T5L630 PR221-I In630 5040 AF400 E500DU500 150 500
250 430 T6L630 PR221-I In630 6300 AF460 E500DU500 150 500
290 520 T6L800 PR221-I In800 7200 AF580 E800DU800 250 800
315 540 T6L800 PR221-I In800 8000 AF580 E800DU800 250 800
355 610 T6L800 PR221-I In800 8000 AF750 E800DU800 250 800

380 Electrical devices | ABB

 2.3 Protection and switching of motors

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Table 11: 440 V 50 kA DOL Normal Type 2
(Tmax XT/T – Contactor – TOR/EOL)

Motor Moulded Case Circuit Breaker Contactor Overload Relay

Current setting range
Rated Rated
I3 [A]
Power Current Type Type Type
[A]
[kW] [A] min max
0,37 1 XT2S160 MF 1 14 A9 TA25DU1.4 1 1,4
0,55 1,3 XT2S160 MF 2 28 A9 TA25DU1.8 1,3 1,8
0,75 1,7 XT2S160 MF 2 28 A9 TA25DU2.4 1,7 2,4
1,1 2,4 XT2S160 MF 4 56 A9 TA25DU3.1 2,2 3,1
1,5 3,2 XT2S160 MF 4 56 A16 TA25DU4 2,8 4
2,2 4,3 XT2S160 MF 8.5 120 A26 TA25DU5 3,5 5
3 5,7 XT2S160 MF 8.5 120 A26 TA25DU6.5 4,5 6,5
4 7,4 XT2S160 MF 8.5 120 A30 TA25DU11 7,5 11
5,5 10,1 XT2S160 MF 12 175 A30 TA25DU14 10 14
7,5 13,6 XT2S160 MA 20 180 A30 TA25DU19 13 19
11 19,3 XT2S160 MA 32 240 A30 TA42DU25 18 25
15 25,4 XT2S160 MA 32 336 A50 TA75DU32 22 32
18,5 30,7 XT2S160 MA 52 469 A50 TA75DU42 29 42
22 35,9 XT2S160 MA 52 547 A50 TA75DU52 36 52
30 48,2 XT2S160 MA 80 720 A63 TA75DU63 45 63
37 58 XT2S160 MA 80 840 A75 TA75DU80 60 80
45 70 XT2S160 MA 100 1050 A95 TA110DU90 65 90
55 85 XT4S250 Ekip-I In160 1200 A110 TA110DU110 80 110
75 116 XT4S250 Ekip-I In250 1750 A145 E200DU200 60 200
90 140 XT4S250 Ekip-I In250 2000 A185 E200DU200 60 200
110 171 XT4S250 Ekip-I In250 2500 A210 E320DU320 100 320
132 202 T5H400 PR221-I In320 3200 A260 E320DU320 100 320
160 245 T5H400 PR221-I In400 3600 A300 E320DU320 100 320
200 307 T5H630 PR221-I In630 4410 AF 400 E500DU500 150 500
250 377 T6H630 PR221-I In630 5355 AF 460 E500DU500 150 500
290 448 T6H630 PR221-I In630 6300 AF 580 E500DU500* 150 500
315 473 T6H800 PR221-I In800 7200 AF 580 E800DU800 250 800
355 535 T6H800 PR221-I In800 8000 AF 580 E800DU800 250 800

(*) Connection kit not available. To use connection kit provide E800DU800

MA: magnetic only adjustable release

MF: fixed magnetic only release

ABB | Electrical devices 381

 2.3 Protection and switching of motors

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Table 12: 440 V 65 kA DOL Normal Type 2
(Tmax XT/T – Contactor – TOR/EOL)

Motor Moulded Case Circuit Breaker Contactor Overload Relay

Current setting range
Rated Rated
I3 [A]
Power Current Type Type Type
[A]
[kW] [A] min max
0,37 1 XT2H160 MF 1 14 A9 TA25DU1.4 1 1,4
0,55 1,3 XT2H160 MF 2 28 A9 TA25DU1.8 1,3 1,8
0,75 1,7 XT2H160 MF 2 28 A9 TA25DU2.4 1,7 2,4
1,1 2,4 XT2H160 MF 4 56 A16 TA25DU3.1 2,2 3,1
1,5 3,2 XT2H160 MF 4 56 A16 TA25DU4 2,8 4
2,2 4,3 XT2H160 MF 8.5 120 A26 TA25DU5 3,5 5
3 5,7 XT2H160 MF 8.5 120 A30 TA25DU6.5 4,5 6,5
4 7,4 XT2H160 MF 8.5 120 A30 TA25DU11 7,5 11
5,5 10,1 XT2H160 MF 12.5 175 A30 TA25DU14 10 14
7,5 13,6 XT2H160 MA 20 180 A30 TA25DU19 13 19
11 19,3 XT2H160 MA 32 240 A50 TA42DU25 18 25
15 25,4 XT2H160 MA 32 336 A50 TA75DU32 22 32
18,5 30,7 XT2H160 MA 52 469 A50 TA75DU42 29 42
22 35,9 XT2H160 MA 52 547 A50 TA75DU52 36 52
30 48,2 XT2H160 MA 80 720 A63 TA75DU63 45 63
37 58 XT2H160 MA 80 840 A75 TA75DU80 60 80
45 70 XT2H160 MA 100 1050 A95 TA110DU90 65 90
55 85 XT4H250 Ekip-I In160 1200 A110 TA110DU110 80 110
75 116 XT4H250 Ekip-I In250 1750 A145 E200DU200 60 200
90 140 XT4H250 Ekip-I In250 2000 A185 E200DU200 60 200
110 171 XT4H250 Ekip-I In250 2500 A210 E320DU320 100 320
132 202 T5H400 PR221-I In320 3200 A260 E320DU320 100 320
160 245 T5H400 PR221-I In400 3600 A300 E320DU320 100 320
200 307 T5H630 PR221-I In630 4410 AF 400 E500DU500 150 500
250 377 T6L630 PR221-I In630 5355 AF 460 E500DU500 150 500
290 448 T6L630 PR221-I In630 6300 AF 580 E500DU500* 150 500
315 473 T6L800 PR221-I In800 7200 AF 580 E800DU800 250 800
355 535 T6L800 PR221-I In800 8000 AF 580 E800DU800 250 800

(*) Connection kit not available. To use connection kit provide E800DU800

MA: magnetic only adjustable release

MF: fixed magnetic only release

382 Electrical devices | ABB

 2.3 Protection and switching of motors

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Table 13: 440 V 50 kA DOL Normal Type 2
(Tmax XT/T – Contactor – EOL)

Motor Moulded Case Circuit Breaker Contactor Overload Relay

Current setting range
Rated Rated
I3 [A]
Power Current Type Type Type
[A]
[kW] [A] min max
0,37 1 XT2S160 MF 1 14 A9 E16DU2.7 0,9 2,7
0,55 1,3 XT2S160 MF 2 28 A9 E16DU2.7 0,9 2,7
0,75 1,7 XT2S160 MF 2 28 A9 E16DU2.7 0,9 2,7
1,1 2,4 XT2S160 MF 4 56 A9 E16DU2.7 0,9 2,7
1,5 3,2 XT2S160 MF 4 56 A16 E16DU6.3 2 6,3
2,2 4,3 XT2S160 MF 8.5 120 A26 E16DU6.3 2 6,3
3 5,7 XT2S160 MF 8.5 120 A26 E16DU6.3 2 6,3
4 7,4 XT2S160 MF 8.5 120 A30 E16DU18.9 5,7 18,9
5,5 10,1 XT2S160 MF 12 175 A30 E16DU18.9 5,7 18,9
7,5 13,6 XT2S160 MA 20 180 A30 E16DU18.9 5,7 18,9
11 19,3 XT2S160 MA 32 240 A30 E45DU45 15 45
15 25,4 XT2S160 MA 32 336 A50 E45DU45 15 45
18,5 30,7 XT2S160 MA 52 469 A50 E45DU45 15 45
22 35,9 XT2S160 MA 52 547 A50 E45DU45 15 45
30 48,2 XT2S160 MA 80 720 A63 E80DU80 27 80
37 58 XT2S160 MA 80 840 A75 E80DU80 27 80
45 70 XT2S160 MA 100 1050 A95 E140DU140 50 140
55 85 XT4S250 Ekip-I In160 1200 A110 E200DU200 60 200
75 116 XT4S250 Ekip-I In250 1750 A145 E200DU200 60 200
90 140 XT4S250 Ekip-I In250 2000 A185 E200DU200 60 200
110 171 XT4S250 Ekip-I In250 2500 A210 E320DU320 100 320
132 202 T5H400 PR221-I In320 3200 A260 E320DU320 100 320
160 245 T5H400 PR221-I In400 3600 A300 E320DU320 100 320
200 307 T5H630 PR221-I In630 4410 AF 400 E500DU500 150 500
250 377 T6H630 PR221-I In630 5355 AF 460 E500DU500 150 500
290 448 T6H630 PR221-I In630 7560 AF 580 E800DU800 250 800
315 473 T6H800 PR221-I In800 8000 AF 580 E800DU800 250 800
355 535 T6H800 PR221-I In800 9600 AF 580 E800DU800 250 800

ABB | Electrical devices 383

 2.3 Protection and switching of motors

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Table 14: 440 V 65 kA DOL Normal Type 2
(Tmax XT/T – Contactor – EOL)

Motor Moulded Case Circuit Breaker Contactor Overload Relay

Current setting range
Rated Rated
I3 [A]
Power Current Type Type Type
[A]
[kW] [A] min max
0,37 1 XT2H160 MF 1 14 A9 E16DU2.7 0,9 2,7
0,55 1,3 XT2H160 MF 2 28 A9 E16DU2.7 0,9 2,7
0,75 1,7 XT2H160 MF 2 28 A9 E16DU2.7 0,9 2,7
1,1 2,4 XT2H160 MF 4 56 A16 E16DU2.7 0,9 2,7
1,5 3,2 XT2H160 MF 4 56 A16 E16DU6.3 2 6,3
2,2 4,3 XT2H160 MF 8.5 120 A26 E16DU6.3 2 6,3
3 5,7 XT2H160 MF 8.5 120 A30 E16DU6.3 2 6,3
4 7,4 XT2H160 MF 8.5 120 A30 E16DU18.9 5,7 18,9
5,5 10,1 XT2H160 MF 12.5 175 A30 E16DU18.9 5,7 18,9
7,5 13,6 XT2H160 MA 20 180 A30 E16DU18.9 5,7 18,9
11 19,3 XT2H160 MA 32 240 A50 E45DU45 15 45
15 25,4 XT2H160 MA 32 336 A50 E45DU45 15 45
18,5 30,7 XT2H160 MA 52 469 A50 E45DU45 15 45
22 35,9 XT2H160 MA 52 547 A50 E45DU45 15 45
30 48,2 XT2H160 MA 80 720 A63 E80DU80 27 80
37 58 XT2H160 MA 80 840 A75 E80DU80 27 80
45 70 XT2H160 MA 100 1050 A95 E140DU140 50 140
55 85 XT4H250 Ekip-I In160 1200 A110 E200DU200 60 200
75 116 XT4H250 Ekip-I In250 1750 A145 E200DU200 60 200
90 140 XT4H250 Ekip-I In250 2000 A185 E200DU200 60 200
110 171 XT4H250 Ekip-I In250 2500 A210 E320DU320 100 320
132 202 T5H400 PR221-I In320 3200 A260 E320DU320 100 320
160 245 T5H400 PR221-I In400 3600 A300 E320DU320 100 320
200 307 T5H630 PR221-I In630 4410 AF 400 E500DU500 150 500
250 377 T6L630 PR221-I In630 5355 AF 460 E500DU500 150 500
290 448 T6L630 PR221-I In630 6300 AF 580 E800DU800 250 800
315 473 T6L800 PR221-I In800 7200 AF 580 E800DU800 250 800
355 535 T6L800 PR221-I In800 8000 AF 580 E800DU800 250 800

384 Electrical devices | ABB

 2.3 Protection and switching of motors

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Table 15: 500 V 50 kA DOL Normal Type 2
(Tmax XT/T – Contactor – TOR/EOL)

Motor Moulded Case Circuit Breaker Contactor Overload Relay

Current setting range
Rated Rated
I3 [A]
Power Current Type Type Type
[A]
[kW] [A] min max
0,37 0,88 XT2H160 MF 1 14 A9 TA25DU1.0 0,63 1
0,55 1,2 XT2H160 MF 2 28 A9 TA25DU1.4 1 1,4
0,75 1,5 XT2H160 MF 2 28 A9 TA25DU1.8 1,3 1,8
1,1 2,2 XT2H160 MF 4 56 A9 TA25DU3.1 2,2 3,1
1,5 2,8 XT2H160 MF 4 56 A16 TA25DU4 2,8 4
2,2 3,9 XT2H160 MF 8.5 120 A26 TA25DU5 3,5 5
3 5,2 XT2H160 MF 8.5 120 A26 TA25DU6.5 4,5 6,5
4 6,8 XT2H160 MF 8.5 120 A30 TA25DU8.5 6 8,5
5,5 9,2 XT2H160 MF 12.5 175 A30 TA25DU11 7,5 11
7,5 12,4 XT2H160 MF 12.5 163 A30 TA25DU14 10 14
11 17,6 XT2H160 MA 20 240 A30 TA25DU19 13 19
15 23 XT2H160 MA 32 336 A50 TA75DU25 18 25
18,5 28 XT2H160 MA 52 392 A50 TA75DU32 22 32
22 33 XT2H160 MA 52 469 A50 TA75DU42 29 42
30 44 XT2H160 MA 52 624 A63 TA75DU52 36 52
37 53 XT2H160 MA 80 840 A75 TA75DU63 45 63
45 64 XT2H160 MA 80 960 A95 TA80DU80 60 80
55 78 XT2H160 MA 100 1200 A110 TA110DU90 65 90
75 106 XT4H250 Ekip-I In160 1440 A145 E200DU200 60 200
90 128 XT4H250 Ekip-I In250 1875 A145 E200DU200 60 200
110 156 XT4H250 Ekip-I In250 2250 A185 E200DU200 60 200
132 184 T4H320 PR221-I In320 2720 A210 E320DU320 100 320
160 224 T5H400 PR221-I In400 3600 A260 E320DU320 100 320
200 280 T5H400 PR221-I In400 4000 A300 E320DU320 100 320
250 344 T5H630 PR221-I In630 4725 AF400 E500DU500 150 500
290 394 T6H630 PR221-I In630 5040 AF460 E500DU500 150 500
315 432 T6H630 PR221-I In630 6300 AF580 E500DU500* 150 500
355 488 T6H630 PR221-I In630 6300 AF580 E800DU800 250 800

(*) Connection kit not available. To use connection kit provide E800DU800

ABB | Electrical devices 385

 2.3 Protection and switching of motors

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Table 16: 500 V 50 kA DOL Normal Type 2
(Tmax XT/T – Contactor – EOL)

Motor Moulded Case Circuit Breaker Contactor Overload Relay

Current setting range
Rated Rated
I3 [A]
Power Current Type Type Type
[A]
[kW] [A] min max
0,37 0,88 XT2H160 MF 1 14 A9 E16DU2.7 0,9 2,7
0,55 1,2 XT2H160 MF 2 28 A9 E16DU2.7 0,9 2,7
0,75 1,5 XT2H160 MF 2 28 A9 E16DU2.7 0,9 2,7
1,1 2,2 XT2H160 MF 4 56 A9 E16DU2.7 0,9 2,7
1,5 2,8 XT2H160 MF 4 56 A16 E16DU6.3 2 6,3
2,2 3,9 XT2H160 MF 8.5 120 A26 E16DU6.3 2 6,3
3 5,2 XT2H160 MF 8.5 120 A26 E16DU6.3 2 6,3
4 6,8 XT2H160 MF 8.5 120 A30 E16DU18.9 5,7 18,9
5,5 9,2 XT2H160 MF 12.5 175 A30 E16DU18.9 5,7 18,9
7,5 12,4 XT2H160 MF 12.5 163 A50 E16DU18.9 5,7 18,9
11 17,6 XT2H160 MA 20 240 A50 E45DU45 15 45
15 23 XT2H160 MA 32 336 A50 E45DU45 15 45
18,5 28 XT2H160 MA 52 392 A50 E45DU45 15 45
22 33 XT2H160 MA 52 469 A50 E45DU45 15 45
30 44 XT2H160 MA 52 624 A63 E80DU80 27 80
37 53 XT2H160 MA 80 840 A75 E80DU80 27 80
45 64 XT2H160 MA 80 960 A95 E140DU140 50 140
55 78 XT2H160 MA 100 1200 A110 E200DU200 60 200
75 106 XT4H250 Ekip-I In160 1440 A145 E200DU200 60 200
90 128 XT4H250 Ekip-I In250 1875 A145 E200DU200 60 200
110 156 XT4H250 Ekip-I In250 2250 A185 E320DU320 100 320
132 184 T4H320 PR221-I In320 2720 A210 E320DU320 100 320
160 224 T5H400 PR221-I In400 3600 A260 E320DU320 100 320
200 280 T5H400 PR221-I In400 4000 A300 E500DU500 150 500
250 344 T5H630 PR221-I In630 4725 AF400 E500DU500 150 500
290 394 T6H630 PR221-I In630 5040 AF460 E800DU800 250 800
315 432 T6H630 PR221-I In630 6300 AF580 E800DU800 250 800
355 488 T6H630 PR221-I In630 6300 AF580 E800DU800 250 800

386 Electrical devices | ABB

 2.3 Protection and switching of motors

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Table 17: 690 V 25 kA DOL Normal Type 2
(Tmax XT – Contactor – TOR/EOL)

Motor Moulded Case Circuit Breaker Contactor KORC Overload Relay

Current
Rated Rated Number setting
I3 range
Power Current Type Type Type of Type
[A] [A]
[kW] [A] turns
min max
0,37 0,64 XT2V160 MF 1 14 A9 TA25DU1 0,6 1
0,55 0,87 XT2V160 MF 1 14 A9 TA25DU1 0,6 1
0,75 1,1 XT2V160 MF 2 28 A9 TA25DU1.4 1 1,4
1,1 1,6 XT2V160 MF 2 28 A9 TA25DU1.8 1,3 1,8
1,5 2,1 XT2V160 MF 4 56 A9 TA25DU2.4 1,7 2,4
2,2 2,8 XT2V160 MF 4 56 A9 TA25DU3.1 * 2,2 3,1
3 3,8 XT2V160 MF 4 56 A9 TA25DU4 * 2,8 4
4 4,9 XT2V160 MF 8.5 120 A9 TA25DU5 * 3,5 5
XT2V160 MF 8.5 120 A9 TA25DU6.5 6 5
5,5 6,7
XT4V250 EKIP-I In 100 150 A95 4L185R/4 13** TA25DU2.4 6 5
7,5 8,9 XT4V250 EKIP-I In 100 150 A95 4L185R/4 10** TA25DU2.4 7,9 11,1
11 12,8 XT4V250 EKIP-I In 100 200 A95 4L185R/4 7** TA25DU2.4 11,2 15,9
15 17 XT4V250 EKIP-I In 100 250 A95 4L185R/4 7** TA25DU3.1 15,2 20,5
18,5 21 XT4V250 EKIP-I In 100 300 A95 4L185R/4 6 TA25DU3.1 17,7 23,9
22 24 XT4V250 EKIP-I In 100 350 A95 4L185R/4 6 TA25DU4 21,6 30,8
30 32 XT4V250 EKIP-I In 100 450 A145 4L185R/4 6 TA25DU5 27 38,5
37 39 XT4V250 EKIP-I In 100 550 A145 4L185R/4 4 TA25DU4 32,4 46,3
45 47 XT4V250 EKIP-I In 100 700 A145 4L185R/4 4 TA25DU5 40,5 57,8
55 57 XT4V250 EKIP-I In 100 800 A145 4L185R/4 3 TA25DU5 54 77,1
75 77 XT4V250 EKIP-I In 160 1120 A145 E200DU200 65 200
90 93 XT4V250 EKIP-I In 160 1280 A145 E200DU200 65 200
110 113 XT4V250 EKIP-I In 250 1625 A145 E200DU200 65 200
132 134 XT4V250 EKIP-I In 250 2000 A185 E200DU200 65 200
160 162 XT4V250 EKIP-I In 250 2250 A185 E200DU200 65 200
(*) Type 1 coordination
(**) Cable cross section equal to 4 mm2
(***) No mounting kit to contactor is available

MA: magnetic only adjustable release
MF: fixed magnetic only release

ABB | Electrical devices 387

 2.3 Protection and switching of motors

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Table 18: 690 V 50 kA DOL Normal Type 2
(Tmax T – Contactor – TOR/EOL)

Motor Moulded Case Circuit Breaker Contactor KORC Overload Relay

Current
Rated Rated Number setting
I3 range
Power Current Type Type Type of Type
[A] [A]
[kW] [A] turns
min max
0,37 0,64 T2L160 MF1 13 A9 TA25DU1 0,6 1
0,55 0,87 T2L160 MF1 13 A9 TA25DU1 0,6 1
0,75 1,1 T2L160 MF 1.6 21 A9 TA25DU1.4 1 1,4
1,1 1,6 T2L160 MF 1.6 21 A9 TA25DU1.8 1,3 1,8
1,5 2,1 T2L160 MF 2.5 33 A9 TA25DU2.4; 1,7 2,4
2,2 2,8 T2L160 MF 3.2 42 A9 TA25DU3.1 * 2,2 3,1
3 3,8 T2L160 MF 4 52 A9 TA25DU4 * 2,8 4
4 4,9 T2L160 MF 5 65 A9 TA25DU5 * 3,5 5
T2L160 MF 6.5 84 A9 TA25DU6.5 4,5 6,5
5,5 6,7
T4L250 PR221-I In 100 150 A95 4L185R/4 13** TA25DU2.4 6 8,5
7,5 8,9 T4L250 PR221-I In 100 150 A95 4L185R/4 10** TA25DU2.4 7,9 11,1
11 12,8 T4L250 PR221-I In 100 200 A95 4L185R/4 7** TA25DU2.4 11,2 15,9
15 17 T4L250 PR221-I In 100 250 A95 4L185R/4 7** TA25DU3.1 15,2 20,5
18,5 21 T4L250 PR221-I In 100 300 A95 4L185R/4 6 TA25DU3.1 17,7 23,9
22 24 T4L250 PR221-I In 100 350 A95 4L185R/4 6 TA25DU4 21,6 30,8
30 32 T4L250 PR221-I In 100 450 A145 4L185R/4 6 TA25DU5 27 38,5
37 39 T4L250 PR221-I In 100 550 A145 4L185R/4 4 TA25DU4 32,4 46,3
45 47 T4L250 PR221-I In 100 700 A145 4L185R/4 4 TA25DU5 40,5 57,8
55 57 T4L250 PR221-I In 100 800 A145 4L185R/4 3 TA25DU5 54 77,1
75 77 T4L250 PR221-I In 160 1120 A145 E200DU200 65 200
90 93 T4L250 PR221-I In 160 1280 A145 E200DU200 65 200
110 113 T4L250 PR221-I In 250 1625 A145 E200DU200 65 200
132 134 T4L250 PR221-I In 250 2000 A185 E200DU200 65 200
160 162 T4L250 PR221-I In 250 2250 A185 E200DU200 65 200
200 203 T5L400 PR221-I In 320 2720 A210 E320DU320 105 320
250 250 T5L400 PR221-I In 400 3400 A300 E320DU320 105 320
290 301 T5L630 PR221-I In 630 4410 AF400 E500DU500 150 500
315 313 T5L630 PR221-I In 630 4410 AF400 E500DU500 150 500
355 354 T5L630 PR221-I In 630 5355 AF580 E500DU500*** 150 500

(*) Type 1 coordination

(**) Cable cross section equal to 4 mm2
(***) No mounting kit to contactor is available

MA: magnetic only adjustable release
MF: fixed magnetic only release

388 Electrical devices | ABB

 2.3 Protection and switching of motors

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Table 19: 400 V 35 kA DOL Heavy duty Type 2
(Tmax XT/T – Contactor – TOR/EOL)

Motor Moulded Case Circuit Breaker Contactor Overload Relay

Current
Rated Rated
I3 Turns setting range [A]
Power Current Type Type Type*
[A] on CT
[kW] [A] min max
0,37 1,1 XT2N160 MF 2 28 A9 TA25DU1.4 ^ 1 1,4
0,55 1,5 XT2N160 MF 2 28 A9 TA25DU1.8 ^ 1,3 1,8
0,75 1,9 XT2N160 MF 2 28 A9 TA25DU2.4 ^ 1,7 2,4
1,1 2,7 XT2N160 MF 4 56 A9 TA25DU4 ^ 2,8 4
1,5 3,6 XT2N160 MF 4 56 A16 TA25DU5 ^ 3,5 5
2,2 4,9 XT2N160 MF 8.5 120 A26 TA25DU6.5 ^ 4,5 6,5
3 6,5 XT2N160 MF 8.5 120 A26 TA25DU8.5 ^ 6 8,5
4 8,5 XT2N160 MF 12.5 175 A30 TA25DU11 ^ 7,5 11
5,5 11,5 XT2N160 MF 12.5 175 A30 TA450SU60 4 10 15
7,5 15,5 XT2N160 MA 20 210 A30 TA450SU60 3 13 20
11 22 XT2N160 MA 32 288 A30 TA450SU60 2 20 30
15 29 XT2N160 MA 52 392 A50 TA450SU80 2 23 40
18,5 35 XT2N160 MA 52 469 A50 TA450SU80 2 23 40
22 41 XT2N160 MA 52 547 A50 TA450SU60 40 60
30 55 XT2N160 MA 80 840 A63 TA450SU80 55 80
37 66 XT2N160 MA 80 960 A95 TA450SU80 55 80
45 80 XT2N160 MA 100 1200 A110 TA450SU105 70 105
55 97 XT3N250 MA 160 1440 A145 TA450SU140 95 140
75 132 XT3N250 MA 200 1800 A185 TA450SU185 130 185
90 160 XT3N250 MA 200 2400 A210 TA450SU185 130 185
110 195 T4N320 PR221-I In320 2720 A260 E320DU320^ 100 320
132 230 T5N400 PR221-I In400 3200 A300 E320DU320^ 100 320
160 280 T5N400 PR221-I In400 4000 AF400 E500DU500^ 150 500
200 350 T5N630 PR221-I In630 5040 AF460 E500DU500^ 150 500
250 430 T6N630 PR221-I In630 6300 AF580 E500DU500**^ 150 500
290 520 T6N800 PR221-I In800 7200 AF750 E800DU800 250 800
315 540 T6N800 PR221-I In800 8000 AF750 E800DU800^ 250 800
355 610 T6N800 PR221-I In800 8000 AF750 E800DU800^ 250 800
Comments:
(^) Provide by-pass contactor during motor start-up
(*) Set EOL tripping characteristic to class 30 usable also for 415V
(**) Connection kit not available. To use connection kit provide E800DU800

MA: magnetic only adjustable release

MF: fixed magnetic only release

ABB | Electrical devices 389

 2.3 Protection and switching of motors

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Table 20: 400 V 50 kA DOL Heavy duty Type 2
(Tmax XT/T – Contactor – TOR/EOL)

Motor Moulded Case Circuit Breaker Contactor Overload Relay

Current
Rated Rated
I3 Turns setting range [A]
Power Current Type Type Type*
[A] on CT
[kW] [A] min max
0,37 1,1 XT2S160 MF 2 28 A9 TA25DU1.4 ^ 1 1,4
0,55 1,5 XT2S160 MF 2 28 A9 TA25DU1.8 ^ 1,3 1,8
0,75 1,9 XT2S160 MF 2 28 A9 TA25DU2.4 ^ 1,7 2,4
1,1 2,7 XT2S160 MF 4 56 A9 TA25DU4 ^ 2,8 4
1,5 3,6 XT2S160 MF 4 56 A16 TA25DU5 ^ 3,5 5
2,2 4,9 XT2S160 MF 8.5 120 A26 TA25DU6.5 ^ 4,5 6,5
3 6,5 XT2S160 MF 8.5 120 A26 TA25DU8.5 ^ 6 8,5
4 8,5 XT2S160 MF 12.5 175 A30 TA25DU11 ^ 7,5 11
5,5 11,5 XT2S160 MF 12.5 175 A30 TA450SU60 4 10 15
7,5 15,5 XT2S160 MA 20 210 A30 TA450SU60 3 13 20
11 22 XT2S160 MA 32 288 A30 TA450SU60 2 20 30
15 29 XT2S160 MA 52 392 A50 TA450SU80 2 23 40
18,5 35 XT2S160 MA 52 469 A50 TA450SU80 2 23 40
22 41 XT2S160 MA 52 547 A50 TA450SU60 40 60
30 55 XT2S160 MA 80 840 A63 TA450SU80 55 80
37 66 XT2S160 MA 80 960 A95 TA450SU80 55 80
45 80 XT2S160 MA 100 1200 A110 TA450SU105 70 105
55 97 XT3S250 MA 160 1440 A145 TA450SU140 95 140
75 132 XT3S250 MA 200 1800 A185 TA450SU185 130 185
90 160 XT3S250 MA 200 2400 A210 TA450SU185 130 185
110 195 T4S320 PR221-I In320 2720 A260 E320DU320 100 320
132 230 T5S400 PR221-I In400 3200 A300 E320DU320 100 320
160 280 T5S400 PR221-I In400 4000 AF400 E500DU500 150 500
200 350 T5S630 PR221-I In630 5040 AF460 E500DU500 150 500
250 430 T6S630 PR221-I In630 6300 AF580 E500DU500** 150 500
290 520 T6S800 PR221-I In800 7200 AF750 E800DU800 250 800
315 540 T6S800 PR221-I In800 8000 AF750 E800DU800 250 800
355 610 T6S800 PR221-I In800 8000 AF750 E800DU800 250 800
Comments:
(^) Provide by-pass contactor during motor start-up
(*) Set EOL tripping characteristic to class 30 usable also for 415V
(**) Connection kit not available. To use connection kit provide E800DU800

MA: magnetic only adjustable release

MF: fixed magnetic only release

390 Electrical devices | ABB

 2.3 Protection and switching of motors

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Table 21: 440 V 50 kA DOL Heavy duty Type 2
(Tmax XT/T – Contactor – TOR)

Motor Moulded Case Circuit Breaker Contactor Overload Relay

Current
Rated Rated
I3 Turns setting range [A]
Power Current Type Type Type*
[A] on CT
[kW] [A] min max
0,37 1 XT2S160 MF 1 14 A9 TA25DU1,4 ^ 1 1,4
0,55 1,3 XT2S160 MF 2 28 A9 TA25DU1,8 ^ 1,3 1,8
0,75 1,7 XT2S160 MF 2 28 A9 TA25DU2,4 ^ 1,7 2,4
1,1 2,2 XT2S160 MF 4 56 A9 TA25DU3,1 ^ 2,2 3,1
1,5 3,2 XT2S160 MF 4 56 A16 TA25DU4 ^ 2,8 4
2,2 4,3 XT2S160 MF 8.5 120 A26 TA25DU5 ^ 3,5 5
3 5,7 XT2S160 MF 8.5 120 A26 TA25DU6,5 ^ 4,5 5
4 7,4 XT2S160 MF 8.5 120 A30 TA25DU11 ^ 7,5 11
5,5 10,1 XT2S160 MF 12.5 175 A30 TA25DU14 ^ 10 14
7,5 13,6 XT2S160 MA 20 180 A30 TA450SU60 4 10 15
11 19,3 XT2S160 MA 32 240 A30 TA450SU80 3 18 27
15 25,4 XT2S160 MA 32 336 A50 TA450SU60 2 20 30
18,5 30,7 XT2S160 MA 52 469 A50 TA450SU80 2 28 40
22 35,9 XT2S160 MA 52 547 A50 TA450SU80 2 28 40
30 48,2 XT2S160 MA 80 720 A63 TA450SU60 40 60
37 58 XT2S160 MA 80 840 A95 TA450SU80 55 80
45 70 XT2S160 MA 100 1050 A110 TA450SU105 70 105
55 85 XT4S250 Ekip-I In160 1200 A145 E200DU200 60 200
75 116 XT4S250 Ekip-I In250 1750 A185 E200DU200 60 200
90 140 XT4S250 Ekip-I In250 2000 A210 E320DU320 100 320
110 171 XT4S250 Ekip-I In250 2500 A260 E320DU320 100 320
132 202 T5H400 PR221-I In320 3200 A300 E320DU320 100 320
160 245 T5H400 PR221-I In400 3600 AF400 E500DU500 150 500
200 307 T5H630 PR221-I In630 4410 AF460 E500DU500 150 500
250 377 T6H630 PR221-I In630 5355 AF580 E500DU500*** 150 500
290 448 T6H630 PR221-I In630 6300 AF750 E500DU500*** 150 500
315 473 T6H800 PR221-I In800 7200 AF750 E800DU800 250 800
355 535 T6H800 PR221-I In800 8000 AF750 E800DU800 250 800

(^) Provide by-pass contactor during motor start-up
(x) Set EOL tripping characteristic to class 30
(***) Connection kit not available. To use connection kit provide E800DU800 (x)

ABB | Electrical devices 391

 2.3 Protection and switching of motors

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Table 22: 440 V 65 kA DOL Heavy duty Type 2
(Tmax XT/T – Contactor – TOR/EOL)

Motor Moulded Case Circuit Breaker Contactor Overload Relay

Current
Rated Rated
I3 Turns setting range [A]
Power Current Type Type Type*
[A] on CT
[kW] [A] min max
0,37 1 XT2H160 MF 1 14 A9 TA25DU1,4 ^ 1 1,4
0,55 1,3 XT2H160 MF 2 28 A9 TA25DU1,8 ^ 1,3 1,8
0,75 1,7 XT2H160 MF 2 28 A9 TA25DU2,4 ^ 1,7 2,4
1,1 2,4 XT2H160 MF 4 56 A9 TA25DU3,1 ^ 2,2 3,1
1,5 3,2 XT2H160 MF 4 56 A16 TA25DU4 ^ 2,8 4
2,2 4,3 XT2H160 MF 8.5 120 A26 TA25DU5 ^ 3,5 5
3 5,7 XT2H160 MF 8.5 120 A26 TA25DU6,5 ^ 4,5 6,5
4 7,4 XT2H160 MF 8.5 120 A30 TA25DU11 ^ 7,5 11
5,5 10,1 XT2H160 MF 12.5 175 A30 TA25DU14 ^ 10 14
7,5 13,6 XT2H160 MA 20 180 A30 TA450SU60 4 10 15
11 19,3 XT2H160 MA 32 240 A30 TA450SU80 3 18 27
15 25,4 XT2H160 MA 32 336 A50 TA450SU60 2 20 30
18,5 30,7 XT2H160 MA 52 469 A50 TA450SU80 2 28 40
22 35,9 XT2H160 MA 52 547 A50 TA450SU80 2 28 40
30 48,2 XT2H160 MA 80 720 A63 TA450SU60 40 60
37 58 XT2H160 MA 80 840 A95 TA450SU80 55 80
45 70 XT2H160 MA 100 1050 A110 TA450SU105 70 105
55 85 XT4H250 Ekip-I In160 1200 A145 E200DU200 60 200
75 116 XT4H250 Ekip-I In250 1750 A185 E200DU200 60 200
90 140 XT4H250 Ekip-I In250 2000 A210 E320DU320 100 320
110 171 XT4H250 Ekip-I In250 2500 A260 E320DU320 100 320
132 202 T5H400 PR221-I In320 3200 A300 E320DU320 100 320
160 245 T5H400 PR221-I In400 3600 AF400 E500DU500 150 500
200 307 T5H630 PR221-I In630 4410 AF460 E500DU500 150 500
250 377 T6H630 PR221-I In630 5355 AF580 E500DU500*** 150 500
290 448 T6H630 PR221-I In630 6300 AF750 E500DU500*** 150 500
315 473 T6H800 PR221-I In800 7200 AF750 E800DU800 250 800
355 535 T6H800 PR221-I In800 8000 AF750 E800DU800 250 800

(^) Provide by-pass contactor during motor start-up
(x) Set EOL tripping characteristic to class 30
(***) Connection kit not available. To use connection kit provide E800DU800 (x)

392 Electrical devices | ABB

 2.3 Protection and switching of motors

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Table 23: 500 V 50 kA DOL Heavy duty Type 2
(Tmax XT/T – Contactor – TOR/EOL)

Motor Moulded Case Circuit Breaker Contactor Overload Relay

Current
Rated Rated
I3 Turns setting range [A]
Power Current Type Type Type*
[A] on CT
[kW] [A] min max
0,37 0,88 XT2H160 MF 1 14 A9 TA25DU1.0 ^ 0,63 1
0,55 1,2 XT2H160 MF 2 28 A9 TA25DU1.4 ^ 1 1,4
0,75 1,5 XT2H160 MF 2 28 A9 TA25DU1.8 ^ 1,3 1,8
1,1 2,2 XT2H160 MF 4 56 A9 TA25DU3.1 ^ 2,2 3,1
1,5 2,8 XT2H160 MF 4 56 A16 TA25DU4 ^ 2,8 4
2,2 3,9 XT2H160 MF 4 56 A26 TA25DU5 ^ 3,5 5
3 5,2 XT2H160 MF 8.5 120 A26 TA25DU6.5 ^ 4,5 6,5
4 6,8 XT2H160 MF 8.5 120 A30 TA25DU8.5 ^ 6 8,5
5,5 9,2 XT2H160 MF 12.5 175 A30 TA25DU11 ^ 7,5 11
7,5 12,4 XT2H160 MF 12.5 175 A30 TA450SU60 4 10 15
11 17,6 XT2H160 MA 20 240 A30 TA450SU60 3 13 20
15 23 XT2H160 MA 32 336 A50 TA450SU60 2 20 30
18,5 28 XT2H160 MA 52 392 A50 TA450SU80 2 27,5 40
22 33 XT2H160 MA 52 469 A50 TA450SU80 2 27,5 40
30 44 XT2H160 MA 52 624 A63 TA450SU60 40 80
37 53 XT2H160 MA 80 840 A75 TA450SU60 40 80
45 64 XT2H160 MA 80 960 A95 TA450SU80 55 80
55 78 XT2H160 MA 100 1200 A145 TA450SU105 70 105
75 106 XT4H250 Ekip-I In160 1440 A145 E200DU200 60 200
90 128 XT4H250 Ekip-I In250 1875 A185 E200DU200 60 200
110 156 XT4H250 Ekip-I In250 2125 A210 E320DU320 100 320
132 184 T4H320 PR221-I In320 2720 A260 E320DU320 100 320
160 224 T5H400 PR221-I In400 3200 A300 E320DU320 100 320
200 280 T5H400 PR221-I In400 3600 AF400 E500DU500 150 500
250 344 T5H630 PR221-I In630 4725 AF460 E500DU500 150 500
290 394 T6L630 PR221-I In630 5040 AF580 E500DU500*** 150 500
315 432 T6L630 PR221-I In630 6300 AF750 E500DU500*** 150 500
355 488 T6L630 PR221-I In630 6300 AF750 E500DU500*** 150 500

(^) Provide by-pass contactor during motor start-up
(x) Set EOL tripping characteristic to class 30
(***) Connection kit not available. To use connection kit provide E800DU800 (x)

ABB | Electrical devices 393

 2.3 Protection and switching of motors

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Table 24: 690 V 25 kA DOL Heavy duty Type 2
(Tmax T – Contactor – TOR)

Motor Moulded Case Circuit Breaker Contactor Overload Relay

Current
Rated Rated
I3 Turns setting range [A]
Power Current Type Type Type*
[A] on CT
[kW] [A] min max
0,37 0,64 XT2V160 MF1 14 A9 TA25DU0.63 ^ 0,4 0,63
0,55 0,87 XT2V160 MF1 14 A9 TA25DU1 ^ 0,63 1
0,75 1,1 XT2V160 MF 2 28 A9 TA25DU1.4 ^ 1 1,4
1,1 1,6 XT2V160 MF 2 28 A9 TA25D1.8 ^ 1,3 1,8
1,5 2,1 XT2V160 MF 4 56 A9 TA25DU2.4 ^ 1,7 2,4
2,2 2,8 XT2V160 MF 4 56 A9 TA25DU3.1 ^ 2,2 3,1
3 3,8 XT2V160 MF 4 56 A9 TA25DU4 ^ 2,8 4
4 4,9 XT2V160 MF 8.5 120 A9 TA25DU5 ^ 3,5 5
XT2V160 MF 8.5 120 A9 TA25DU6.5 ^ 4,5 6,5
5,5 6,7
XT4V250 EKIP-I In 100 150 A95 TA450SU60 7(+) 5,7 8,6
7,5 8,9 XT4V250 EKIP-I In 100 150 A95 TA450SU60 5(+) 8 12
11 12,8 XT4V250 EKIP-I In 100 200 A95 TA450SU60 4(+) 10 15
15 17 XT4V250 EKIP-I In 100 250 A95 TA450SU60 3(+) 10 20
18,5 21 XT4V250 EKIP-I In 100 300 A95 TA450SU60 3 18 27
22 24 XT4V250 EKIP-I In 100 350 A95 TA450SU60 2 20 30
30 32 XT4V250 EKIP-I In 100 450 A145 TA450SU80 2 27,5 40
37 39 XT4V250 EKIP-I In 100 550 A145 TA450SU60 40 60
45 47 XT4V250 EKIP-I In 100 700 A145 TA450SU60 40 60
55 57 XT4V250 EKIP-I In 100 800 A145 TA450SU80 55 80
75 77 XT4V250 EKIP-I In 160 1120 A145 TA450SU105 70 105
90 93 XT4V250 EKIP-I In 160 1280 A145 TA450SU105 70 105
110 113 XT4V250 EKIP-I In 250 1625 A185 TA450SU140 95 140
132 134 XT4V250 EKIP-I In 250 2000 A210 E320DU320 105 320
160 162 XT4V250 EKIP-I In 250 2250 A210 E320DU320 105 320

(^) Provide by-pass contactor during motor start-up
(x) Set EOL tripping characteristic to class 30
(***) Connection kit not available. To use connection kit provide E800DU800 (x)
(+) size wire 4mm

394 Electrical devices | ABB

 2.3 Protection and switching of motors

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Table 25: 690 V 50 kA DOL Heavy duty Type 2
(Tmax T – Contactor – TOR)

Motor Moulded Case Circuit Breaker Contactor Overload Relay

Current
Rated Rated
I3 Turns setting range [A]
Power Current Type Type Type*
[A] on CT
[kW] [A] min max
0,37 0,64 T2L160 MF1 13 A9 TA25DU0.63 ^ 0,4 0,63
0,55 0,87 T2L160 MF1 13 A9 TA25DU1 ^ 0,63 1
0,75 1,1 T2L160 MF 1.6 21 A9 TA25DU1.4 ^ 1 1,4
1,1 1,6 T2L160 MF 1.6 21 A9 TA25D1.8 ^ 1,3 1,8
1,5 2,1 T2L160 MF 2.5 33 A9 TA25DU2.4 ^ 1,7 2,4
2,2 2,8 T2L160 MF 3.2 42 A9 TA25DU3.1 ^ 2,2 3,1
3 3,8 T2L160 MF 4 52 A9 TA25DU4 ^ 2,8 4
4 4,9 T2L160 MF 5 65 A9 TA25DU5 ^ 3,5 5
T2L160 MF 6.5 84 A9 TA25DU6.5 ^ 4,5 6,5
5,5 6,7
T4L250 PR221-I In 100 150 A95 TA450SU60 7(+) 5,7 8,6
7,5 8,9 T4L250 PR221-I In 100 150 A95 TA450SU60 5(+) 8 12
11 12,8 T4L250 PR221-I In 100 200 A95 TA450SU60 4(+) 10 15
15 17 T4L250 PR221-I In 100 250 A95 TA450SU60 3(+) 13 20
18,5 21 T4L250 PR221-I In 100 300 A95 TA450SU60 3 18 27
22 24 T4L250 PR221-I In 100 350 A95 TA450SU60 2 20 30
30 32 T4L250 PR221-I In 100 450 A145 TA450SU80 2 27,5 40
37 39 T4L250 PR221-I In 100 550 A145 TA450SU60 40 60
45 47 T4L250 PR221-I In 100 700 A145 TA450SU60 40 60
55 57 T4L250 PR221-I In 100 800 A145 TA450SU80 55 80
75 77 T4L250 PR221-I In 160 1120 A145 TA450SU105 70 105
90 93 T4L250 PR221-I In 160 1280 A145 TA450SU105 70 105
110 113 T4L250 PR221-I In 250 1625 A185 TA450SU140 95 140
132 134 T4L250 PR221-I In 250 2000 A210 E320DU320 105 320
160 162 T4L250 PR221-I In 250 2250 A210 E320DU320 105 320
200 203 T5L400 PR221-I In 320 2720 A260 E320DU320 105 320
250 250 T5L400 PR221-I In 400 3400 AF400 E500DU500 150 500
290 301 T5L630 PR221-I In 630 4410 AF400 E500DU500 150 500
315 313 T5L630 PR221-I In 630 4410 AF460 E500DU500 150 500
355 354 T5L630 PR221-I In 630 5355 AF580 E500DU500*** 150 500

(^) Provide by-pass contactor during motor start-up
(x) Set EOL tripping characteristic to class 30
(***) Connection kit not available. To use connection kit provide E800DU800 (x)
(+) size wire 4mm

ABB | Electrical devices 395

 2.3 Protection and switching of motors

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Table 26: 400 V 35 kA Y/∆ Normal Type 2
(Tmax XT/T – Contactor – TOR/EOL)
Motor Moulded Case Circuit Breaker Contactor Overload Relay
Current
Rated Rated
I3 Line Delta Star setting
Power Current Type Type
[A] Type Type Type range
[kW] [A]
[A]
18,5 35 XT2N160 MA52 469 A50 A50 A26 TA75DU25 18-25
22 41 XT2N160 MA52 547 A50 A50 A26 TA75DU32 22-32
30 55 XT2N160 MA80 720 A63 A63 A30 TA75DU42 29-42
37 66 XT2N160 MA80 840 A75 A75 A30 TA75DU52 36-52
45 80 XT2N160 MA100 1050 A75 A75 A30 TA75DU63 45 - 63
55 97 XT2N160 MA100 1200 A75 A75 A40 TA75DU63 45 - 63
75 132 XT3N250 MA160 1700 A95 A95 A75 TA110DU90 66 - 90
90 160 XT3N250 MA200 2000 A110 A110 A95 TA110DU110 80 - 110
110 195 XT4N250 MA200 2400 A145 A145 A95 TA200DU135 100 - 135
132 230 T4N320 PR221-I In320 2880 A145 A145 A110 E200DU200 60 - 200
160 280 T5N400 PR221-I In400 3600 A185 A185 A145 E200DU200 60 - 200
200 350 T5N630 PR221-I In630 4410 A210 A210 A185 E320DU320 100 - 320
250 430 T5N630 PR221-I In630 5670 A260 A260 A210 E320DU320 100 - 320
290 520 T6N630 PR221-I In630 6300 AF400 AF400 A260 E500DU500 150 - 500
315 540 T6N800 PR221-I In800 7200 AF400 AF400 A260 E500DU500 150 - 500
355 610 T6N800 PR221-I In800 8000 AF400 AF400 A260 E500DU500 150 - 500

Table 27: 400 V 50 kA Y/∆ Normal Type 2

(Tmax XT/T – Contactor – TOR/EOL)

Motor Moulded Case Circuit Breaker Contactor Overload Relay

Current
Rated Rated
I3 Line Delta Star setting
Power Current Type Type
[A] Type Type Type range
[kW] [A]
[A]
18,5 35 XT2S160 MA52 469 A50 A50 A26 TA75DU25 18-25
22 41 XT2S160 MA52 547 A50 A50 A26 TA75DU32 22-32
30 55 XT2S160 MA80 720 A63 A63 A30 TA75DU42 29-42
37 66 XT2S160 MA80 840 A75 A75 A30 TA75DU52 36-52
45 80 XT2S160 MA100 1050 A75 A75 A30 TA75DU63 45 - 63
55 97 XT2S160 MA100 1200 A75 A75 A40 TA75DU63 45 - 63
75 132 XT3S250 MA160 1700 A95 A95 A75 TA110DU90 66 - 90
90 160 XT3S250 MA200 2000 A110 A110 A95 TA110DU110 80 - 110
110 195 XT3S250 MA200 2400 A145 A145 A95 TA200DU135 100 - 135
132 230 T4S320 PR221-I In320 2880 A145 A145 A110 E200DU200 60 - 200
160 280 T5S400 PR221-I In400 3600 A185 A185 A145 E200DU200 60 - 200
200 350 T5S630 PR221-I In630 4410 A210 A210 A185 E320DU320 100 - 320
250 430 T5S630 PR221-I In630 5670 A260 A260 A210 E320DU320 100 - 320
290 520 T6S630 PR221-I In630 6300 AF400 AF400 A260 E500DU500 150 - 500
315 540 T6S800 PR221-I In800 7200 AF400 AF400 A260 E500DU500 150 - 500
355 610 T6S800 PR221-I In800 8000 AF400 AF400 A260 E500DU500 150 - 500

396 Electrical devices | ABB

 2.3 Protection and switching of motors

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Table 28: 440 V 50 kA Y/∆ Normal Type 2
(Tmax XT/T – Contactor – TOR/EOL)
Motor Moulded Case Circuit Breaker Contactor Overload Relay
Current
Rated Rated
I3 Line Delta Star setting
Power Current Type Type
[A] Type Type Type range
[kW] [A]
[A]
18,5 30,7 XT2S160 MA52 392 A50 A50 A16 TA75DU25 18-25
22 35,9 XT2S160 MA52 469 A50 A50 A26 TA75DU25 18-25
30 48,2 XT2S160 MA80 720 A63 A63 A26 TA75DU42 29-42
37 58 XT2S160 MA80 840 A75 A75 A30 TA75DU42 29-42
45 70 XT2S160 MA80 960 A75 A75 A30 TA75DU52 36-52
55 85 XT2S160 MA100 1150 A75 A75 A40 TA75DU63 45-63
75 116 XT4S250 Ekip-I In250 1625 A95 A95 A75 TA80DU80 60-80
90 140 XT4S250 Ekip-I In250 1875 A95 A95 A75 TA110DU110 80-110
110 171 XT4S250 Ekip-I In250 2250 A145 A145 A95 E200DU200 60-200
132 202 T4H320 PR221-I In320 2720 A145 A145 A110 E200DU200 60-200
160 245 T5H400 PR221-I In400 3200 A185 A185 A145 E200DU200 60-200
200 307 T5H630 PR221-I In630 4095 A210 A210 A185 E320DU320 100-320
250 377 T5H630 PR221-I In630 5040 A260 A260 A210 E320DU320 100-320
290 448 T6H630 PR221-I In630 5670 AF400 AF400 A260 E500DU500 150 - 500
315 473 T6H630 PR221-I In630 6300 AF400 AF400 A260 E500DU500 150 - 500
355 535 T6H800 PR221-I In800 7200 AF400 AF400 A260 E500DU500 150 - 500

Table 29: 440 V 65 kA Y/∆ Normal Type 2

(Tmax XT/T – Contactor – TOR/EOL)

Motor Moulded Case Circuit Breaker Contactor Overload Relay

Current
Rated Rated
I3 Line Delta Star setting
Power Current Type Type
[A] Type Type Type range
[kW] [A]
[A]
18,5 30,7 XT2H160 MA52 392 A50 A50 A16 TA75DU25 18-25
22 35,9 XT2H160 MA52 469 A50 A50 A26 TA75DU25 18-25
30 48,2 XT2H160 MA80 720 A63 A63 A26 TA75DU42 29-42
37 58 XT2H160 MA80 840 A75 A75 A30 TA75DU42 29-42
45 70 XT2H160 MA80 960 A75 A75 A30 TA75DU52 36-52
55 85 XT2H160 MA100 1150 A75 A75 A40 TA75DU63 45-63
75 116 XT4H250 Ekip-I In250 1625 A95 A95 A75 TA80DU80 60-80
90 140 XT4H250 Ekip-I In250 1875 A95 A95 A75 TA110DU110 80-110
110 171 XT4H250 Ekip-I In250 2250 A145 A145 A95 E200DU200 60-200
132 202 T4H320 PR221-I In320 2720 A145 A145 A110 E200DU200 60-200
160 245 T5H400 PR221-I In400 3200 A185 A185 A145 E200DU200 60-200
200 307 T5H630 PR221-I In630 4095 A210 A210 A185 E320DU320 100-320
250 377 T5H630 PR221-I In630 5040 A260 A260 A210 E320DU320 100-320
290 448 T6H630 PR221-I In630 5670 AF400 AF400 A260 E500DU500 150 - 500
315 473 T6H630 PR221-I In630 6300 AF400 AF400 A260 E500DU500 150 - 500
355 535 T6H800 PR221-I In800 7200 AF400 AF400 A260 E500DU500 150 - 500

ABB | Electrical devices 397

 2.3 Protection and switching of motors

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Table 30: 500 V 50 kA Y/∆ Normal Type 2
(Tmax XT/T – Contactor – TOR/EOL)

Motor Moulded Case Circuit Breaker Contactor Overload Relay

Current
Rated Rated
I3 Line Delta Star setting
Power Current Type Type
[A] Type Type Type range
[kW] [A]
[A]
22 33 XT2H160 MA52 430 A50 A50 A16 TA75DU25 18-25
30 44 XT2H160 MA52 547 A63 A63 A26 TA75DU32 22-32
37 53 XT2H160 MA80 720 A75 A75 A30 TA75DU42 29-42
45 64 XT2H160 MA80 840 A75 A75 A30 TA75DU52 36-52
55 78 XT2H160 MA100 1050 A75 A75 A30 TA75DU52 36-52
75 106 XT4H250 Ekip-I In250 1375 A95 A95 A50 TA80DU80 60-80
90 128 XT4H250 Ekip-I In250 1750 A95 A95 A75 TA110DU90 65-90
110 156 XT4H250 Ekip-I In250 2000 A110 A110 A95 TA110DU110 80-110
132 184 T4H320 PR221-I In320 2560 A145 A145 A95 E200DU200 60-200
160 224 T4H320 PR221-I In320 2880 A145 A145 A110 E200DU200 60-200
200 280 T5H400 PR221-I In400 3400 A210 A210 A145 E320DU320 100-320
250 344 T5H630 PR221-I In630 4410 A210 A210 A185 E320DU320 100-320
290 394 T5H630 PR221-I In630 5040 A260 A260 A210 E320DU320 100-320
315 432 T6L630 PR221-I In630 5760 AF400 AF400 A210 E500DU500 150 - 500
355 488 T6L630 PR221-I In630 6300 AF400 AF400 A260 E500DU500 150 - 500

Table 31: 690 V 25 kA Y/∆ Normal Type 2

(Tmax XT – Contactor – TOR/EOL)

Moulded Case Circuit

Motor Contactor KORC Overload Relay
Breaker
Rated Rated Current
I3 Line Delta Star N° of
Power Current Type Type Type setting
[A] Type Type Type turns
[kW] [A] range [A]
5,5 6.7* XT4V250 Ekip-I In100 150 A95 A95 A26 185R/4** 13 TA25DU2.4** 6-8.5
7,5 8.9* XT4V250 Ekip-I In100 150 A95 A95 A26 185R/4** 10 TA25DU2.4** 7.9-11.1
11 12.8* XT4V250 Ekip-I In100 200 A95 A95 A26 185R/4** 7 TA25DU2.4** 11.2-15.9
15 17* XT4V250 Ekip-I In100 250 A95 A95 A26 185R/4** 7 TA25DU3.1** 15.2-20.5
18,5 21 XT4V250 Ekip-I In100 300 A95 A95 A30 185R/4** 6 TA25DU3.1** 17.7-23.9
22 24 XT4V250 Ekip-I In100 350 A95 A95 A30 185R/4** 6 TA25DU4** 21.6-30.8
30 32 XT4V250 Ekip-I In100 450 A145 A145 A30 185R/4** 6 TA25DU5** 27-38.5
37 39 XT4V250 Ekip-I In100 550 A145 A145 A30 TA75DU52** 36-52
45 47 XT4V250 Ekip-I In100 650 A145 A145 A30 TA75DU52** 36 - 52
55 57 XT4V250 Ekip-I In100 800 A145 A145 A40 TA75DU52** 36-52
75 77 XT4V250 Ekip-I In160 1120 A145 A145 A50 TA75DU52 36 - 52
90 93 XT4V250 Ekip-I In160 1280 A145 A145 A75 TA75DU63 45-63
110 113 XT4V250 Ekip-I In160 1600 A145 A145 A75 TA75DU80 60-80
132 134 XT4V250 Ekip-I In250 1875 A145 A145 A95 TA200DU110 80-110
160 162 XT4V250 Ekip-I In250 2125 A145 A145 A110 TA200DU110 80-110
Comments:
*size wire 4mm
**connect TOL at line-delta supply side

398 Electrical devices | ABB

 2.3 Protection and switching of motors

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Table 32: 690 V 50 kA Y/∆ Normal Type 2
(Tmax T – Contactor – TOR/EOL)

Moulded Case Circuit

Motor Contactor KORC Overload Relay
Breaker
Rated Rated Current
I3 Line Delta Star N° of
Power Current Type Type Type setting
[A] Type Type Type turns
[kW] [A] range [A]
5,5 6.7* T4L250 PR221-I In100 150 A95 A95 A26 4L185R/4** 13 TA25DU2.4** 6-8.5
7,5 8.9* T4L250 PR221-I In100 150 A95 A95 A26 4L185R/4** 10 TA25DU2.4** 7.9-11.1
11 12.8* T4L250 PR221-I In100 200 A95 A95 A26 4L185R/4** 7 TA25DU2.4** 11.2-15.9
15 17* T4L250 PR221-I In100 250 A95 A95 A26 4L185R/4** 7 TA25DU3.1** 15.2-20.5
18,5 21 T4L250 PR221-I In100 300 A95 A95 A30 4L185R/4** 6 TA25DU3.1** 17.7-23.9
22 24 T4L250 PR221-I In100 350 A95 A95 A30 4L185R/4** 6 TA25DU4** 21.6-30.8
30 32 T4L250 PR221-I In100 450 A145 A145 A30 4L185R/4** 6 TA25DU5** 27-38.5
37 39 T4L250 PR221-I In100 550 A145 A145 A30 TA75DU52** 36-52
45 47 T4L250 PR221-I In100 650 A145 A145 A30 TA75DU52** 36 - 52
55 57 T4L250 PR221-I In100 800 A145 A145 A40 TA75DU52** 36-52
75 77 T4L250 PR221-I In160 1120 A145 A145 A50 TA75DU52 36 - 52
90 93 T4L250 PR221-I In160 1280 A145 A145 A75 TA75DU63 45-63
110 113 T4L250 PR221-I In160 1600 A145 A145 A75 TA75DU80 60-80
132 134 T4L250 PR221-I In250 1875 A145 A145 A95 TA200DU110 80-110
160 162 T4L250 PR221-I In250 2125 A145 A145 A110 TA200DU110 80-110
200 203 T4L320 PR221-I In320 2720 A185 A185 A110 TA200DU135 100-135
250 250 T5L400 PR221-I In400 3200 AF400 AF400 A145 E500DU500 150-500
290 301 T5L400 PR221-I In400 4000 AF400 AF400 A145 E500DU500 150-500
315 313 T5L630 PR221-I In630 4410 AF400 AF400 A185 E500DU500 150-500
355 354 T5L630 PR221-I In630 5040 AF400 AF400 A210 E500DU500 150-500
400 420 T5L630 PR221-I In630 5670 AF460 AF460 A210 E500DU500 150-500
450 470 T5L630 PR221-I In630 6300 AF460 AF460 A260 E500DU500 150-500
Comments:
*size wire 4mm
**connect TOL at line-delta supply side

ABB | Electrical devices 399

 2.3 Protection and switching of motors

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Table 33: 400 V 35 kA DOL Normal and Heavy duty Type 2
(Tmax XT/T with Ekip M/PR222MP – Contactor)

Motor Moulded Case Circuit Breaker Contactor

Allowed setting
Rated Rated Inverse time current
I3
Power Current Type*** tripping current* Type [A]
[A]
[kW] [A] [A]
7,5 15,5 XT2N160 Ekip M-LIU In25 10-25 150 A63 25
11 22 XT2N160 Ekip M-LIU In25 10-25 225 A63 25
15 29 XT2N160 Ekip M-LIU In63 25-63 378 A75 50
18,5 35 XT2N160 Ekip M-LIU In63 25-63 378 A75 50
22 41 XT2N160 Ekip M-LIU In63 25-63 441 A75 50
30 55 XT4N250 Ekip M-LIU In100 40-100 600 A95 95
37 66 XT4N250 Ekip M-LIU In100 40-100 700 A95 95
45 80 XT4N250 Ekip M-LIU In100 40-100 800 A95 95
55 97 XT4N250 Ekip M-LIU In160 64-160 960 A145 145
75 132 XT4N250 Ekip M-LIU In160 64-160 1280 A145 145
90 160 T4N250 PR222 MP In200 80-200 1600 A185 185
110 195 T5N400 PR222 MP In320 128-320 1920 A210 210
132 230 T5N400 PR222 MP In320 128-320 2240 A260 260
160 280 T5N400 PR222 MP In320 128-320 2560 AF400** 320
200 350 T5N400 PR222 MP In400 160-400 3200 AF400 400
250 430 T6N800 PR222 MP In630 252-630 5040 AF460 460
290 520 T6N800 PR222 MP In630 252-630 5670 AF580 580
315 540 T6N800 PR222 MP In630 252-630 5670 AF580 580
355 610 T6N800 PR222 MP In630 252-630 5670 AF750 630
Comments:
* For Heavy start, select the class 30 on the EKIP M or MP release
** In event of normal start, choose AF300
*** EKIP M-LIU also available in M-LRIU version

400 Electrical devices | ABB

 2.3 Protection and switching of motors

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Table 34: 400 V 50 kA DOL Normal and Heavy duty Type 2
(Tmax XT/T with Ekip M/PR222MP – Contactor)

Motor Moulded Case Circuit Breaker Contactor

Allowed setting
Rated Rated Inverse time current
I3
Power Current Type*** tripping current* Type [A]
[A]
[kW] [A] [A]
7,5 15,5 XT2S160 Ekip M-LIU In25 10-25 150 A63 25
11 22 XT2S160 Ekip M-LIU In25 10-25 225 A63 25
15 29 XT2S160 Ekip M-LIU In63 25-63 378 A75 50
18,5 35 XT2S160 Ekip M-LIU In63 25-63 378 A75 50
22 41 XT2S160 Ekip M-LIU In63 25-63 441 A75 50
30 55 XT4S250 Ekip M-LIU In100 40-100 600 A95 95
37 66 XT4S250 Ekip M-LIU In100 40-100 700 A95 95
45 80 XT4S250 Ekip M-LIU In100 40-100 800 A95 95
55 97 XT4S250 Ekip M-LIU In160 64-160 960 A145 145
75 132 XT4S250 Ekip M-LIU In160 64-160 1280 A145 145
90 160 T4S250 PR222 MP In200 80-200 1600 A185 185
110 195 T5S400 PR222 MP In320 128-320 1920 A210 210
132 230 T5S400 PR222 MP In320 128-320 2240 A260 260
160 280 T5S400 PR222 MP In320 128-320 2560 AF400** 320
200 350 T5S400 PR222 MP In400 160-400 3200 AF400 400
250 430 T6S800 PR222 MP In630 252-630 5040 AF460 460
290 520 T6S800 PR222 MP In630 252-630 5670 AF580 580
315 540 T6S800 PR222 MP In630 252-630 5670 AF580 580
355 610 T6S800 PR222 MP In630 252-630 5670 AF750 630
Comments:
* For Heavy start, select the class 30 on the EKIP M or MP release
** In event of normal start, choose AF300
*** EKIP M-LIU also available in M-LRIU version

ABB | Electrical devices 401

 2.3 Protection and switching of motors

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Table 35: 440 V 50 kA DOL Normal and Heavy duty Type 2
(Tmax XT/T with Ekip M/PR222MP – Contactor)

Motor Moulded Case Circuit Breaker Contactor

Allowed setting
Rated Rated Inverse time current
I3
Power Current Type*** tripping current* Type [A]
[A]
[kW] [A] [A]
7,5 13,6 XT2S160 Ekip M-LIU In25 10-25 150 A63 25
11 19,3 XT2S160 Ekip M-LIU In25 10-25 225 A63 25
15 25,4 XT2S160 Ekip M-LIU In63 25-63 378 A75 63
18,5 30,7 XT2S160 Ekip M-LIU In63 25-63 378 A75 63
22 35,9 XT2S160 Ekip M-LIU In63 25-63 378 A75 63
30 48,2 XT4S250 Ekip M-LIU In100 40-100 600 A95 93
37 58 XT4S250 Ekip M-LIU In100 40-100 600 A95 93
45 70 XT4S250 Ekip M-LIU In100 40-100 700 A95 93
55 85 XT4S250 Ekip M-LIU In160 64-160 960 A145 145
75 116 XT4S250 Ekip M-LIU In160 64-160 1120 A145 145
90 140 T4H250 PR222 MP In200 80-200 1400 A185 185
110 171 T5H400 PR222 MP In320 128-320 1920 A210 210
132 202 T5H400 PR222 MP In320 128-320 2240 A260 240
160 245 T5H400 PR222 MP In320 128-320 2560 AF400** 320
200 307 T5H400 PR222 MP In400 160-400 3200 AF400 400
250 377 T6H800 PR222 MP In630 252-630 4410 AF460 460
290 448 T6H800 PR222 MP In630 252-630 5040 AF460 460
315 473 T6H800 PR222 MP In630 252-630 5040 AF580 580
355 535 T6H800 PR222 MP In630 252-630 5670 AF580 580
Comments:
* For Heavy start, select the class 30 on the EKIP M or MP release
** In event of normal start, choose AF300
*** EKIP M-LIU also available in M-LRIU version

Table 36: 690 V 25 kA DOL Normal and Heavy duty Type 2

(Tmax T with Ekip M – Contactor)
Motor Moulded Case Circuit Breaker Contactor
Allowed setting
Rated Rated Inverse time current
I3
Power Current Type tripping current* Type [A]
[A]
[kW] [A] [A]
11 12,8 XT2V160 EKIP M-LIU In25 10-25 150 A63 25
15 17 XT2V160 EKIP M-LIU In25 10-25 175 A63 25
18,5 21 XT2V160 EKIP M-LIU In25 10-25 225 A75 25
22 24 XT2V160 EKIP M-LIU In63 25-63 250 A75 63
30 32 XT2V160 EKIP M-LIU In63 25-63 378 A95 63
37 39 XT2V250 EKIP M-LIU In63 25-63 378 A95 63
45 47 XT2V250 EKIP M-LIU In63 25-63 504 A145 63
55 57 XT4V250 EKIP M-LIU In63 25-63 567 A145 63
75 77 XT4V250 EKIP M-LIU In100 40-100 800 A145 100
90 93 XT4V250 EKIP M-LIU In160 64-160 960 A145 120
110 113 XT4V250 EKIP M-LIU In160 64-160 1120 A145 120
132 134 XT4V250 EKIP M-LIU In160 64-160 1440 A185 160
Comments:
* For Heavy start, select the class 30 on the MP release

402 Electrical devices | ABB

 2.3 Protection and switching of motors

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Table 37: 500 V 50 kA DOL Normal and Heavy duty Type 2
(Tmax XT/T with Ekip M/PR222MP – Contactor)

Motor Moulded Case Circuit Breaker Contactor

Allowed setting
Rated Rated Inverse time current
I3
Power Current Type*** tripping current* Type [A]
[A]
[kW] [A] [A]
7,5 12,4 XT2H160 Ekip M-LIU In25 10-25 150 A63 25
11 17,6 XT2H160 Ekip M-LIU In25 10-25 175 A63 25
15 23 XT2H160 Ekip M-LIU In25 10-25 250 A75 25
18,5 28 XT2H160 Ekip M-LIU In63 25-63 378 A75 63
22 33 XT2H160 Ekip M-LIU In63 25-63 378 A75 63
30 44 XT4H250 Ekip M-LIU In63 25-63 441 A95 63
37 53 XT4H250 Ekip M-LIU In63 25-63 567 A95 63
45 64 XT4H250 Ekip M-LIU In100 40-100 630 A145 100
55 78 XT4H250 Ekip M-LIU In100 40-100 800 A145 100
75 106 XT4H250 Ekip M-LIU In160 64-160 1120 A145 145
90 128 XT4H250 Ekip M-LIU In160 64-160 1280 A145 145
110 156 T4H250 PR222 MP In200 80-200 1600 A185 170
132 184 T5H400 PR222 MP In320 128-320 1920 A210 210
160 224 T5H400 PR222 MP In320 128-320 2240 A260 240
200 280 T5H400 PR222 MP In400 160-400 2800 AF400** 400
250 344 T5H400 PR222 MP In400 160-400 3200 AF400 400
290 394 T6H800 PR222 MP In630 252-630 5040 AF460 460
315 432 T6H800 PR222 MP In630 252-630 5040 AF460 460
355 488 T6H800 PR222 MP In630 252-630 5670 AF580 580
Comments:
* For Heavy start, select the class 30 on the EKIP M or MP release
** In event of normal start, choose AF300
*** EKIP M-LIU also available in M-LRIU version

Table 38: 690 V 50 kA DOL Normal and Heavy duty Type 2

(Tmax T with PR222MP – Contactor)

Motor Moulded Case Circuit Breaker Contactor

Allowed setting
Rated Rated Inverse time current
I3
Power Current Type tripping current* Type [A]
[A]
[kW] [A] [A]
45 47 T4L250 PR222MP In 100 40-100 600 A145 100
55 57 T4L250 PR222MP In 100 40-100 600 A145 100
75 77 T4L250 PR222MP In 100 40-100 800 A145 100
90 93 T4L250 PR222MP In 160 64-160 960 A145 120
110 113 T4L250 PR222MP In 160 64-160 1120 A145 120
132 134 T4L250 PR222MP In 160 64-160 1440 A185 160
160 162 T4L250 PR222MP In 200 80-200 1600 A185 170
200 203 T5L400 PR222MP In320 128-320 1920 A210 210
250 250 T5L400 PR222MP In320 128-320 2240 AF300 280
290 301 T5L400 PR222MP In400 160-400 2800 AF400 350
315 313 T5L400 PR222MP In400 160-400 3200 AF400 350
Comments:
* For Heavy start, select the class 30 on the MP release

ABB | Electrical devices 403

 2.3 Protection and switching of motors

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Example:
For a DOL Normal starting Type 2, of a three phase asynchronous squirrel-cage
motor with the following data:
rated voltage Ur = 400 V
short-circuit current Ik = 50 kA
rated motor power Pe = 22 kW
from Table 4, on the relevant row, the following information can be found:

• Ir (rated current): 41 A;
• short-circuit protection device: circuit-breaker XT2S160 MA52;
• magnetic trip threshold: I3 = 547 A;
• contactor: A50;
• thermal release TA75 DU52, setting range 36÷52 A

For a Y/∆ Normal starting Type 2, of a three phase asynchronous squirrel-cage

motor with the following data:
rated voltage Ur = 400 V
short-circuit current Ik = 50 kA
rated motor power Pe = 200 kW
from Table 27, on the relevant row, the following information can be found:

• Ir (rated current): 350 A;

• short-circuit protection device: circuit-breaker T5S630 PR221-I In630;
• magnetic trip threshold: I3 = 4410 A;
• line contactor: A210;
• delta contactor: A210;
• star contactor: A185;
• thermal release E320DU320, setting range 100÷320 A (to be set at ).

For a DOL heavy-duty starting Type 2 with Ekip protection of a three phase
asynchronous squirrel-cage motor with the following data:
rated voltage Ur = 400 V
short-circuit current Ik = 50 kA
rated motor power Pe = 55 kW
from Table 34, on the relevant row, the following information can be found:

• Ir (rated current): 97 A;
• short-circuit protection device: circuit breaker XT4S250 Ekip M LIU
(or Ekip M LRIU)* In160;
• magnetic trip threshold: I3 = 960 A;
• contactor: A145.

* for heavy-duty start set the electronic release tripping class to class 30

404 Electrical devices | ABB

 2 Protection of electrical equipment
2.4 Protection and switching of
transformers
General aspects
Transformers are used to achieve a change in the supply voltage, for both
medium and low voltage supplies.
The choice of the protection devices must take into account transient insertion
phenomena, during which the current may reach values higher than the rated
full load current; the phenomenon decays in a few seconds.
The curve which represents these transient phenomena in the time-current
diagram, termed “inrush current I0”, depends on the size of the transformer
and can be evaluated with the following formula (the short-circuit power of the
network is assumed to be equal to infinity)

where:
K ratio between the maximum peak inrush current value ( I0 ) and the rated
current of the transformer (I1r): (K= I0 / I1r);
τ time constant of the inrush current;
I1r rated current of the primary;
t time.

The table below shows the indicative values for t and K parameters referred to
rated power Sr for oil transformers.

Sr [kVA] 50 100 160 250 400 630 1000 1600 2000

K = Io/I1r 15 14 12 12 12 11 10 9 8
τ [s] 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.22 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.45

Further to the above consideration, the follwing diagram shows the inrush
current curve for a 20/0.4kV of 400kVA transformer. This transformer has an
inrush current during the very first moments equal to about 8 times the rated
current; this transient phenomenon stops after a few tenths of a second.

[s]

10-1
1SDC010022F0001

10-2
10-3 10-2 10-1 1
[kA]

ABB | Electrical devices 405

 2.4 Protection and switching of transformers

2 Protection of electrical equipment

The transformer protection devices must also guarantee that the transformer
cannot operate above the point of maximum thermal overload under short-
circuit conditions; this point is defined on the time-current diagram by the value
of short-circuit current which can pass through the transformer and by a time
equal to 2 s, as stated by Standard IEC 60076-5. The short-circuit current (Ik)
flowing for a fault with low impedance at the LV terminals of the transformer is
calculated by using the following formula:

where:
• Ur is the rated voltage of the transformer [V];
• ZNet is the short-circuit impedance of the network [Ω];
• Zt is the short-circuit impedance of the transformer; from the rated power of
the transformer (Sr [VA]) and the percentage short-circuit voltage (uk%) it is
equal to:

Considering the upstream short-circuit power of the network to be infinite

(ZNet=0), formula (1) becomes:

The diagram below shows the inrush current curve for a 20/0.4 kV of 400 kVA
transformer (uk% = 4 %) and the point referred to the thermal ability to withstand
the short-circuit current (Ik; 2 sec.).

1s

10-1s
1SDC010023F0001

10-2s

1kA 10kA

406 Electrical devices | ABB

 2.4 Protection and switching of transformers

2 Protection of electrical equipment

In summary: for the correct protection of the transformer and to avoid unwanted
trips, the trip curve of the protection device must be above the inrush current
curve and below the thermal overload point under short circuit conditions.

Choice of the circuit-breakers on the primary of a LV/LV transformer

These types of transformer are mainly used to supply control and switch auxiliary
circuits, since they are often supplied at lower voltages in comparison with
those for power distribution; another application example can be represented
by the need of changing the neutral system according to the installation
requirements.
As regards choice and settings of the circuit-breaker on the supply side of
the primary, it is necessary to take into consideration both the “inrush current”
phenomenon as well as the transformer maximum short-time thermal load
capability, as described in the previous pages.
The following figure shows the possible positioning of the trip curve of a circuit-
breaker on the primary of a 250kVA transformer at 690/400 with uk=4%.

10 4 s

10 3 s
T4N250 PR221 In=250 A
10 2 s

10 1 s

250 kVA Trafo

1s

10-1s

1SDC010024F0001
10-2s

10-1 kA 1kA 10kA

The following pages include some tables reporting - with reference to the
rated voltage of the primary winding - the circuit-breaker suitable for the ap-
plication.
As regards the circuit-breaker version, it is necessary to use one apparatus with
Icu value higher than the short-circuit current at the circuit-breaker installation
point.
It is necessary to set properly the suggested circuit-breaker in order to obtain
transformer protection as in the figure of the example of above, by paying par-
ticular attention to the indications reported in the previous pages.

ABB | Electrical devices 407

 2.4 Protection and switching of transformers

2 Protection of electrical equipment

V1n=400
ABB SACE
Transformer Circuit-breaker
Circuit-breaker with Circuit-breaker with
thermomagnetic release electronic release
Sr Trafo Ir In In
[kVA] [A] Type [A] Type [A]
1 x 63 91 XT1B-C-N-S-H 125 XT2N-S-H-L-V 160
1 x 100 144 XT3N-S 200 XT4N-S-H-L-V 250
1 x 125 180 XT3N-S 250 XT4N-S-H-L-V 250
1 x 160 231 XT4N-S-H-L-V 250 XT4N-S-H-L-V 250
1 x 200 289 T5N-S-H-L-V 320 T5N-S-H-L-V 400
1 x 250 361 T5N-S-H-L-V 400 T5N-S-H-L-V 400
1 x 315 455 T5N-S-H-L-V 500 T5N-S-H-L -V 630
1 x 400 577 T6N-S-H-L 630 T6N-S-H-L -V 630
1 x 500 722 T6N-S-H-L 800 T6N-S-H-L 800
1 x 630 909 - - T7S-H-L-V/ X1B-N 1000
1 x 800 1155 - - T7S-H-L-V/ X1B-N 1250
1 x 1000 1443 - - T7S-H-L / X1B-N 1600
1 x 1250 1804 - - E2B-N-S 2000
1 x 1600 2309 - - E3N-S-H-V 2500
1 x 2000 2887 - - E3N-S-H-V 3200

V1n=440
ABB SACE
Transformer Circuit-breaker
Circuit-breaker with Circuit-breaker with
thermomagnetic release electronic release
Sr Trafo Ir In In
[kVA] [A] Type [A] Type [A]
1 x 63 83 XT1B-C-N-S-H 125 XT2N-S-H-L-V 160
1 x 100 131 XT3N-S 200 XT4N-S-H-L-V 250
1 x 125 164 XT3N-S 200 XT4N-S-H-L-V 250
1 x 160 210 XT4N-S-H-L-V 250 XT4N-S-H-L-V 250
1 x 200 262 T5N-S-H-L-V 320 T5N-S-H-L -V 400
1 x 250 328 T5N-S-H-L-V 400 T5N-S-H-L -V 400
1 x 315 413 T5N-S-H-L-V 500 T5N-S-H-L -V 630
1 x 400 526 T6N-S-H-L 630 T6N-S-H-L 630
1 x 500 656 T6N-S-H-L 800 T6N-S-H-L 800
1 x 630 827 - - T7S-H-L-V-X1B-N 1000
1 x 800 1050 - - T7S-H-L-V/ X1B-N 1250
1 x 1000 1312 - - T7S-H-L / X1B-N 1600
1 x 1250 1640 - - E2B-N-S 2000
1 x 1600 2099 - - E3N-S-H-V 2500
1 x 2000 2624 - - E3N-S-H-V 3200

408 Electrical devices | ABB

 2.4 Protection and switching of transformers

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Vn=690
ABB SACE
Transformer Circuit-breaker
Circuit-breaker with Circuit-breaker with
thermomagnetic release electronic release
Sr Trafo Ir In In
[kVA] [A] Type [A] Type [A]
1 x 63 53 XT1B-C-N-S-H 80 XT2N-S-H-L-V 80
1 x 100 84 XT1B-C-N-S-H 125 XT2N-S-H-L-V 160
1 x 125 105 XT1B-C-N-S-H 125 XT2N-S-H-L-V 160
1 x 160 134 XT1B-C-N-S-H 160 XT2N-S-H-L-V 160
1 x 200 168 XT3N-S 200 XT4N-S-H-L-V 250
1 x 250 209 XT4N-S-H-L-V 250 XT4N-S-H-L-V 250
1 x 315 264 T5N-S-H-L-V 320 T5N-S-H-L-V 400
1 x 400 335 T5N-S-H-L-V 400 T5N-S-H-L-V 400
1 x 500 419 T5N-S-H-L-V 500 T5N-S-H-L-V 630
1 x 630 528 T6N-S-H-L 630 T6N-S-H-L 800
1 x 800 670 T6N-S-H-L 800 T6N-S-H-L 800
1 x 1000 838 - - T7S-H-L-V/ X1B-N 1000
1 x 1250 1047 - - T7S-H-L-V/ X1B-N 1250
1 x 1600 1340 - - T7S-H-L / X1B-N 1600
1 x 2000 1676 - - E2B-N-S 2000

Criteria for the selection of protection devices

For the protection on the LV side of MV/LV transformers, the selection of a
circuit-breaker shall take into account:
• the rated current on LV side of the protected transformer (this value is the
reference value for the rated current of the circuit-breaker and the setting of
the protections);
• the maximum short-circuit current at the point of installation (this value deter-
mines the minimum breaking capacity (Icu/Ics) of the protection device).

MV/LV unit with single transformer

The rated current on the LV side of the transformer (Ir) is determined by the
following formula:
⋅

where:
• Sr is the rated power of the transformer [kVA];
• Ur20 is the rated LV no-load voltage of the transformer [V].

ABB | Electrical devices 409

 2.4 Protection and switching of transformers

2 Protection of electrical equipment

The full voltage three-phase short-circuit current (Ik), at the LV terminals of the
transformer, can be expressed as (assuming that the short-circuit power of
the network is infinite):
⋅

where:
uk% is the short-circuit voltage of the transformer, in %.

The protection circuit-breaker must have: (*)

In ≥ Ir;
Icu (Ics) ≥ Ik.

If the short-circuit power of the upstream network is not infinite and cable or
busbar connections are present, it is possible to obtain a more precise value for
Ik by using formula (1), where ZNet is the sum of the impedance of the network
and of the impedance of the connection.

MV/LV substation with more than one transformer in parallel

For the calculation of the rated current of the transformer, the above applies
(formula 4).

The breaking capacity of each protection circuit-breaker on the LV side shall

be higher than the short-circuit current equivalent to the short-circuit current of
each equal transformer multiplied by the number of them minus one.
As can be seen from the diagram below, in the case of a fault downstream of a
transformer circuit-breaker (circuit-breaker A), the short-circuit current that flows
through the circuit-breaker is equal to the contribution of a single transformer.
In the case of a fault upstream of the same circuit-breaker, the short-circuit
current that flows is equal to the contribution of the other two transformers
in parallel.

(*)
To carry out correct protection against overload it is advisable to use thermometric equipment
or other protection devices able to monitor temperature inside transformers.

410 Electrical devices | ABB

 2.4 Protection and switching of transformers

2 Protection of electrical equipment

For a correct dimensioning, a circuit-breaker with a breaking capacity higher
than twice the short-circuit current of one of the transformers must be chosen
(assuming that all the transformers are equal and the loads are passive).

The circuit-breakers positioned on the outgoing feeders (circuit-breakers B) shall

have a breaking capacity higher than the sum of the short-circuit currents of
the three transformers, according to the hypothesis that the upstream network
short-circuit power is 750 MVA and the loads are passive.

Ik1 Ik2 Ik3

Ik2 + Ik3 A

1SDC010025F0001
Ik = Ik1 + Ik2 + Ik3

ABB | Electrical devices 411

 2.4 Protection and switching of transformers

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Selection of the circuit-breaker
The following tables show some possible choices of ABB SACE circuit-breakers,
according to the characteristics of the transformer to be protected.

Table 1: Protection and switching of 230 V transformers

Transformer Circuit-breaker “A” (LV side)
Trafo Release
Sr uk Trafo Ir Busbar Ib feeder Ik ABB SACE Busbar Ik
size minimum
[kVA] [%] [A] [A] [kA] Circuit-breaker In [A] setting [kA] 32 A 63 A 125 A 160 A 250 A 400 A
1 x 63 158 158 3.9 XT1B160* 160 1 3.9 S200 XT1B160
4 XT3N250
2 x 63 158 316 3.9 XT1B160* 160 1 7.9 S200 XT1B160
1 x 100 251 251 6.3 T4N320 320 0.79 6.3 S200 XT1B160
4 XT3N250
2 x 100 251 502 6.2 T4N320 320 0.79 12.5 S200 XT1B160 T5N400
1 x 125 314 314 7.8 T5N400 400 0.79 7.8 S200 XT1B160 XT3N250
4 XT3N250
2 x 125 314 628 7.8 T5N400 400 0.79 15.6 S200 XT1B160 T5N400
1 x 160 402 402 10.0 T5N630 630 0.64 10.0 S200 XT1B160 XT3N250
4 XT3N250
2 x 160 402 803 9.9 T5N630 630 0.64 19.9 S200 XT1B160 T5N400
1 x 200 502 502 12.5 T5N630 630 0.8 12.5 S200 XT1B160 XT3N250 T5N400
4 XT3N250
2 x 200 502 1004 12.4 T5N630 630 0.8 24.8 XT1B160 T5N400
1 x 250 628 628 15.6 T5N630 630 1 15.6 S200 XT1B160 XT3N250 T5N400
4 XT3N250
2 x 250 628 1255 15.4 T5N630 630 1 30.9 XT1C160 T5N400
1 x 315 791 791 19.6 T6N800 800 1 19.6 XT1B160 XT3N250 T5N400
4 XT3N250
2 x 315 791 1581 19.4 T6N800 800 1 38.7 XT1C160 T5N400
1 x 400 1004 1004 24.8 T7S1250/X1B1250** 1250 0.81 24.8 XT1B160 XT3N250 T5N400
4 XT3N250
2 x 400 1004 2008 24.5 T7S1250/X1B1250** 1250 0.81 48.9 XT1N160 T5N400
1 x 500 1255 1255 30.9 T7S1600/X1B1600** 1600 0.79 30.9 XT1C160 XT3N250 T5N400
4 XT3S250
2 x 500 1255 2510 30.4 T7S1600/X1B1600** 1600 0.79 60.7 XT1N160 T5N400
1 x 630 1581 1581 38.7 T7S1600/X1B1600** 1600 1 38.7 XT1C160 XT3N250 T5N400
2 x 630 4 1581 3163 37.9 T7S1600/X1B1600** 1600 1 75.9 XT1S160 XT3S250 T5S400
3 x 630 1581 4744 74.4 T7S1600/E2S1600 1600 1 111.6 XT2L160 XT4L250 T5L400
1 x 800 2008 2008 39.3 E3N2500 2500 0.81 39.3 XT1C160 XT3N250 T5N400
2 x 800 5 2008 4016 38.5 E3N2500 2500 0.81 77.0 XT1S160 XT3S250 T5S400
3 x 800 2008 6025 75.5 E3H2500 2500 0.81 113.2 XT2L160 XT4L250 T5L400
1 x 1000 2510 2510 48.9 E3N3200 3200 0.79 48.9 XT1N160 XT3N250 T5N400
2 x 1000 5 2510 5020 47.7 E3N3200 3200 0.79 95.3 XT1H160 XT4H250 T5H400
3 x 1000 2510 7531 93.0 E3H3200 3200 0.79 139.5 XT2L160 XT4L250 T5L400
1 x 1250 3138 3138 60.7 E3N3200 3200 1 60.7 XT1N160 XT3S250 T5N400
2 x 1250 5 3138 6276 58.8 E3N3200 3200 1 117.7 XT2L160 XT4L250 T5L400
3 x 1250 3138 9413 114.1 E4V3200 3200 1 171.2 XT2V160 XT4V250 T5L400

* also Tmax series CBs equipped with electronic releases can be used for this application
** Emax type E1 can be used for this application

412 Electrical devices | ABB

 2.4 Protection and switching of transformers

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Circuit-breaker “B” (Feeder circuit-breaker)

Feeder circuit-breaker type and rated current
630 A 800 A 1000 A 1250 A 1600 A 2000 A 2500 A 3200 A 4000 A

T5N630

T5N630

T5N630 T6N800/X1B800
T5N630
T5N630 T6N800/X1B800 T7S1000/X1B1000 T7S1250/X1B1250
T5N630 T6N800/X1B800
T5N630 T6N800/X1N800 T7S1000/X1N1000 T7S1250/X1N1250 T7S1600/X1N1600
T5N630 T6N800/X1B800
T5N630 T6N800/X1N800 T7S1000/X1N1000 T7S1250/X1N1250 T7S1600/X1N1600 E2N2000
T5N630 T6N800/X1B800 T7S1000/X1B1000 T7S1250/X1B1250
T5S630 T6S800/E2S800 T7S1000/E2S1000 T7S1250/E2S1250 T7S1600/E2S1600 E2S2000 E3H2500
T5L630 T6L800/E3V800 T7L1000/E3V1250 T7L1250/E3V1250 T7L1600/E3V1600 E3V2000 E3V2500 E3V3200
T5N630 T6N800/X1B800 T7S1000/X1B1000 T7S1250/X1B1250 T7S1600/X1B1600
T5S630 T6L800/E2S800 T7S1000/E2S1000 T7S1250/E2S1250 T7S1600/E2S1600 E2S2000 E3H2500 E3H3200
T5L630 T6L800/E3V800 T7L1000/E3V1250 T7L1250/E3V1250 T7L1600/E3V1600 E3V2000 E3V2500 E4V3200 E4V4000
T5N630 T6N800/X1N800 T7S1000/X1N1000 T7S1250/X1N1250 T7S1600/X1N1600 E2N2000
T7H1000/E3H1000 T7H1250/E3H1250 T7H1600/E3H1600 1SDC010035F0201
T5H630 T6H800/E3H800 E3H2000 E3H2500 E3H3200 E4H4000
T5L630 T6L800 T7L1000 T7L1250 T7L1600 E4V3200 E4V3200 E4V3200 E4V4000
T5N630 T6N800/X1N800 T7S1000/X1N1000 T7S1250/X1N1250 T7S1600/X1N1600 E2N2000 E3N2500
T5L630 T6L800/E3V800 T7L1000/E3V1250 T7L1250/E3V1250 T7L1600/E3V1600 E3V2000 E3V2500 E3V3200 E4V4000
T5L630 T6L800 T7L1000 T7L1250 T7L1600

ABB | Electrical devices 413

 2.4 Protection and switching of transformers

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Table 2: Protection and switching of 400 V transformers
Transformer Circuit-breaker “A” (LV side)
Trafo Release
Sr uk Trafo Ir Busbar Ib feeder I ABB SACE Busbar Ik
k size minimum
[kVA] [%] [A] [A] [kA] Circuit-breaker In [A] setting [kA] 32 A 63 A 125 A 160 A 250 A 400 A
1 x 63 91 91 2.2 XT1B* 100 0.92 2.2 S200
4
2 x 63 91 182 2.2 XT1B* 100 0.92 4.4 S200 XT1B160
1 x 100 144 144 3.6 XT1B* 160 0.91 3.6 S200 XT1B160
4
2 x 100 144 288 3.6 XT1B* 160 0.91 7.2 S200 XT1B160
1 x 125 180 180 4.5 XT3N250* 200 0.73 4.5 S200 XT1B160
4
2 x 125 180 360 4.4 XT3N250* 200 0.73 8.8 S200 XT1B160
1 x 160 231 231 5.7 XT3N250* 250 0.93 5.7 S200 XT1B160
4
2 x 160 231 462 5.7 XT3N250* 250 0.93 11.4 S200M XT1B160 XT3N250
1 x 200 289 289 7.2 T4N320 320 0.91 7.2 S200 XT1B160 XT3N250
4
2 x 200 289 578 7.1 T4N320 320 0.91 14.2 S200M XT1B160 XT3N250 T5N400
1 x 250 361 361 8.9 T5N400 400 0.91 8.9 S200 XT1B160 XT3N250
4
2 x 250 361 722 8.8 T5N400 400 0.91 17.6 XT1B160 XT3N250 T5N400
1 x 315 455 455 11.2 T5N630 630 0.73 11.2 S200M XT1B160 XT3N250 T5N400
4
2 x 315 455 910 11.1 T5N630 630 0.73 22.2 XT1C160 XT3N250 T5N400
1 x 400 577 577 14.2 T5N630 630 0.92 14.2 S200M XT1B160 XT3N250 T5N400
4
2 x 400 577 1154 14 T5N630 630 0.92 28 XT1N160 XT3N250 T5N400
1 x 500 722 722 17.7 T6N800 800 0.91 17.7 XT1B160 XT3N250 T5N400
4
2 x 500 722 1444 17.5 T6N800 800 0.91 35.9 XT1N160 XT3N250 T5N400
1 x 630 909 909 22.3 T7S1000/X1B1000** 1000 0.91 22.3 XT1C160 XT3N250 T5N400
2 x 630 4 909 1818 21.8 T7S1000/X1B1000** 1000 0.91 43.6 XT1S160 XT3S250 T5S400
3 x 630 909 2727 42.8 T7S1000/X1N1000** 1000 0.91 64.2 XT1H160 XT4H250 T5H400
1 x 800 1155 1155 22.6 T7S1250/X1B1250** 1250 0.93 22.6 XT1C160 XT3N250 T5N400
2 x 800 5 1155 2310 22.1 T7S1250/X1B1250** 1250 0.93 44.3 XT1S160 XT3S250 T5S400
3 x 800 1155 3465 43.4 T7S1250/X1N1250** 1250 0.93 65 XT1H160 XT4H250 T5H400
1 x 1000 1443 1443 28.1 T7S1600/X1B1600** 1600 0.91 28.1 XT1N160 XT3N250 T5N400
2 x 1000 5 1443 2886 27.4 T7S1600/X1B1600** 1600 0.91 54.8 XT1H160 XT4H250 T5H400
3 x 1000 1443 4329 53.5 T7H1600/E2N1600 1600 0.91 80.2 XT2L160 XT4L250 T5L400
1 x 1250 1804 1804 34.9 E2B2000 2000 0.91 34.9 XT1N160 XT3N250 T5N400
2 x 1250 5 1804 3608 33.8 E2B2000 2000 0.91 67.7 XT1H160 XT4H250 T5H400
3 x 1250 1804 5412 65.6 E2S2000 2000 0.91 98.4 XT2L160 XT4L250 T5L400
1 x 1600 2309 2309 35.7 E3N2500 2500 0.93 35.7 XT1N160 XT3N250 T5N400
2 x 1600 6.25 2309 4618 34.6 E3N2500 2500 0.93 69.2 XT1H160 XT4H250 T5H400
3 x 1600 2309 6927 67 E3S2500 2500 0.93 100.6 XT2L160 XT4L250 T5L400
1 x 2000 2887 2887 44.3 E3N3200 3200 0.91 44.3 XT1S160 XT3S250 T5S400
2 x 2000 6.25 2887 5774 42.6 E3N3200 3200 0.91 85.1 XT2L160 XT4L250 T5L400
3 x 2000 2887 8661 81.9 E3H3200 3200 0.91 122.8 XT2V160 XT4V250 T5V400
1 x 2500 6.25 3608 3608 54.8 E4S4000 4000 0.91 54.8 XT1H160 XT4H250 T5H400
1 x 3125 6.25 4510 4510 67.7 E6H5000 5000 0.91 67.7 XT1H160 XT4H250 T5H400
* also Tmax series CBs equipped with electronic releases can be used for this application
** Emax type E1 can be used for this application

414 Electrical devices | ABB

 2.4 Protection and switching of transformers

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Circuit-breaker “B” (Feeder circuit-breaker)

Feeder circuit-breaker type and rated current
630 A 800 A 1000 A 1250 A 1600 A 2000 A 2500 A 3200 A 4000 A

T5N630

T5N630
T5N630
T5N630 T6N800/X1B800
T5N630 T6N800/X1B800
T5S630 T6S800/X1N800 T7S1000/X1N1000 T7S1250/X1N1250
T5H630 T6H800/X1N800 T7H1000/X1N1000 T7H1250/X1N1250 T7H1600/X1N1600
T5N630 T6N800/X1B800 T7S1000/X1B1000
T5S630 T6S800/X1N800 T7S100/X1N1000 T7S1250/X1N1250 T7S1600/X1N1600
T5H630 T6H800/X1N800 T7H1000/X1N1000 T7H1250/X1N1250 T7H1600/X1N1600 E2N2000 E3N2500
T5N630 T6N800/X1B800 T7S100/X1B1000 T7S1250/X1B1250
T5H400 T6H800/X1N800 T7H1000/X1N1000 T7H1250/X1N1250 T7H1600/X1N1600 E2N2000
T5L630 T6L800/E2S800 T7L1000/E2S1000 T7L1250/E2S1250 T7L1600/E2S1600 E2S2000 E3H2500 E3H3200
T5N630 T6N800/X1B800 T7S1000/X1B1000 T7S1250/X1B1250 T7S1600/X1B1600
T5H630 T6H800/E2S800 T7H1000/E2S1000 T7H1250/E2S1250 T7H1600/E2S1600 E2S2000 E3S2500 E3S3200
T5L630 T6L800/E3H800 T7L1000/E3H1000 T7L1250/E3H1250 T7L1600/E3H1600 E3H2000 E3H2500 E3H3200 E4H4000
T5N630 T6N800/X1B800 T7S1000/X1B1000 T7S1250/X1B1250 T7S1600/X1B1600
T5H630 T6H800/E2S800 T7H1000/E2S1000 T7H1250/E2S1250 T7H1600/E2S1600 E2S2000 E3S2500 E3S3200 E4S4000
T5L630 T7L800/E3V800 T7L1000/E3V1250 T7L1250/E3V1250 T7L1600/E3V1600 E3V2000 E3V2500 E3V3200 E4V4000 1SDC010036F0201
T5S630 T6S800/X1N800 T7S1000/X1N1000 T7S1250/X1N1250 T7S1600/X1N1600 E2N2000
T5L630 T6L800/E3H800 T7L1000/E3H1000 T7L1250/E3H1250 T7L1600/E3H1600 E3H2000 E3H2500 E3H3200 E4H4000
T5V630 T7V800/E3V800 T7V1000/E3V1000 T7V1250/E3V1250 E3V1600 E3V2000 E3V2500 E3V3200 E4V4000
T5H630 T6H800/X1N800 T7H1000/X1N1000 T7H1250/X1N1250 T7H1600/X1N1600 E2N2000 E3N2500 E3N3200
T5H630 T6H800/E2S800 T7H1000/E2S1000 T7H1250/E2S1250 T7H1600/E2S1600 E2S2000 E3S2500 E3S3200 E4S4000

ABB | Electrical devices 415

 2.4 Protection and switching of transformers

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Table 3: Protection and switching of 440 V transformers
Transformer Circuit-breaker “A” (LV side)
Trafo Release
Sr uk Trafo Ir Busbar Ib feeder I ABB SACE Busbar Ik
k size minimum
[kVA] [%] [A] [A] [kA] Circuit-breaker In [A] setting [kA] 32 A 63 A 125 A 160 A 250 A 400 A
1 x 63 83 83 2.1 XT1B160* 100 0.83 2.1 S200
4
2 x 63 83 165 2.1 XT1B160* 100 0.83 4.1 S200 XT1B160
1 x 100 131 131 3.3 XT1B160* 160 0.82 3.3 S200
4
2 x 100 131 262 3.3 XT1B160* 160 0.82 6.5 XT1B160
1 x 125 164 164 4.1 XT3N250* 200 0.82 4.1 S200 XT1B160
4
2 x 125 164 328 4.1 XT3N250* 200 0.82 8.1 XT1B160 XT3N250
1 x 160 210 210 5.2 XT3N250* 250 0.84 5.2 S200 XT1B160
4
2 x 160 210 420 5.2 XT3N250* 250 0.84 10.4 XT1B160 XT3N250
1 x 200 262 262 6.5 T4N320 320 0.82 6.5 XT1B160
4
2 x 200 262 525 6.5 T4N320 320 0.82 12.9 XT1B160 XT3N250 T5N400
1 x 250 328 328 8.1 T5N400 400 0.82 8.1 XT1B160 XT3N250
4
2 x 250 328 656 8.1 T5N400 400 0.82 16.1 XT1C160 XT3N250 T5N400
1 x 315 413 413 10.2 T5N630 630 0.66 10.2 XT1B160 XT3N250
4
2 x 315 413 827 10.1 T5N630 630 0.66 20.2 XT1C160 XT3N250 T5N400
1 x 400 525 525 12.9 T5N630 630 0.83 12.9 XT1B160 XT3N250 T5N400
4
2 x 400 525 1050 12.8 T5N630 630 0.83 25.6 XT1N160 XT3S250 T5N400
1 x 500 656 656 16.1 T6N800 800 0.82 16.1 XT1C160 XT3N250 T5N400
4
2 x 500 656 1312 15.9 T6N800 800 0.82 31.7 XT1N160 XT3S250 T5S400
1 x 630 827 827 20.2 T7S1000/X1B1000** 1000 0.83 20.2 XT1C160 XT3N250 T5N400
2 x 630 4 827 1653 19.8 T7S1000/X1B1000** 1000 0.83 39.7 XT1S160 XT3S250 T5S400
3 x 630 827 2480 38.9 T7S1000/X1B1000** 1000 0.83 58.3 XT1H160 XT4H250 T5H400
1 x 800 1050 1050 20.6 T7S1250/X1B1250** 1250 0.84 20.6 XT1C160 XT3N250 T5N400
2 x 800 5 1050 2099 20.1 T7S1250/X1B1250** 1250 0.84 40.3 XT1S160 XT4S250 T5H400
3 x 800 1050 3149 39.5 T7S1250/X1B1250** 1250 0.84 59.2 XT1H160 XT4H250 T5H400
1 x 1000 1312 1312 25.6 T7S1600/X1B1600** 1600 0.82 25.6 XT1N160 XT3S250 T5N400
2 x 1000 5 1312 2624 24.9 T7S1600/X1B1600** 1600 0.82 49.8 XT1S160 XT4S250 T5H400
3 x 1000 1312 3936 48.6 T7H1600/X1N1600** 1600 0.82 72.9 XT2L160 XT4L250 T5L400
1 x 1250 1640 1640 31.7 E2B2000 2000 0.82 31.7 XT1N160 XT3S250 T5S400
2 x 1250 5 1640 3280 30.8 E2B2000 2000 0.82 61.5 XT1H160 XT4H250 T5H400
3 x 1250 1640 4921 59.6 E2N2000 2000 0.82 89.5 XT2L160 XT4L250 T5L400
1 x 1600 2099 2099 32.5 E3N2500 2500 0.84 32.5 XT1N160 XT3S250 T5S400
2 x 1600 6.25 2099 4199 31.4 E3N2500 2500 0.84 62.9 XT1H160 XT4H250 T5H400
3 x 1600 2099 6298 60.9 E3N2500 2500 0.84 91.4 XT2L160 XT4L250 T5L400
1 x 2000 2624 2624 40.3 E3N3200 3200 0.82 40.3 XT1S160 XT4S250 T5H400
2 x 2000 6.25 2624 5249 38.7 E3N3200 3200 0.82 77.4 XT2L160 XT4L250 T5L400
3 x 2000 2624 7873 74.4 E3S3200 3200 0.82 111.7 XT2V160 XT4V250 T5V400
1 x 2500 6.25 3280 3280 49.8 E4S4000 4000 0.82 49.8 XT1S160 XT4S250 T5H400
1 x 3125 6.25 4100 4100 61.5 E6H5000 5000 0.82 61.5 XT1H160 XT4H250 T5H400
* also Tmax series CBs equipped with electronic releases can be used for this application
** Emax type E1 can be used for this application

416 Electrical devices | ABB

 2.4 Protection and switching of transformers

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Circuit-breaker “B” (Feeder circuit-breaker)

Feeder circuit-breaker type and rated current
630 A 800 A 1000 A 1250 A 1600 A 2000 A 2500 A 3200 A 4000 A

T5N630

T5N630

T5S630 T6S800/X1B800
T5N630
T5S630 T6S800/X1B800 T7S1000/X1B1000 T7S1250/X1B1250
T5H630 T6L800/X1N800 T7H1000/X1N1000 T7H1250/X1N1250 T7H1600/X1N1600 E2N2000
T5N630 T6N800/X1B800
T5H630 T6S800/X1B800 T7S1000/X1B1000 T7S1250/X1B1250 T7S1600/X1B1600
T5H630 T6L800/X1N800 T7H1000/X1N1000 T7H1250/X1N1250 T7H1600/X1N1600 E2N2000 E3N2500 E3N3200 E4S4000
T5N630 T6N800/X1B800
T5H630 T6H800/E1N800 T7S1000/X1N1000 T7S1250/X1N1250 T7S1600/X1N1600 E2N2000
T5L630 T6L800/E2S800 T7L1000/E2S1000 T7L1250/E2S1250 T7L1600/E2S1600 E3S2000 E3S2500 E3S3200
T5S630 T6S800/X1B800 T7S1000/X1B1000 T7S1250/X1B1250
T5H630 T6L800/X1N800 T7H1000/X1N1000 T7H1250/XN1250 T7H1600/X1N1600 E2N2000 E3N2500
T5L630 T7L800/E3H800 T7L1000/E3H1000 T7L1250/E3H1250 T7L1600/E3H1600 E3H2000 E3H2500 E3H3200 E4H4000
T5S630 T6S800/X1B800 T7S1000/X1B1000 T7S1250/X1B1250 T7S1600/X1B1600
T5H630 T6L800/X1N800 T7H1000/X1N1000 T7H1250/X1N1250 T7H1600/X1N1600 E2N2000 E3N2500 E3N3200
T5L630 T7L800/E3H800 T7L1000/E3H1000 T7L1250/E3H1250 T7L1600/E3H1600 E3H2000 E3H2500 E3H3200 E4H4000 1SDC010037F0201
T5H630 T6S800/X1B800 T7S1000/X1B1000 T7S1250/X1B1250 T7S1600/X1B1600 E2B2000
T5L630 T6L800/E2S800 T7L1000/E2S1000 T7L1250/E2S1250 T7L1600/E2S1600 E3H2000 E3H2500 E3H3200 E4H4000
T5V630 T7V800/E3V800 T7V1000/E3V1000 T7V1250/E3V1250 E3V1600 E3V2000 E3V2500 E3V3200 E4V4000
T5H630 T6H800/X1N800 T7S1000/X1N1000 T7S1250/X1N1250 T7S1600/X1N1600 E2N2000 E3N2500
T5H630 T6L800/X1N800 T7H1000/X1N1000 T7H1250/X1N1250 T7H1600/X1N1600 E2N2000 E3N2500 E3N3200

ABB | Electrical devices 417

 2.4 Protection and switching of transformers

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Table 4: Protection and switching of 690 V transformers
Transformer Circuit-breaker “A” (LV side)
Trafo Release
Sr uk Trafo Ir Busbar Ib feeder I ABB SACE Busbar Ik
k size minimum
[kVA] [%] [A] [A] [kA] Circuit-breaker In [A] setting [kA] 32 A 63 A 125 A 160 A 250 A 400 A
1 x 63 53 53 1.3 XT1B* 63 0.84 1.3 XT1B160
4
2 x 63 53 105 1.3 XT1B* 63 0.84 2.6 XT1B160
1 x 100 84 84 2.1 XT1B* 100 0.84 2.1 XT1B160
4
2 x 100 84 167 2.1 XT1B* 100 0.84 4.2 XT1N160
1 x 125 105 105 2.6 XT1B* 125 0.84 2.6 XT1B160
4
2 x 125 105 209 2.6 XT1B* 125 0.84 5.2 XT1N160
1 x 160 134 134 3.3 XT1C* 160 0.84 3.3 XT1C160
4
2 x 160 134 268 3.3 XT1C* 160 0.84 6.6 XT1S160
1 x 200 167 167 4.2 XT3N250* 200 0.84 4.2 XT1N160
4
2 x 200 167 335 4.1 XT3N250* 200 0.84 8.3 XT1H160 XT4N250
1 x 250 209 209 5.2 XT3S250* 250 0.84 5.2 XT1N160
4
2 x 250 209 418 5.1 XT3S250* 250 0.84 10.3 XT2S160 XT4S250
1 x 315 264 264 6.5 T4N320 320 0.82 6.5 XT1S160
4
2 x 315 264 527 6.5 T4N320 320 0.82 12.9 XT2H160 XT4H250 T5N400
1 x 400 335 335 8.3 T5N400 400 0.84 8.3 XT1H160 XT4N250
4
2 x 400 335 669 8.2 T5N400 400 0.84 16.3 XT2L160 XT4L250 T5N400
1 x 500 418 418 10.3 T5N630 630 0.66 10.3 XT2S160 XT4S250
4
2 x 500 418 837 10.1 T5N630 630 0.66 20.2 XT4V250 XT4V250 T5S400
1 x 630 527 527 12.9 T5N630 630 0.84 12.9 XT2H160 XT4H250 T5N400
2 x 630 4 527 1054 12.6 T5N630 630 0.84 25.3 T4H250*** T4H250*** T5H400
3 x 630 527 1581 24.8 T5S630 630 0.84 37.2 T4H250*** T4H250*** T5H400
1 x 800 669 669 13.1 T6N800 800 0.84 13.1 XT2H160 XT4H250 T5N400
2 x 800 5 669 1339 12.8 T6N800 800 0.84 25.7 T4H250*** T4H250*** T5H400
3 x 800 669 2008 25.2 T6L800 800 0.84 37.7 T4H250*** T4H250*** T5H400
1 x 1000 837 837 16.3 T7S1000/X1B1000** 1000 0.84 16.3 XT2L160 XT4L250 T5N400
2 x 1000 5 837 1673 15.9 T7S1000/X1B1000** 1000 0.84 31.8 T4H250*** T4H250*** T5H400
3 x 1000 837 2510 31.0 T7H1000/X1B1000** 1000 0.84 46.5 T4L250*** T4L250*** T5L400
1 x 1250 1046 1046 20.2 T7S1250/X1B1250** 1250 0.84 20.2 XT4V250 XT4V250 T5S400
2 x 1250 5 1046 2092 19.6 T7S1250/X1B1250** 1250 0.84 39.2 T4H250*** T4H250*** T5H400
3 x 1250 1046 3138 38.0 T7H1250/X1B1250** 1250 0.84 57.1 T4L250*** T4L250*** T5L400
1 x 1600 1339 1339 20.7 T7S1600/X1B1600** 1600 0.84 20.7 XT4V250 XT4V250 T5S400
2 x 1600 6.25 1339 2678 20.1 T7S1600/X1B1600** 1600 0.84 40.1 T4L250*** T4L250*** T5L400
3 x 1600 1339 4016 38.9 T7H1600/X1B1600** 1600 0.84 58.3 T4L250*** T4L250*** T5L400
1 x 2000 1673 1673 25.7 E2B2000 2000 0.84 25.7 T4H250*** T4H250*** T5H400
2 x 2000 6.25 1673 3347 24.7 E2B2000 2000 0.84 49.3 T4L250*** T4L250*** T5L400
3 x 2000 1673 5020 47.5 E2N2000 2000 0.84 71.2 T4V250*** T4V250*** T5V400
1 x 2500 6.25 2092 2092 31.8 E3N2500 2500 0.84 31.8 T4H250*** T4H250*** T5H400
1 x 3125 6.25 2615 2615 39.2 E3N3200 3200 0.82 39.2 T4H250*** T4H250*** T5H400

* also Tmax series CBs equipped with electronic releases can be used for this application
** Emax type E1 can be used for this application
*** For XT4V with Icu = 90kA at 690V, please ask ABB SACE

418 Electrical devices | ABB

 2.4 Protection and switching of transformers

2 Protection of electrical equipment

Circuit-breaker “B” (Feeder circuit-breaker)

Feeder circuit-breaker type and rated current
630 A 800 A 1000 A 1250 A 1600 A 2000 A 2500 A 3200 A 4000 A

T5S630

T5H630
T5H630 T7H800/X1B800 T7H1000/X1B1000 T7H1250/X1B1250

T5H630 T6L800/X1B800
T5H630 T7H800/X1N800 T7H1000/X1N1000 T7H1250/X1N1250 T7H1600/X1N1600
T5N630
T5H630 T7H800/X1B800 T7H1000/X1B1000 T7H1250/X1B1250
T5L630 T7L800/X1N800 T7L1000/X1N1000 T7L1250/X1N1250 T7L1600/X1N1600 E2N2000
T5S630 T6S800/X1B800
T5H630 T7H800/X1B800 T7H1000/X1B1000 T7H1250/X1B1250 T7H1600/X1N1600
T5L630 T7V800/E2S800 T7V1000/E2S1000 T7V1250/ES21250 E2S1600 E2S2000
T5S630 T6S800/X1B800 T7S1000/X1B1000
T5L630 T7H800/X1B800 T7H1000/X1B1000 T7H1250/X1B1250 T7H1600/X1B1600 E2B2000
T5L630 T7V800/E2S800 T7V1000/X1B1000 T7V1250/ES21250 E2S1600 E2S2000 E3N2500 E3N3200 1SDC010038F0201
T5H630 T6L800/X1N800 T7S1000/E2S1000 T7S1250/X1N1250
T5L630 T7L800/X1N800 T7L1000/X1N1000 T7L1250/X1N1250 T7L1600/X1N1600 E2N2000 E3N2500
T5V630 E3S1000 E3S1250 E3S1600 E3S2000 E3S2500 E3S3200 E4S4000
T5H630 T7H800/X1B800 T7H1000/X1B1000 T7H1250/X1B1250 T7H1600/X1B1600
T5H630 T7H800/X1B800 T7H1000/X1B1000 T7H1250/X1B1250 T7H1600/X1B1600 E2B2000

ABB | Electrical devices 419

 2.4 Protection and switching of transformers

2 Protection of electrical equipment

NOTE
The tables refer to the previously specified conditions; the information for the
selection of circuit-breakers is supplied only with regard to the current in use and
the prospective short-circuit current. For a correct selection, other factors such
as selectivity, back-up protection, the decision to use limiting circuit- breakers
etc. must also be considered. Therefore, it is essential that the design engineers
carry out precise checks.
It must also be noted that the short-circuit currents given are determined using
the hypothesis of 750 MVA power upstream of the transformers, disregarding
the impedances of the busbars or the connections to the circuit-breakers.

Example:
Supposing the need to size breakers A1/A2/A3, on the LV side of the three
transformers of 630 kVA 20/0.4 kV with uk% equal to 4% and outgoing feeder
circuit-breakers B1/B2/B3 of 63-400-800 A:

A1 A2 A3

B1 B2 B3

63 A 400 A 800 A 1SDC010026F0001

420 Electrical devices | ABB

 2.4 Protection and switching of transformers

2 Protection of electrical equipment

From Table 2, corresponding to the row relevant to 3x630 kVA transformers,
it can be read that:

Level A circuit-breakers (LV side of transformer)

• trafo Ir (909 A) is the current that flows through the transformer circuit-
breakers;
• busbar Ib (2727 A) is the maximum current that the transformers can
supply;
• trafo feeder Ik (42.8 kA) is the value of the short-circuit current to consider for the
choice of the breaking capacity of each of the transformer circuit-breakers;
• T7S1000 or X1N1000 is the size of the transformer circuit-breaker;
• In (1000 A) is the rated current of the transformer circuit-breaker (electronic
release chosen by the user);
• the minimum value 0.91 indicate the minimum settings of the L function of
the electronic releases for CBs T7S1000 and X1N1000.

Level B circuit-breakers (outgoing feeder)

• busbar Ik (64.2 kA) is the short-circuit current due to the contribution of all
three transformers;
• corresponding to 63 A, read circuit-breaker B1 Tmax XT1H160;
• corresponding to 400 A, read circuit-breaker B2 Tmax T5H400;
• corresponding to 800 A, read circuit-breaker B3 Tmax T6H800 or
Emax X1N800.
The choice made does not take into account discrimination/back-up
requirements. Refer to the relevant chapters for selections appropriate to the
various cases.

ABB | Electrical devices 421

 3 Power factor correction
3.1 General aspects
In alternating current circuits, the current absorbed by the user can be repre-
sented by two components:
U
- the active component IR, in phase with the supply voltage, is directly correla-
ted to the output (and therefore to the part of electrical energy transformed
into energy of a different type, usually electrical with different characteristics,
IR P
I S
mechanical, light and/or thermal);
- the reactive component IQ, in quadrature to the voltage, is used to produce the
IQ Q flow necessary for the conversion of powers through the electric or magnetic
field. Without this, there could be no flow of power, such as in the core of a
transformer or in the air gap of a motor.
In the most common case, in the presence of ohmic-inductive type loads, the
total current (I) lags in comparison with the active component IR.
In an electrical installation, it is necessary to generate and transmit, other than the
active power P, a certain reactive power Q, which is essential for the conversion
of electrical energy, but not available to the user. The complex of the power
generated and transmitted constitutes the apparent power S.

Power factor (cosϕ) is defined as the ratio between the active component IR
and the total value of the current l; ϕ is the phase shifting between the voltage
U and the current l.
It results:

I S

The reactive demand factor (tanϕ) is the relationship between the reactive power
and the active power:

422 Electrical devices | ABB

 3.1 General aspects

3 Power factor correction

Table 1 shows some typical power factors:

Table 1: Typical power factor

Load cosϕ tanϕ

power factor reactive demand factor
Transformers (no load condition) 0.1÷0.15 9.9÷6.6
Motor (full load) 0.7÷0.85 1.0÷0.62
Motor (no load) 0.15 6.6
Metal working apparatuses:
- Arc welding 0.35÷0.6 2.7÷1.3
- Arc welding compensated 0.7÷0.8 1.0÷0.75
- Resistance welding: 0.4÷0.6 2.3÷1.3
- Arc melting furnace 0.75÷0.9 0.9÷0.5
Fluorescent lamps
- compensated 0.9 0.5
- uncompensated 0.4÷0.6 2.3÷1.3
Mercury vapour lamps 0.5 1.7
Sodium vapour lamp 0.65÷0.75 1.2÷0.9
AC DC converters 0.6÷0.95 1.3÷0.3
DC drives 0.4÷0.75 2.3÷0.9
AC drives 0.95÷0.97 0.33÷0.25
Resistive load 1 0

The power factor correction is the action increasing the power factor in a specific
section of the installation by locally supplying the necessary reactive power,
so as to reduce the current value to the equivalent of the power required, and
therefore the total power absorbed from the upstream side. Thus, the supply
lines, the generator and the transformers can be sized for a lower apparent
power value required by the load.
In detail, as shown by Figure 1 and Figure 2, increasing the power factor of
the load:
- decreases the relative voltage drop urp per unit of active power transmitted;
- increases the transmittable active power and decreases the losses, the other
dimensioning parameters remaining equal.

ABB | Electrical devices 423

 3.1 General aspects

3 Power factor correction

Figure 1: Relative voltage drop
Voltage drop per unit of active power transmitted
10

Cable cross section

Relative voltage drop

1SDC010039F0201
1
0.50
Load power factor

Figure 2: Transmittable active power

Active power increase with equal dimensioning factors
1000
original power factor
0.4 0.5 0.6

0.7 0.8 0.9

Active Power % increase

100

10
1SDC010040F0201

1
0.70 0.80 0.90 1.00
Improved power factor

424 Electrical devices | ABB

 3.1 General aspects

3 Power factor correction

The distribution authority is responsible for the production and transmission of
the reactive power required by the user installations, and therefore has a series
of further inconveniences which can be summarized as:
- oversizing of the conductors and of the components of the transmission
lines;
- higher Joule-effect losses and higher voltage drops in the components and
lines.
The same inconveniences are present in the distribution installation of the final
user. The power factor is an excellent index of the size of the added costs and
is therefore used by the distribution authority to define the purchase price of
the energy for the final user.
The ideal situation would be to have a cosϕ slightly higher than the set reference
so as to avoid payment of legal penalties, and at the same time not to risk having,
with a cosϕ too close to the unit, a leading power factor when the power factor
corrected device is working with a low load.
The distribution authority generally does not allow others to supply reactive
power to the network, also due to the possibility of unexpected overvoltages.

In the case of a sinusoidal waveform, the reactive power necessary to pass from
one power factor cosϕ1 to a power factor cosϕ2 is given by the formula:

where:
P is the active power;
Q1,ϕ1 are the reactive power and the phase shifting before power factor
correction;
Q2,ϕ2 are the reactive power and the phase shifting after power factor
correction;
Qc is the reactive power for the power factor correction.

P Q2
S2 Q2 Q1
Qc
S2
P
S1
Qc P Q1 S1

Power factor correction unit Motor

(reactive power generator)
1SDC010041F0201

ABB | Electrical devices 425

 3.1 General aspects

3 Power factor correction

Table 2 shows the value of the relationship

for different values of the power factor before and after the correction.

Table 2: Factor Kc
Kc cosϕ2
cosϕ1 0.80 0.85 0.90 0.91 0.92 0.93 0.94 0.95 0.96 0.97 0.98 0.99 1
0.60 0.583 0.714 0.849 0.878 0.907 0.938 0.970 1.005 1.042 1.083 1.130 1.191 1.333
0.61 0.549 0.679 0.815 0.843 0.873 0.904 0.936 0.970 1.007 1.048 1.096 1.157 1.299
0.62 0.515 0.646 0.781 0.810 0.839 0.870 0.903 0.937 0.974 1.015 1.062 1.123 1.265
0.63 0.483 0.613 0.748 0.777 0.807 0.837 0.870 0.904 0.941 0.982 1.030 1.090 1.233
0.64 0.451 0.581 0.716 0.745 0.775 0.805 0.838 0.872 0.909 0.950 0.998 1.058 1.201
0.65 0.419 0.549 0.685 0.714 0.743 0.774 0.806 0.840 0.877 0.919 0.966 1.027 1.169
0.66 0.388 0.519 0.654 0.683 0.712 0.743 0.775 0.810 0.847 0.888 0.935 0.996 1.138
0.67 0.358 0.488 0.624 0.652 0.682 0.713 0.745 0.779 0.816 0.857 0.905 0.966 1.108
0.68 0.328 0.459 0.594 0.623 0.652 0.683 0.715 0.750 0.787 0.828 0.875 0.936 1.078
0.69 0.299 0.429 0.565 0.593 0.623 0.654 0.686 0.720 0.757 0.798 0.846 0.907 1.049
0.70 0.270 0.400 0.536 0.565 0.594 0.625 0.657 0.692 0.729 0.770 0.817 0.878 1.020
0.71 0.242 0.372 0.508 0.536 0.566 0.597 0.629 0.663 0.700 0.741 0.789 0.849 0.992
0.72 0.214 0.344 0.480 0.508 0.538 0.569 0.601 0.635 0.672 0.713 0.761 0.821 0.964
0.73 0.186 0.316 0.452 0.481 0.510 0.541 0.573 0.608 0.645 0.686 0.733 0.794 0.936
0.74 0.159 0.289 0.425 0.453 0.483 0.514 0.546 0.580 0.617 0.658 0.706 0.766 0.909
0.75 0.132 0.262 0.398 0.426 0.456 0.487 0.519 0.553 0.590 0.631 0.679 0.739 0.882
0.76 0.105 0.235 0.371 0.400 0.429 0.460 0.492 0.526 0.563 0.605 0.652 0.713 0.855
0.77 0.079 0.209 0.344 0.373 0.403 0.433 0.466 0.500 0.537 0.578 0.626 0.686 0.829
0.78 0.052 0.183 0.318 0.347 0.376 0.407 0.439 0.474 0.511 0.552 0.599 0.660 0.802
0.79 0.026 0.156 0.292 0.320 0.350 0.381 0.413 0.447 0.484 0.525 0.573 0.634 0.776
0.80 0.130 0.266 0.294 0.324 0.355 0.387 0.421 0.458 0.499 0.547 0.608 0.750
0.81 0.104 0.240 0.268 0.298 0.329 0.361 0.395 0.432 0.473 0.521 0.581 0.724
0.82 0.078 0.214 0.242 0.272 0.303 0.335 0.369 0.406 0.447 0.495 0.556 0.698
0.83 0.052 0.188 0.216 0.246 0.277 0.309 0.343 0.380 0.421 0.469 0.530 0.672
0.84 0.026 0.162 0.190 0.220 0.251 0.283 0.317 0.354 0.395 0.443 0.503 0.646
0.85 0.135 0.164 0.194 0.225 0.257 0.291 0.328 0.369 0.417 0.477 0.620
0.86 0.109 0.138 0.167 0.198 0.230 0.265 0.302 0.343 0.390 0.451 0.593
0.87 0.082 0.111 0.141 0.172 0.204 0.238 0.275 0.316 0.364 0.424 0.567
0.88 0.055 0.084 0.114 0.145 0.177 0.211 0.248 0.289 0.337 0.397 0.540
0.89 0.028 0.057 0.086 0.117 0.149 0.184 0.221 0.262 0.309 0.370 0.512
0.90 0.029 0.058 0.089 0.121 0.156 0.193 0.234 0.281 0.342 0.484

426 Electrical devices | ABB

 3.1 General aspects

3 Power factor correction

Example
Supposing the need to change from 0.8 to 0.93 the power factor of a three-
phase installation (Ur= 400 V) which absorbs an average power of 300 kW.
From Table 2, at the intersection of the column corresponding to the final
power factor (0.93), and the row corresponding to the starting power factor
(0.8), the value of Kc (0.355) can be read. The reactive power Qc which must
be generated locally shall be:

Qc = Kc . P = 0.355 . 300 = 106.5 Kvar

Due to the effect of power factor correction, the current absorbed decreases
from 540 A to 460 A (a reduction of approximately 15%).

Characteristics of power factor correction capacitor banks

The most economical means of increasing the power factor, especially for an
installation which already exists, is installing capacitors.
Capacitors have the following advantages:
- low cost compared with synchronous compensators and electronic power
converters;
- ease of installation and maintenance;
- reduced losses (less than 0.5 W/kvar in low voltage);
- the possibility of covering a wide range of powers and different load profiles,
simply supplying in parallel different combinations of components, each with
a relatively small power.

The disadvantages are sensitivity to overvoltages and to the presence of non-

linear loads.

The Standards applicable to power factor correction capacitors are as

follows:

- IEC 60831-1 “Shunt power capacitors of the self-healing type for a.c.
systems having a rated voltage up to and including 1000 V - Part 1: General
- Performance, testing and rating - Safety requirements - Guide for installation
and operation”;

- IEC 60931-1 “Shunt power capacitors of the non-self-healing type for a.c.
systems having a rated voltage up to and including 1000 V - Part 1: General-
Performance, testing and rating - Safety requirements - Guide for installation
and operation”.

ABB | Electrical devices 427

 3.1 General aspects

3 Power factor correction

The characteristics of a capacitor, given on its nameplate, are:

• rated voltage Ur, which the capacitor must withstand indefinitely;

• rated frequency fr (usually equal to that of the network);
• rated power Qc, generally expressed in kvar (reactive power of the capacitor
bank).

From this data it is possible to find the size characteristics of the capacitors by
using the following formulae (5):

Single-phase Three-phase Three-phase

connection star-connection delta-connection

Qc Qc Qc
Capacity of the capacitor bank C= 2 C= 2 C= 2
2 ≠ fr ⋅ U r 2≠ f r ⋅ U r 2≠ f r ⋅ U r ⋅ 3

1SDC010005F0901
Rated current of the components Irc = 2 ≠ f r ⋅ C ⋅ U r Irc = 2 ≠ f r ⋅ C ⋅ U r / 3 I rc = 2 ≠ f r ⋅ C ⋅ U r

Line current I l = I rc I l = Irc I l = Irc ⋅ 3

Ur = line voltage system

In a three-phase system, to supply the same reactive power, the star con-
nection requires a capacitor with a capacitance three times higher than the
delta-connected capacitor.
In addition, the capacitor with the star connection results to be subjected to
a voltage √3 lower and flows through by a current √3 higher than a capacitor
inserted and delta connected.
Capacitors are generally supplied with connected discharge resistance, calcu-
lated so as to reduce the residual voltage at the terminals to 75 V in 3 minutes,
as stated in the reference Standard.

3.2 Power factor correction method

Single PFC
Single or individual power factor correction is carried out by connecting a
capacitor of the correct value directly to the terminals of the device which
absorbs reactive power.
Installation is simple and economical: capacitors and load can use the same
overload and short-circuit protection, and are connected and disconnected
simultaneously.
The adjustment of cosϕ is systematic and automatic with benefit not only to
the energy distribution authority, but also to the whole internal distribution
system of the user.
This type of power factor correction is advisable in the case of large users with
constant load and power factor and long connection times.
Individual PFC is usually applied to motors and fluorescent lamps. The capacitor
units or small lighting capacitors are connected directly to loads.

428 Electrical devices | ABB

 3.2 Power factor connection method

3 Power factor correction

Individual PFC of motors
The usual connection diagrams are shown in the following figure:

Starter Starter

Starter

1SDC010028F0001
M c M c M c
Diagram 1 Diagram 2 Diagram 3

In the case of direct connection (diagrams 1 and 2) there is a risk that after
disconnection of the supply, the motor will continue to rotate (residual kinetic
energy) and self-excite with the reactive energy supplied by the capacitor bank,
acting as an asynchronous generator. In this case, the voltage is maintained on
the load side of the switching and control device, with the risk of dangerous
overvoltages of up to twice the rated voltage value.

However, in the case of diagram 3, to avoid the risk detailed above, the normal
procedure is to connect the PFC bank to the motor only when it is running, and
to disconnect it before the disconnection of the motor supply.

As a general rule, for a motor with power Pr, it is advisable to use a PFC with
reactive power Qc below 90% of the reactive power absorbed by the no-load
motor Q0, at rated voltage Ur, to avoid a leading power factor.
Considering that under no-load conditions, the current absorbed I0 [A] is solely
reactive, if the voltage is expressed in volts, it results:

1000

The current I 0 is generally given in the documentation supplied by the

manufacturer of the motor.

ABB | Electrical devices 429

 3.2 Power factor connection method

3 Power factor correction

Table 3 shows the values of reactive power for power factor correction of some
ABB motors, according to the power and the number of poles.

Table 3: Reactive power for power factor motor correction

Pr Qc Before PFC After PFC

[kW] [kvar] cosϕr Ir [A] cosϕ2 I2 [A]

400V / 50 Hz / 2 poles / 3000 r/min

7.5 2.5 0.89 13.9 0.98 12.7
11 2.5 0.88 20 0.95 18.6
15 5 0.9 26.5 0.98 24.2
18.5 5 0.91 32 0.98 29.7
22 5 0.89 38.5 0.96 35.8
30 10 0.88 53 0.97 47.9
37 10 0.89 64 0.97 58.8
45 12.5 0.88 79 0.96 72.2
55 15 0.89 95 0.97 87.3
75 15 0.88 131 0.94 122.2
90 15 0.9 152 0.95 143.9
110 20 0.86 194 0.92 181.0
132 30 0.88 228 0.95 210.9
160 30 0.89 269 0.95 252.2
200 30 0.9 334 0.95 317.5
250 40 0.92 410 0.96 391.0
315 50 0.92 510 0.96 486.3

400V / 50 Hz / 4 poles / 1500 r/min

7.5 2.5 0.86 14.2 0.96 12.7
11 5 0.81 21.5 0.96 18.2
15 5 0.84 28.5 0.95 25.3
18.5 7.5 0.84 35 0.96 30.5
22 10 0.83 41 0.97 35.1
30 15 0.83 56 0.98 47.5
37 15 0.84 68 0.97 59.1
45 20 0.83 83 0.97 71.1
55 20 0.86 98 0.97 86.9
75 20 0.86 135 0.95 122.8
90 20 0.87 158 0.94 145.9
110 30 0.87 192 0.96 174.8
132 40 0.87 232 0.96 209.6
160 40 0.86 282 0.94 257.4
200 50 0.86 351 0.94 320.2
250 50 0.87 430 0.94 399.4
315 60 0.87 545 0.93 507.9

430 Electrical devices | ABB

 3.2 Power factor connection method

3 Power factor correction

Pr Q c Before PFC After PFC

[kW] [kvar] cosϕr Ir [A] cosϕ2 I2 [A]

400V / 50 Hz / 6 poles / 1000 r/min

7.5 5 0.79 15.4 0.98 12.4
11 5 0.78 23 0.93 19.3
15 7.5 0.78 31 0.94 25.7
18.5 7.5 0.81 36 0.94 30.9
22 10 0.81 43 0.96 36.5
30 10 0.83 56 0.94 49.4
37 12.5 0.83 69 0.94 60.8
45 15 0.84 82 0.95 72.6
55 20 0.84 101 0.96 88.7
75 25 0.82 141 0.93 123.9
90 30 0.84 163 0.95 144.2
110 35 0.83 202 0.94 178.8
132 45 0.83 240 0.95 210.8
160 50 0.85 280 0.95 249.6
200 60 0.85 355 0.95 318.0
250 70 0.84 450 0.94 404.2
315 75 0.84 565 0.92 514.4

400V / 50 Hz / 8 poles / 750 r/min

7.5 5 0.7 18.1 0.91 13.9
11 7.5 0.76 23.5 0.97 18.4
15 7.5 0.82 29 0.97 24.5
18.5 7.5 0.79 37 0.93 31.5
22 10 0.77 45 0.92 37.5
30 12.5 0.79 59 0.93 50.0
37 15 0.78 74 0.92 62.8
45 20 0.78 90 0.93 75.4
55 20 0.81 104 0.93 90.2
75 30 0.82 140 0.95 120.6
90 30 0.82 167 0.93 146.6
110 35 0.83 202 0.94 178.8
132 50 0.8 250 0.93 214.6

ABB | Electrical devices 431

 3.2 Power factor connection method

3 Power factor correction

Example
For a three-phase asynchronous motor, 110 kW (400 V - 50 Hz - 4 poles), the
PFC power suggested in the table is 30 kvar.

Individual power factor correction of three-phase transformers

A transformer is an electrical device of primary importance which, due to the

system requirements, is often constantly in service.
In particular, in installations constituted by several transformer substations, it is
advisable to carry out power factor correction directly at the transformer.
In general, the PFC power (Qc) for a transformer with rated power Sr [kVA]
should not exceed the reactive power required under minimum reference load
conditions.
Reading the data from the transformer nameplate, the percentage value of
the no-load current i0%, the percentage value of the short-circuit voltage uk%,
the iron losses Pfe and the copper losses Pcu [kW], the PFC power required is
approximately:

where KL is the load factor, defined as the relationship between the minimum
reference load and the rated power of the transformer.

Example
Supposing the need for PFC of a 630 kVA oil-distribution transformer which
supplies a load which is less than 60% of its rated power.
From the data on the transformer nameplate:
i0% = 1.8%
uk% = 4%
Pcu = 8.9 kW
Pfe = 1.2 kW
The PFC power of the capacitor bank connected to the transformer is:

while, when using the simplified formula, the result is:

432 Electrical devices | ABB

 3.2 Power factor connection method

3 Power factor correction

Table 4 shows the reactive power of the capacitor bank Qc [kvar] to be connec-
ted on the secondary side of an ABB transformer, according to the different
minimum estimated load levels.

Table 4: PFC reactive power for ABB transformers

Qc [kvar]
Sr uk% io% Pfe Pcu load factor KL
[kVA] [%] [%] [kW] [kW] 0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1

Oil Distribution Transformer MV-LV

50 4 2.9 0.25 1.35 1.4 1.5 1.8 2.3 2.9
100 4 2.5 0.35 2.30 2.5 2.7 3.3 4.3 5.7
160 4 2.3 0.48 3.20 3.6 4 5 6.8 9.2
200 4 2.2 0.55 3.80 4.4 4.8 6.1 8.3 11
250 4 2.1 0.61 4.50 5.2 5.8 7.4 10 14
315 4 2 0.72 5.40 6.3 7 9.1 13 18
400 4 1.9 0.85 6.50 7.6 8.5 11 16 22
500 4 1.9 1.00 7.40 9.4 11 14 20 28
630 4 1.8 1.20 8.90 11 13 17 25 35
800 6 1.7 1.45 10.60 14 16 25 40 60
1000 6 1.6 1.75 13.00 16 20 31 49 74
1250 6 1.6 2.10 16.00 20 24 38 61 93
1600 6 1.5 2.80 18.00 24 30 47 77 118
2000 6 1.2 3.20 21.50 24 31 53 90 142
2500 6 1.1 3.70 24.00 27 37 64 111 175
3150 7 1.1 4.00 33.00 34 48 89 157 252
4000 7 1.4 4.80 38.00 56 73 125 212 333

Cast Resin Distribution Transformer MV-LV

100 6 2.3 0.50 1.70 2.2 2.6 3.7 5.5 8
160 6 2 0.65 2.40 3.1 3.7 5.5 8.4 12
200 6 1.9 0.85 2.90 3.7 4.4 6.6 10 15
250 6 1.8 0.95 3.30 4.4 5.3 8.1 13 19
315 6 1.7 1.05 4.20 5.3 6.4 9.9 16 24
400 6 1.5 1.20 4.80 5.9 7.3 12 19 29
500 6 1.4 1.45 5.80 6.8 8.7 14 23 36
630 6 1.3 1.60 7.00 8 10 17 29 45
800 6 1.1 1.94 8.20 8.6 12 20 35 56
1000 6 1 2.25 9.80 9.7 13 25 43 69
1250 6 0.9 3.30 13.00 11 15 29 52 85
1600 6 0.9 4.00 14.50 14 20 38 67 109
2000 6 0.8 4.60 15.50 15 23 45 82 134
2500 6 0.7 5.20 17.50 17 26 54 101 166
3150 8 0.6 6.00 19.00 18 34 81 159 269

Example
For a 630 kVA oil-distribution transformer with a load factor of 0.5, the necessary
PFC power is 17 kvar.

ABB | Electrical devices 433

 3.2 Power factor connection method

3 Power factor correction

PFC in groups

1SDC010029F0001
Group of loads to be power factor
corrected

This consists of local power factor correction of groups of loads with similar
functioning characteristics by installing a dedicated capacitor bank.
This method achieves a compromise between the economical solution and
the correct operation of the installation, since only the line downstream of the
installation point of the capacitor bank is not correctly exploited.

Centralized PFC

1SDC010030F0001
C
LV
Feeders

The daily load profile is of fundamental importance for the choice of the most
suitable type of power factor correction.
In installations, in which not all loads function simultaneously and/or in which
some loads are connected for only a few hours a day, the solution of using
single PFC becomes unsuitable as many of the capacitors installed could stay
idle for long periods.
In the case of installations with many loads occasionally functioning, thus
having a high installed power and a quite low average power absorption by
the loads which function simultaneously, the use of a single PFC system at
the installation origin ensures a remarkable decrease in the total power of the
capacitors to be installed.

434 Electrical devices | ABB

 3.2 Power factor connection method

3 Power factor correction

Centralized PFC normally uses automatic units with capacitor banks divided into
several steps, directly installed in the main distribution switchboards; the use
of a permanently connected capacitor bank is only possible if the absorption
of reactive energy is fairly regular throughout the day.
The main disadvantage of centralized PFC is that the distribution lines of the
installation, downstream of the PFC device, must be dimensioned taking into
account the full reactive power required by the loads.

3.3 Circuit-breakers for the protection and

switching of capacitor banks
The circuit-breakers for the protection and switching of capacitor banks in LV
shall:

1. withstand the transient currents which occur when connecting and

disconnecting the banks. In particular, the instantaneous magnetic and
electronic releases shall not trip due to these peak currents;
2. withstand the periodic or permanent overcurrents due to the voltage
harmonics and to the tolerance (+15%) of the rated value of capacity;
3. perform a high number of no-load and on-load operations, also with high
frequency;
4. be coordinated with any external device (contactors).

Furthermore, the making and breaking capacity of the circuit-breaker must be

adequate to the short- circuit current values of the installation.

Standards IEC 60831-1 and 60931-1 state that:

- the capacitors shall normally function with an effective current value up to 130%
of their rated current Irc (due to the possible presence of voltage harmonics in
the network);
- a tolerance of 10% on the capacitance for banks up to 100 kvar and of 5%
for banks exceeding 100 kvar is admited.
The maximum current which can be absorbed by the capacitor bank Icmax is:

Therefore:
- the rated current of the circuit-breaker shall be greater than 1.5⋅Irc;
- the overload protection setting shall be equal to 1.5⋅Irc.

The connection of a capacitor bank, similar to a closing operation under short-

circuit conditions, associated with transient currents with high frequency (1÷15
kHz), of short duration (1÷3 ms), with high peak (25÷200 Irc).
Therefore:
- the circuit-breaker shall have an adequate making capacity;
- the setting of the instantaneous short-circuit protection must not cause un-
wanted trips.
ABB | Electrical devices 435
 3.3 Circuit-breakers for the protection and switching of capacitor banks

3 Power factor correction

The second condition is generally respected:
• for thermomagnetic releases, the magnetic protection shall be set at a value
not less than 10⋅Icmax

≥ 10 Icmax 14.3 Irc 14.3

≥ 10 Icmax 13.65 Irc 13.65

• for electronic releases, the instantaneous short-circuit protection shall be

deactivated (I3 = OFF).

Hereunder, the selection tables for circuit-breakers: for the definition of the
version according to the required breaking capacity, refer to Part 1, Chapter 2.1
“General characteristics”.
The following symbols are used in the tables (they refer to maximum values):
- Qc= power of the capacitor bank which can be connected [kvar] with reference
to the indicated voltage and 50 Hz frequency;
- Icn= rated current of the connected capacitor bank [A];
- Icmax= maximum rated current of the connected capacitor bank [A];

It is necessary to install limiting inductances in order to reduce the inrush

current.

Table 5: Coordination type 2 circuit breaker-contactor for the switching of capacitor banks
at 400 V, 50 kA
Qc Icn Icmax
[kvar] [A] [A] MCCbs Contactor
10 14 21 XT2S 160 TMD In=25 A30
15 22 31 XT2S 160 TMD In=40 A/AF50
20 29 41 XT2S 160 TMD In=50 A/AF50
30 43 62 XT2S 160 TMD In=80 A/AF63
40 58 83 XT2S 160 TMD In=100 A/AF63
50 72 103 XT2S 160 TMD In=125 A/AF95
60 87 124 XT2S 160 TMD In=160 A/AF95
70 101 144 XT2S 160 TMD In=160* A/AF110
80 115 165 XT3S TMD TMD In=200 A/AF145
90 130 186 XT3S TMD TMD In=200 A/AF145
110 159 217 XT3S TMD TMD In=250 A/AF185
130 188 256 T4S320 PR221LI In=320 A/AF210
150 217 296 T4S320 PR221LI In=320 A/AF260
180 260 355 T5S400 PR221LI In=400 AF400
200 289 394 T5S400 PR221LI In=400 AF400
250 361 493 T6S630 PR221LI In=630 AF580
280 404 552 T6S630 PR221LI In=630 AF580
300 433 591 T6S630 PR221LI In=630 AF750
* For plug-in version reduce the power of the capacitor bank by 10%

436 Electrical devices | ABB

 3.3 Circuit-breakers for the protection and switching of capacitor banks

3 Power factor correction

Table 6: Coordination type 2 circuit breaker-contactor for the switching of capacitor banks
at 440 V, 50 kA
Qc Icn Icmax
[kvar] [A] [A] MCCbs Contactor
10 13 19 XT2S 160 TMD In=25 A/AF50
15 20 28 XT2S 160 TMD In=32 A/AF50
20 26 38 XT2S 160 TMD In=40 A/AF50
30 39 56 XT2S 160 TMD In=63 A/AF63
40 52 75 XT2S 160 TMD In=100 A/AF95
50 66 94 XT2S 160 TMD In=125 A/AF95
60 79 113 XT2S 160 TMD In=125 A/AF95
70 92 131 XT2S 160 TMD In=160 A/AF110
80 105 150 XT2S 160 TMD In=160* A/AF145
90 118 169 XT4S Ekip LS/I In=250 A/AF145
110 144 197 XT4S Ekip LS/I In=250 A/AF185
130 171 233 XT4S Ekip LS/I In=250 A/AF210
150 197 269 T4H320 PR221LI In=320 A/AF260
180 236 322 T5H400 PR221LI In=400 A/AF300
200 262 358 T5H400 PR221LI In=400 AF400
250 328 448 T6H630 PR221LI In=630 AF460
280 367 502 T6H630 PR221LI In=630 AF580
300 394 537 T6H630 PR221LI In=630 AF580
350 459 627 T6H800 PR221LI In=800 AF750
400 525 716 T6H800 PR221LI In=800 AF750
* For plug-in version reduce the power of the capacitor bank by 10%

Table 7: Coordination type 2 circuit breaker-contactor for the switching of capacitor banks
at 500 V, 50 kA
Qc Icn Icmax
[kvar] [A] [A] MCCbs Contactor
10 12 17 XT2H 160 TMD In=20 A/AF50
15 17 25 XT2H 160 TMD In=32 A/AF50
20 23 33 XT2H 160 TMD In=40 A/AF50
30 35 50 XT2H 160 TMD In=63 A/AF63
40 46 66 XT2H 160 TMD In=80 A/AF75
50 58 83 XT2H 160 TMD In=100 A/AF95
60 69 99 XT2H 160 TMD In=125 A/AF95
70 81 116 XT2H 160 TMD In=125 A/AF95
80 92 132 XT2H 160 TMD In=160 A/AF110
90 104 149 XT2H 160 TMD In=160* A/AF145
110 127 173 XT4H Ekip LS/I In=250 A/AF145
130 150 205 XT4H Ekip LS/I In=250 A/AF185
150 173 236 XT4H Ekip LS/I In=250 A/AF210
180 208 284 T4H320 PR221LI In=320 A/AF260
200 231 315 T5H400 PR221LI In=400 A/AF300
250 289 394 T5H400 PR221LI In=400 AF400
280 323 441 T6H630 PR221LI In=630 AF460
300 346 473 T6H630 PR221LI In=630 AF460
350 404 552 T6H630 PR221LI In=630 AF580
400 462 630 T6H800 PR221LI In=800 AF750
* For plug-in version reduce the power of the capacitor bank by 10%

ABB | Electrical devices 437

 3.3 Circuit-breakers for the protection and switching of capacitor banks

3 Power factor correction

Table 8: Coordination type 2 circuit breaker-contactor for the switching of capacitor banks
at 690 V, 10 kA
Qc Icn Icmax
[kvar] [A] [A] MCCbs Contactor
10 8 12 XT2N 160 TMD In=16 A/AF50
15 13 18 XT2N 160 TMD In=20 A/AF50
20 17 24 XT2N 160 TMD In=25 A/AF50
30 25 36 XT2N 160 TMD In=40 A/AF50
40 33 48 XT2N 160 TMD In=50 A/AF63
50 42 60 XT2N 160 TMD In=63 A/AF63
60 50 72 XT2N 160 TMD In=80 A/AF75
70 59 84 XT2N 160 TMD In=100 A/AF95
80 67 96 XT2N 160 TMD In=100 A/AF95
90 75 108 XT2N 160 TMD In=125 A/AF110
110 92 126 XT2N 160 TMD In=160 A/AF145
130 109 148 XT2N 160 TMD In=160* A/AF185
150 126 171 XT4N Ekip LS/I In=250 A/AF210
180 151 206 XT4N Ekip LS/I In=250 A/AF260
200 167 228 XT4N Ekip LS/I In=250 A/AF260
250 209 286 T4N320 PR221LI In=320 AF400
280 234 320 T5N400 PR221LI In=400 AF400
300 251 343 T5N400 PR221LI In=400 AF400
350 293 400 T6N630 PR221LI In=630 AF460
400 335 457 T6N630 PR221LI In=630 AF580
* For plug-in version reduce the power of the capacitor bank by 10%

438 Electrical devices | ABB

 3.3 Circuit-breakers for the protection and switching of capacitor banks

3 Power factor correction

In the following table regarding the switching and protection of capacitors by
means of air circuit-breakers, the following symbols are used:
- Nmech = number of mechanical operations;
- fmech = frequency of mechanical operations [op/h];
- Nel = number of electrical operations with reference to a voltage of 440 V;
- fel = frequency of electrical operations [op/h].

Table 9: Selection table for SACE Emax air circuit-breakers

ICBn Icn QC [kvar] Nmech fmech Nel fel
Circuit-breaker [A] [A] 400 V 440 V 500 V 690 V [op/h] [op/h]
X1 B-N 630 421 291 320 364 502 12500 60 6000 30
X1 B-N 800 533 369 406 461 637 12500 60 6000 30
X1 B-N 1000 666 461 507 576 795 12500 60 4000 30
X1 B-N 1250 834 578 636 722 997 12500 60 4000 30
X1 B-N 1600 1067 739 813 924 1275 12500 60 3000 30
E1 B-N 800 533 369 406 461 637 25000 60 10000 30
E1 B-N 1000 666 461 507 576 795 25000 60 10000 30
E1 B-N 1250 834 578 636 722 997 25000 60 10000 30
E1 B-N 1600 1067 739 813 924 1275 25000 60 10000 30
E2 B-N-S 800 533 369 406 461 637 25000 60 15000 30
E2 B-N-S 1000 666 461 507 576 795 25000 60 15000 30
E2 B-N-S 1250 834 578 636 722 997 25000 60 15000 30
E2 B-N-S 1600 1067 739 813 924 1275 25000 60 12000 30
E2 B-N-S 2000 1334 924 1017 1155 1594 25000 60 10000 30
E3 N-S-H-V 800 533 369 406 461 637 20000 60 12000 20
E3 N-S-H-V 1000 666 461 507 576 795 20000 60 12000 20
E3 N-S-H-V 1250 834 578 636 722 997 20000 60 12000 20
E3 N-S-H-V 1600 1067 739 813 924 1275 20000 60 10000 20
E3 N-S-H-V 2000 1334 924 1017 1155 1594 20000 60 9000 20
E3 N-S-H-V 2500 1667 1155 1270 1444 1992 20000 60 8000 20
E3 N-S-H-V 3200 2134 1478 1626 1848 2550 20000 60 6000 20
E4 S-H-V 3200 2134 1478 1626 1848 2550 15000 60 7000 10
E6 H-V 3200 2134 1478 1626 1848 2550 12000 60 5000 10

ABB | Electrical devices 439

 4 Protection of human beings
4.1 General aspects: effects of current on
human beings

Danger to persons due to contact with live parts is caused by the flow of the
current through the human body. The effects are:

- tetanization: the muscles affected by the current flow involuntary contract

and letting go of gripped conductive parts is difficult. Note: very high currents
do not usually induce muscular tetanization because, when the body touches
such currents, the muscular contraction is so sustained that the involuntary
muscle movements generally throw the subject away from the conductive
part;

- breathing arrest: if the current flows through the muscles controlling the
lungs, the involuntary contraction of these muscles alters the normal respiratory
process and the subject may die due to suffocation or suffer the consequences
of traumas caused by asphyxia;

- ventricular fibrillation: the most dangerous effect is due to the superposition

of the external currents with the physiological ones which, by generating
uncontrolled contractions, induce alterations of the cardiac cycle. This anomaly
may become an irreversible phenomenon since it persists even when the
stimulus has ceased;

- burns: they are due to the heating deriving, by Joule effect, from the current
passing through the human body.

The Standard IEC 60479-1 “Effects of current on human being and livestock” is
a guide about the effects of current passing through the human body to be used
for the definition of electrical safety requirements. This Standard shows, on a
time-current diagram, four zones to which the physiological effects of alternating
current (15 ÷100 Hz) passing through the human body have been related.

440 Electrical devices | ABB

 4.1 General aspect: effects of current on human beings

4 Protection of human beings

Figure 1: Time-current zones of the effects of alternating current on
the human body
ms 10.000

1SDC010042F0201
a b c1 c2 c3
5.000
AC-4.1
AC-4.2
2.000
AC-4.3
1.000
Duration of current flow t

500
AC-1 AC-2 AC-3 AC-4
200

100

50

20

10
0,1 0,2 0,5 1 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 1.000 2.000 5.000 10.000
Body current IB mA
Zone Zone
designation limits Physiological effects
AC-1 Up to 0.5 mA Usually no reaction.
line a
AC-2 0.5 mA Usually no harmful physiological effects.
up to
line b*
AC-3 Line b Usually no organic damage to be expected. Likelihood of cramplike mu-
up to scular contractions and difficulty in breathing for durations of current-flow
curve c1 longer than 2 s. Reversible disturbances of formation and conduction
of impulses in the heart, including atrial fibrillation and transient cardiac
arrest without ventricular fibrillation increasing with current magnitude
and time.
AC-4 Above Increasing with magnitude and time, dangerous pathophysiological effects
curve c1 such as cardiac arrest, breathing arrest and severe burns may occur in
addition to the effects of zone 3.
AC-4.1 c1 - c2 Probability of ventricular fibrillation increasing up to about 5%.
AC-4.2 c2 - c3 Probability of ventricular fibrillation up to about 50%.
AC-4.3 Beyond Probability of ventricular fibrillation above 50%.
curve c3
* For durations of current-flow below 10 ms, the limit for the body current for line b
remains constant at a value of 200 mA.

This Standard gives also a related figure for direct current.

By applying Ohm’s law it is possible to define the safety curve for the allowable
voltages, once the human body impedance has been calculated. The electrical
impedance of the human body depends on many factors. The above mentioned
Standard gives different values of impedance as a function of the touch voltage
and of the current path.
ABB | Electrical devices 441
 4 Protection of human beings
4.2 Distribution systems
The earth fault modalities and the consequences caused by contact with live
parts, are strictly related to the neutral conductor arrangement and to the
connections of the exposed conductive parts.

For a correct choice of the protective device, it is necessary to know which is

the distribution system of the plant.
IEC 60364-1 classifies the distribution systems with two letters.

The first letter represents the relationship of the power system to earth:
- T: direct connection of one point to earth, in alternating current systems,
generally the neutral point;
- I: all live parts isolated from earth, or one point, in alternating current systems,
generally the neutral point, connected to earth through an impedance.

The second letter represents the relationship of the exposed conductive parts
of the installation to earth:
- T: direct electrical connection of the exposed conductive parts to earth;
- N: direct electrical connection of the exposed conductive parts to the earthed
point of the power system.

Subsequent letters, if any, represent the arrangement of neutral and protective

conductors:
- S: protective function is provided by a conductor separate from the neutral
conductor;
- C: neutral and protective functions combined as a single conductor (PEN
conductor).

Three types of distribution system are considered:

TT System
L1
L2
L3
N
1SDC010032F0001

PE

TN System
(TN-C) (TN-S)
L1
L2
L3
PEN N
PE
1SDC010033F0001

442 Electrical devices | ABB

 4.2 Distribution systems

4 Protection of human beings

IT System L1
L2
L3

1SDC010034F0001
PE

In TT systems, the neutral conductor and the exposed conductive parts are
connected to earth electrodes electrically independent; the fault current flows
towards the power supply neutral point through earth (Figure 1):

Ik
L1
L2
L3
N

1SDC010035F0001
RB RA
Ik

In TT installations, the neutral conductor is connected to the supply star center,

it is usually distributed and has the function of making the phase voltage (e.g.
230 V) available, useful for single-phase load supply. The exposed conductive
parts, on the contrary, singularly or collectively, are locally connected to earth.
TT systems are generally used for civil installations.
TN systems are typically used when the power supply is distributed to loads
having their own electrical substation. The neutral conductor is directly earthed
in the substation; the exposed conductive parts are connected to the same
earthing point of the neutral conductor, and can be locally earthed.
Three types of TN system are considered according to the arrangement of
neutral and protective conductors:

1. TN-C neutral and protective functions are combined in a single conductor

(PEN conductor);
2. TN-S neutral and protective conductors are always separated;
3. TN-C-S neutral and protective functions are combined in a single conductor
in a part of the system (PEN) and are separated in another part (PE + N).

ABB | Electrical devices 443

 4.2 Distribution systems

4 Protection of human beings

In TN systems, the fault current flows towards the power supply neutral point
through a solid metallic connection, practically without involving the earth
electrode (Figure 2).
Figure 2: Earth fault in TN systems

Ik
L1
L2
L3
PEN
0 (TN-C) Ik (TN-S)
PE N

1SDC010036F0001
IT systems have no live parts directly connected to earth, but they can be
earthed through a sufficiently high impedance. Exposed conductive parts shall
be earthed individually, in groups or collectively to an independent earthing
electrode.
The earth fault current flows towards the power supply neutral point through
the earthing electrode and the line conductor capacitance (Figure 3).

Figure 3: Earth fault in IT systems

L1
L2
L3
Ik

C3 C2 C1
1SDC010037F0001

Rt
Ik

These distribution systems are used for particular plants, where the continuity
of supply is a fundamental requirement, where the absence of the supply can
cause hazards to people or considerable economical losses, or where a low
value of a first earth fault is required. In these cases, an insulation monitoring
device shall be provided for optical or acoustic signalling of possible earth faults,
or failure of the supplied equipment.

444 Electrical devices | ABB

 4 Protection of human beings
4.3 Protection against both direct and
indirect contact
Contacts of a person with live parts can be divided in two categories:
- direct contacts;
- indirect contacts.
A direct contact occurs when a part of the human body touches a part of the
plant, usually live (bare conductors, terminals, etc.).
A contact is indirect when a part of the human body touches an exposed
conductive parts, usually not live, but with voltage presence due to a failure or
wear of the insulating materials.

The measures of protection against direct contact are:

- insulation of live parts with an insulating material which can only be removed
by destruction (e.g. cable insulation);
- barriers or enclosures: live parts shall be inside enclosures or behind barriers
providing at least the degree of protection IPXXB or IP2X; for horizontal
surfaces the degree of protection shall be of at least IPXXD or IP4X (for the
meaning of the degree of protection codes please refer to Part 1, Chapter 5.1
“Electrical switchboards”);
- obstacles: the interposition of an obstacle between the live parts and the
operator prevents unintentional contacts only, but not an intentional contact
by the removal of the obstacle without particular tools;
- placing out of reach: simultaneously accessible parts at different potentials
shall not be within arm’s reach.

An additional protection against direct contact can be obtained by using residual

current devices with a rated operating residual current not exceeding 30 mA.
It must be remembered that the use of a residual current device as a mean of
protection against direct contacts does not obviate the need to apply one of
the above specified measures of protection.

The measures of protection against indirect contact are:

- automatic disconnection of the supply: a protective device shall automatically
disconnect the supply to the circuit so that the touch voltage on the exposed
conductive part does not persist for a time sufficient to cause a risk of harmful
physiological effect for human beings;
- supplementary insulation or reinforced insulation, e.g. by the use of Class II
components;

ABB | Electrical devices 445

 4.3 Protection against both direct and indirect contact

4 Protection of human beings

- non-conducting locations: locations with a particular resistance value of
insulating floors and walls (≥ 50 kΩ for Ur ≤ 500 V; ≥ 100 kΩ for Ur > 500 V)
and without protective conductors inside;
- electrical separation, e.g. by using an isolating transformer to supply the
circuit;
- earth-free local equipotential bonding: locations where the exposed conductive
parts are connected together but not earthed.

Finally, the following measures provide combined protection against both direct
and indirect contact:
- SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) system and PELV (Protective Extra Low
Voltage) system;
- FELV (Functional Extra Low Voltage) system.

The protection against both direct and indirect contact is ensured if the
requirements stated in 411 from IEC 60364-4-41 are fulfilled; particularly:
- the rated voltage shall not exceeds 50 V ac r.m.s. and 120 V ripple-free dc;
- the supply shall be a SELV or PELV source;
- all the installation conditions provided for such types of electrical circuits shall
be fulfilled.

A SELV circuit has the following characteristics:

1) it is supplied by an independent source or by a safety source. Independent
sources are batteries or diesel-driven generators. Safety sources are supplies
obtained through an isolating transformer;
2) there are no earthed points. The earthing of both the exposed conductive
parts as well as of the live parts of a SELV circuit is forbidden;
3) it shall be separated from other electrical systems. The separation of a SELV
system from other circuits shall be guaranteed for all the components; for
this purpose, the conductors of the SELV circuit may be contained in multi-
conductor cables or may be provided with an additional insulating sheath.

A PELV circuit has the same prescription of a SELV system, except for the
prohibition of earthed points; in fact in PELV circuits, at least one point is
always earthed.

446 Electrical devices | ABB

 4.3 Protection against both direct and indirect contact

4 Protection of human beings

FELV circuits are used when for functional reasons the requirements for SELV or
PELV circuits cannot be fulfilled; they require compliance with the following rules:
a) protection against direct contact shall be provided by either:
- barriers or enclosures with degree of protection in accordance with what
stated above (measures of protection against direct contact);
- insulation corresponding to the minimum test voltage specified for the
primary circuit. If this test is not passed, the insulation of accessible non-
conductive parts of the equipment shall be reinforced during erection so
that it can withstand a test voltage of 1500 V ac r.m.s. for 1 min.;
b) protection against indirect contact shall be provided by:
- connection of the exposed conductive parts of the equipment of the FELV
circuit to the protective conductor of the primary circuit, provided that
the latter is subject to one of the measures of protection against direct
contact;
- connection of a live conductor of the FELV circuit to the protective con-
ductor of the primary circuit provided that an automatic disconnection of
the supply is applied as measure of protection;
c) plugs of FELV systems shall not be able to enter socket-outlets of other
voltage systems, and plugs of other voltage systems shall not be able to
enter socket-outlets of FELV systems.
Figure 1 shows the main features of SELV, PELV and FELV systems.

Figure 1: SELV, PELV, FELV systems

safety isolating transformer no safety source,
or equivalent source, connection to earth
connection to earth is admissible
is admissible
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
PE PE

safety isolating E E
transformer
or equivalent
source,
no earthing
SELV PELV FELV

Class II
equipment
PELV circuit FELV circuit
1SDC010043F0201

voltage limits for E earth connections by estraneous conductive parts,

extra-low voltages: e.g. by metal pipe or structural steelwork

50 V ac PE protective conductor
120 V dc earth electrode

Note 1: Overcurrent protective devices are not shown in this figure.

ABB | Electrical devices 447

 4 Protection of human beings
4.4 TT System
An earth fault in a TT system involves the circuit represented in Figure 1:
Figure 1: Earth fault in TT system
Ik
L1
L2
L3
N

1SDC010035F0001
RB RA
Ik

The fault current flows through the secondary winding of the transformer, the
line conductor, the fault resistance, the protective conductor, and the earth
electrode resistances (RA, of the user’s plant, and RB, of the neutral).
According to IEC 60364-4 prescriptions, the protective devices must be coor-
dinated with the earthing arrangement in order to rapidly disconnect the supply
if the touch voltage reaches harmful values for the human body.

Before describing such prescriptions, it is useful to know the different circuit

types described in the above mentioned Standard; in particular, in a plant, the
circuits can be divided into:
• final circuit: it is a circuit which usually supplies equipment (for example an
aspirator, a bridge crane, etc.)
• distribution circuit: it is a circuit which supplies a distribution board to which
other final circuits are connected.

In a TT system, to achieve a correct protection against indirect contact through

the automatic disconnection of the circuit, it is necessary to respect one of the
following conditions (in compliance with IEC 60364-4):

Protection by means of residual current devices

By assuming 50V as limit voltage (standard environments), to achieve protection
against indirect contact by means of residual current devices it is necessary to
satisfy the following condition:
50V
RA · I∆n ≤ 50V then: RA ≤
where: I∆n
RA is the total resistance (in ohm) of the earth electrode and of the protective
conductor of the exposed-conductive-parts1;
I∆n is the rated residual operating current of the residual current circuit-
breaker.
1
The resistance of the earth electrode is in series with that of the protective conductor, which is negligible if
compared with the resistance RA; as a consequence, in the formula it is possible to take into consideration
only the resistance of the earth electrode of the user’s plant.

448 Electrical devices | ABB

 4.4 TT System

4 Protection of human beings

As regards the disconnection times, the Standard distinguishes two possibi-
lities;
• final circuits with rated currents not exceeding 32A: in this case it is necessary
that the above mentioned condition with the times shown in Table 1 (values
referred to fault currents significantly higher than the rated residual current of
the residual current circuit-breakers typically 5·I∆n ) is fulfilled;
• distribution circuit or final circuit with rated currents exceeding 32A: in this
case it is necessary that the above mentioned condition is fulfilled with a time
not exceeding 1 s (conventional time).

Table 1: Maximum disconnection times for final circuits not excee-

ding 32A
50V<U0≤120V 130V<U0≤230V 230V<U0≤400V U0>400V
s s s s
System a.c. d.c. a.c. d.c. a.c. d.c. a.c. d.c.
TT 0.3 Note 1 0.2 0.4 0.07 0.2 0.04 0.1
Uo is the nominal a.c. or d.c. line to earth voltage.

Where in TT systems the disconnection is achivied by an overcurrent protective device and the protective
equipotential bonding is connected with all extraneous-conductive-parts within the installation, the maximum
disconnection times applicable to TN systems may be used.
NOTE 1 Disconnection may be required for reasons other than protection against electric shock.
NOTE 2 Where compliance with the above mentioned requirement is provided by an RCD, the disconnecting
times in accordance with the table above relate to prospective residual currents significantly higher than
the rated residual operating current of the RCD (typically 5·I∆n).

From the above, it is evident that the value of the resistance RA of the earthing
arrangement results to be different by using residual current circuit-breakers with
different sensitivity, since the current quantity at the denominator in the above
mentioned relationship is different. In fact, by using a residual current device
with 30mA sensitivity, an earthing resistance value lower than
50
RA ≤ = 1666.6W
0.03

shall be obtained, whereas with a less sensitive residual current device (for
example with 300mA sensitivity) an earthing resistance value lower than:

50
RA ≤ = 166.6W
0.3

shall be obtained.

ABB | Electrical devices 449

 4.4 TT System

4 Protection of human beings

As shown in the example, thanks to a more sensitive residual current device,
from a practical point of view it will be easier to realize an earthing system co-
ordinated with the characteristics of the device itself.
The Table 2 shows the maximum values of earth resistance which can be
obtained with residual current devices and making reference to a common
environment (50V):

Table 2: Earth resistance values

I∆n RA
[A] [Ω]
0.01 5000
0.03 1666
0.1 500
0.3 166
0.5 100
3 16
10 5
30 1.6

450 Electrical devices | ABB

 4.4 TT System

4 Protection of human beings

Protection by means of overcurrent protective devices
The choice of the automatic device for the protection against phase-to-earth
faults and indirect contact shall be carried out by coordinating properly the
disconnection times with the impedance of the fault loop.
As a consequence, it is necessary to fulfill the following condition:

Zs · Ia ≤ U0

where:
ZS is the impedance (in ohms) of the fault loop comprising
- the source;
- the line conductor up to the point of the fault;
- the protective conductor of the exposed-conductive-parts;
- the earthing conductor;
- the earth electrode of the installation;
- the earth electrode of the source;
Ia is the disconnection current in the times shown in Table 1 for final circuits
with currents not exceeding 32A or within 1 second for distribution circuits
and for final circuits with currents exceeding 32A;
U0 is the nominal a.c. r.m.s. voltage to earth (V).

The choice of the automatic device shall be made by coordinating properly the
disconnection times with the impedance of the fault loop.
The relationship Zs · Ia ≤ U0 may be expressed as :

U0
Ia ≤ = IkL-to earth
Zs

where IkL-to earth is the phase-to-earth fault current. Therefore, it is possible to state
that the protection against indirect contact is verified when the tripping current Ia
of the protective device (within the times shown in Table 1 or within 1s) is lower
than the phase-to-earth fault current IkL-to earth at the exposed-conductive-part
to be protected.
It is to underline that in TT distribution systems the use of a residual current
device allows to have an earthing arrangement with an earth resistance value
which can be easily obtained, whereas the use of automatic circuit-breakers
is possible only in case of low earth resistance values RA (very difficult to be
obtained in practice); besides, in such circumstances, it could be very difficult to
calculate the impedance of the fault loop (Zs), because the earthing resistance
of the neutral cannot be considered negligible (in fact it could reach values of
the same quantity of the earth resistance).

ABB | Electrical devices 451

 4 Protection of human beings
4.5 TN System

An earth fault in a TN system involves the circuit represented in Figure 2:

Figure 2=: Earth fault in TN system

Ik
L1
L2
L3
PEN
0 (TN-C) Ik (TN-S)
PE N

1SDC010036F0001
The fault loop does not affect the earthing system and is basically formed by the
connection in series of the phase conductor and of the protective conductor.
To provide a protection with automatic disconnection of the circuit, according
to IEC 60364-4 prescriptions, the following condition shall be fulfilled:
Zs · Ia ≤ U0
where:
Zs is the impedance of the fault loop comprising the source, the live
conductor up to the point of the fault and the protective conductor
between the point of the fault and the source [Ω];
U0 is the nominal ac r.m.s. voltage to earth [V];
Ia is the disconnection current in amperes of the protective device within
the times defined in Table 3 as a function of the rated voltage U0 for
final circuits with currents not exceeding 32A or within 5 seconds for
distribution circuits and for final circuits with current exceeding 32A
(for a description of the circuit typologies reference shall be made
to the indications given for TT systems).

Table 3: Maximum disconnecting times for TN system

50V<U0≤120V 120V<U0≤230V 230V<U0≤400V U0>400V
s s s s
System a.c. d.c. a.c. d.c. a.c. d.c. a.c. d.c.
TN 0.8 Note 1 0.4 5 0.2 0.4 0.1 0.1
NOTE 1 Disconnection may be required for reasons other than protection against electric shock.
NOTE 2 Where compliance with the above mentioned requirement is provided by an RCD, the disconnecting
times in accordance with the table above relate to prospective residual currents significantly higher
than the rated residual operating current of the RCD (typically 5·I∆n).

452 Electrical devices | ABB

 4.5 TN System

4 Protection of human beings

The choice of the automatic device for the protection against phase-PE faults
and against indirect contact shall be carried out by coordinating properly the
disconnection times with the impedance of the fault loop.
In TN systems a bolted fault phase-PE on the LV side usually generates a current
similar to that of a short-circuit and the earth fault current flowing through the
line conductor (or conductors) and the protective conductor does not absolutely
affect the earthing arrangement.
The relationship Zs · Ia ≤ U0 may be expressed as:

U0
Ia ≤ = IkLPE
Zs
where IkLPE is the phase-PE fault current. Therefore, it is possible to state that
the protection against indirect contact is verified when the tripping current
Ia of the protective device (within the times shown in Table 3 or within 5s) is
lower than the phase-PE fault current IkLPE at the exposed-conductive-part to
be protected.
In TN systems the following devices are used for protection against indirect
contact:
• circuit-breakers with thermomagnetic releases;
• circuit-breakers with electronic releases;
• residual current devices (TN-S only).

Finally, it is important to highlight the fact that the residual current devices
cannot be used in TN-C system, since the neutral and protective functions
are provided by a unique conductor: this configuration prevents the residual
current device from working.

ABB | Electrical devices 453

 4 Protection of human beings
4.6 IT System

As represented in Figure 3, the earth fault current in an IT system flows through

the line conductor capacitance to the power supply neutral point. For this
reason, the first earth fault is characterized by such an extremely low current
value to prevent the overcurrent protections from disconnecting; the deriving
touch voltage is very low.
Figure3: Earth fault in IT system
L1
L2
L3
Ik

C3 C2 C1

1SDC010037F0001
Rt
Ik

According to IEC 60364-4, the automatic disconnection of the circuit in case of

the first earth fault is not necessary only if the following condition is fulfilled:

RA · Id ≤ 50 Va.c.
RA · Id ≤ 120 Vd.c.
where:
RA is the sum of the resistance, in ohms, of the earth electrode and protective
conductor for exposed-conductive- parts;
Id is the fault current, in amperes, of the first fault2 of negligible impedance
between a line conductor and an exposed-conductive-part; such value
takes account of the leakage currents and of the total earthing impedance
of the electrical installation.

If this condition is fulfilled, after the fault, the touch voltage on the exposed-
conductive-part will be than 50 V (in alternating current), which is tolerable by
the human body for an indefinite time.
In IT system installations, an insulation monitoring device shall be provided to in-
dicate the presence of an anomalous condition after the occurrence of a fault.
An insulation monitoring device complying with Std. IEC 61557-8 is a device
constantly monitoring the insulation of an electrical installation.
It is aimed at signaling any remarkable reduction of the insulation level of an
installation in order to find the cause of this reduction before a second fault
occurs, thus preventing disconnection of the power supply.

2
This is referred to by the Standard as first fault to earth; the occurrence of two simultaneous faults on
two different phases is called double fault to earth.

454 Electrical devices | ABB

 4.6 IT System

4 Protection of human beings

indicate the occurrence of a first earth fault; in the event of a second fault, the
supply shall be disconnected according to the following modalities:

a) where exposed conductive parts are earthed in groups or individually, the

conditions for protection are the same as for TT systems:
where the exposed-conductive-parts are earthed in groups or individually,
the following condition shall be fulfilled:

RA · Ia ≤ 50V
where:
RA is the sum of the resistance of the earth electrode and of the protective
conductor for the exposed-conductive-parts;
Ia is the current causing automatic disconnection of the protective device in
a time complying with that for TT systems;

b) where exposed conductive parts are interconnected by a protective con-

ductor collectively earthed, the conditions of a TN system apply; in particular,
the following conditions shall be fulfilled:
if the neutral is not distributed:
U
Zs ≤
2·Ia
if the neutral is distributed:
U0
Z’s ≤
where: 2·Ia
U0 is the nominal voltage between line conductor and neutral conductor;
U is the nominal voltage between line conductors;
Zs is the impedance of the fault loop comprising the line conductor and the
protective conductor of the circuit;
Z’s is the impedance of the fault loop comprising the neutral conductor and
the protective conductor of the circuit;
Ia is the current causing operation of the protective device within the time
required for TN systems.
The Standard suggests not to distribute the neutral conductor in IT systems.
One of the reasons is the real difficulty in fulfilling the condition prescribed for
the impedance of the double fault loop Z’s. As a matter of fact, in the presence
of a neutral conductor distributed, the impedance must be 58% smaller than
the impedance Zs, which is verified in the event of a double fault between the
phases; in this way, it becomes evident that there is a greater difficulty in the
co-ordination with the automatic disconnection device which must trip to provide
protection against indirect contact.
Moreover, above all for quite complex industrial installations, the presence of the
neutral distributed may involve the risk of an accidental connection of it at any
point to earth, thus eliminating the advantages offered by IT systems.

The residual current device threshold shall be carefully chosen in order to avoid
unwanted tripping, due also to the particular path followed by the first fault
current through the line conductor capacitance to the power supply neutral
point (instead of the faulted line, another sound line with higher capacitance
could be affected by a higher fault current value).

ABB | Electrical devices 455

 4 Protection of human beings
4.7 Residual current devices (RCDs)

Generalities on residual current circuit-breakers

The operating principle of the residual current release is basically the detection
of an earth fault current, by means of a toroid transformer which embraces all
the live conductors, included the neutral if distributed.

Figure 1: Operating principle of the residual current device

L N

1SDC010041F0001
In absence of an earth fault, the vectorial sum of the currents I∆ is equal to zero;
in case of an earth fault if the I∆ value exceeds the rated residual operating current
I∆n, the circuit at the secondary side of the toroid sends a command signal to a
dedicated opening coil causing the tripping of the circuit-breaker.
A first classification of RCDs can be made according to the type of the fault
current they can detect:
- AC type: the tripping is ensured for residual sinusoidal alternating currents,
whether suddenly applied or slowly rising;
- A type: tripping is ensured for residual sinusoidal alternating currents and
residual pulsating direct currents, whether suddenly applied or slowly rising;
- B type: tripping is ensured for residual direct currents, for residual sinusoidal
alternating currents and residual pulsating direct currents, whether suddenly
applied or slowly rising.

Another classification referred to the operating time delay is:

- undelayed type;
- time delayed S-type.

456 Electrical devices | ABB

 4.7 Resiual current devices (RCDs)

4 Protection of human beings

RCDs can be coupled, or not, with other devices; it is possible to distinguish
among:
- pure residual current circuit-breakers (RCCBs): they have only the residual
current release and can protect only against earth fault. They must be coupled
with thermomagnetic circuit-breakers or fuses, for the protection against
thermal and dynamical stresses;
- residual current circuit-breakers with overcurrent protection (RCBOs): they
are the combination of a thermomagnetic circuit-breaker and a RCD; for this
reason, they provide the protection against both overcurrents as well as earth
fault current;
- residual current circuit-breakers with external toroid: they are used in industrial
plants with high currents. They are composed by a release connected to an
external toroid with a winding for the detection of the residual current; in case
of earth fault, a signal commands the opening mechanism of a circuit-breaker
or a line contactor.
Given I∆n the operating residual current, a very important parameter for residual
current devices is the residual non-operating current, which represents the
maximum value of the residual current which does not cause the circuit-breaker
trip; it is equal to 0.5 I∆n. Therefore, it is possible to conclude that:
- for I∆ < 0.5⋅I∆n the RCD shall not operate;
- for 0.5⋅I∆n < I∆ < I∆n the RCD could operate;
- for I∆ > I∆n the RCD shall operate.
For the choice of the rated operating residual current, it is necessary to consider,
in addition to the coordination with the earthing system, also the whole of the
leakage currents in the plant; their vectorial sums on each phase shall not be
greater than 0.5⋅I∆n in order to avoid unwanted tripping.

Discrimination between RCDs

The Standard IEC 60364-5-53 states that discrimination between residual cur-
rent protective devices installed in series may be required for service reasons,
particularly when safety is involved, to provide continuity of supply to the parts
of the installation not involved by the fault, if any. This discrimination can be
achieved by selecting and installing RCDs in order to provide the disconnection
from the supply by the RCD closest to the fault.
There are two types of discrimination between RCDs:
- horizontal discrimination: it provides the protection of each line by using a
dedicated residual current circuit-breaker; in this way, in case of earth fault,
only the faulted line is disconnected, since the other RCDs do not detect any
fault current. However, it is necessary to provide protective measures against
indirect contacts in the part of the switchboard and of the plant upstream the
RCD;
- vertical discrimination: it is realized by using RCDs connected in series.

Figure 2: Horizontal discrimination between RCDs

I∆ 0.3 A I∆ 0.3 A
I∆ t 0.5 s I∆ t 0.5 s

ABB | Electrical devices 457

 4.7 Resiual current devices (RCDs)

4 Protection of human beings

Figure 3: Vertical discrimination between RCDs

According to IEC 60364-5-53, to ensure discrimination between two residual

current protective devices in series, these devices shall satisfy both the following
conditions:
- the non-actuating time-current characteristic of the residual current protective
device located on the supply side (upstream) shall lie above the total operating
time-current characteristic of the residual current protective device located on
the load side (downstream);
- the rated residual operating current on the device located on the supply side
shall be higher than that of the residual current protective device located on
the load side.

The non-actuating time-current characteristic is the curve reporting the

maximum time value during which a residual current greater than the residual
non-operating current (equal to 0.5.I∆n) involves the residual current circuit-
breaker without causing the tripping.
As a conclusion, discrimination between two RCDs connected in series can
be achieved:
- for S type residual current circuit-breakers, located on the supply side, (com-
plying with IEC 61008-1 and IEC 61009), time-delayed type, by choosing
general type circuit-breakers located downstream with I∆n equal to one third
of I∆n of the upstream ones;
- for electronic residual current releases by choosing the upstream device with
time and current thresholds directly greater than the downstream device,
keeping carefully into consideration the tolerances.
For the protection against indirect contacts in distribution circuits in TT system,
the maximum disconnecting time at I∆n shall not exceed 1 s (IEC 60364-4-41,
par. 411.3.2.4)

458 Electrical devices | ABB

 4 Protection of human beings
4.8 Maximum protected length for the
protection of human beings

As described in the previous chapters, the Standards give indications about

the maximum disconnecting time for the protective devices, in order to avoid
pathophysiological effects for people touching live parts.
For the protection against indirect contact, it shall be verified that the circuit-
breaker trips within a time lower than the maximum time stated by the Standard;
this verification is carried out by comparing the minimum short-circuit current
of the exposed conductive part to be protected with the operating current
corresponding to the time stated by the Standard.
The minimum short-circuit current occurs when there is a short-circuit between
the phase and the protective conductors at the farthest point on the protected
conductor.
For the calculation of the minimum short-circuit current, an approximate method
can be used, assuming that:
- a 50 % increasing of the conductors resistance, with respect to the 20 °C
value, is accepted, due to the overheating caused by the short-circuit
current;
- a 80 % reduction of the supply voltage is considered as effect of the
short-circuit current;
- the conductor reactance is considered only for cross sections larger than
95 mm2.
The formula below is obtained by applying Ohm’s law between the protective
device and the fault point.

Legend of the symbols and constants of the formula:

- 0.8 is the coefficient representing the reduction of the voltage;
- 1.5 is the coefficient representing the increasing in the resistance;
- Ur is the rated voltage between phases;
- U0 is the rated voltage between phase and ground;
- S is the phase conductor cross section;
- SN is the neutral conductor cross section;
- SPE is the protection conductor cross section;
- ρ is the conductor resistivity at 20 °C;
- L is the length of the cable;

- is the ratio between the total phase conductor cross section

(single phase conductor cross section S multiplied by n, number of
conductors in parallel) and the protective conductor cross section SPE
assuming they are made of the same conductor material;

- is the ratio between the total neutral conductor cross

section (single neutral conductor cross section SN multiplied by n, number
of conductors in parallel) and the protective conductor cross section SPE
assuming they are made of the same conductor material;
- k1 is the correction factor which takes into account the reactance of cables
with cross section larger than 95 mm2, obtainable from the following
table:

Phase conductor cross section
[mm2] 120 150 185 240 300
k1 0.90 0.85 0.80 0.75 0.72

ABB | Electrical devices 459

 4.8 Maximum protected length for the protection of human beings

4 Protection of human beings

- k2 is the correction factor for conductors in parallel, obtainable by the
following formula:

where n is the number of conductor in parallel per phase;

- 1.2 is the magnetic threshold tolerance allowed by the Standard.

TN system
The formula for the evaluation of the minimum short circuit current is:

and consequently:

Dy
L1
L2
L3
N
PE

PE PE

Ik N L3 L2 L1
1SDC010043F0001

REN

IT system
The formulas below are valid when a second fault turns the IT system into a
TN system.
It is necessary to separately examine installations with neutral not distributed
and neutral distributed.

460 Electrical devices | ABB

 4.8 Maximum protected length for the protection of human beings

4 Protection of human beings

Neutral not distributed
When a second fault occurs, the formula becomes:

and consequently:

Dy
L1
L2
L3

PE

PE PE
Z
Ik L3 L2 L1 Ik L3 L2 L1

1SDC010044F0001
PE

REN

Neutral distributed
Case A: three-phase circuits in IT system with neutral distributed
The formula is:

and consequently:

Case B: three-phase + neutral circuits in IT system with neutral distributed

The formula is:

and consequently:

ABB | Electrical devices 461

 4.8 Maximum protected length for the protection of human beings

4 Protection of human beings

Dy
L1
L2
L3
N
PE

PE PE
Z
Ik L3 L2 L1 Ik N L3 L2 L1

1SDC010045F0001
PE

REN A B

Note for the use of the tables

The tables showing the maximum protected length (MPL) have been defined
considering the following conditions:
- one cable per phase;
- rated voltage equal to 400 V (three-phase system);
- copper cables;
- neutral not distributed, for IT system only;
- protective conductor cross section according to Table 1:

Table 1: Protective conductor cross section

Phase conductor cross section S Protective conductor cross section SPE
[mm2] [mm2]
S ≤ 16 S
16 < S ≤ 35 16
S > 35 S/2
Note: phase and protective conductors having the same isolation and conductive materials

Whenever the S function (delayed short-circuit) of electronic releases is used

for the definition of the maximum protected length, it is necessary to verify that
the tripping time is lower than the time value reported in Chapter 4.5 Table 1
for TN systems and in Chapter 4.6 Table 1 for IT systems.

For conditions different from the reference ones, the following correction factors
shall be applied.

462 Electrical devices | ABB

 4.8 Maximum protected length for the protection of human beings

4 Protection of human beings

Correction factors
Correction factor for cable in parallel per phase: the value of the maximum
protected length read in Table 2 (TN system) or Table 3 (IT system) shall be
multiplied by the following factor:

n 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
kp 2 2.7 3 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5
n is the number of conductors in parallel per phase

Correction factor for three-phase voltage different from 400 V: the value of
the maximum protected length read in Table 2 (TN system) or Table 3 (IT system)
shall be multiplied by the following factor:

voltage [V] 230 400 440 500 690

kV 0.58 1 1.1 1.25 1.73

For 230 V single-phase systems, no correction factor is necessary.

Correction factor for aluminium cables: the value of the maximum protected
length read in Table 2 (TN system) or Table 3 (IT system) shall be multiplied by
the following factor:

kAl 0.64

Correction factor for protective conductor cross section SPE different

from the cross sections stated in Table 1: the value of the maximum pro-
tected length shall be multiplied by the coefficient corresponding to the phase
conductor cross section and to the ratio between the protective conductor (PE)
and the phase cross sections:

SPE/S 0.5 0.55 0.6 0.66 0.75 0.87 1 1.25 1.5 2

S kPE
≤16 mm2 0.67 0.71 0.75 0.80 0.86 0.93 1.00 1.11 1.20 1.33
25 mm2 0.85 0.91 0.96 1.02 1.10 1.19 1.28 1.42 1.54 1.71
35 mm2 1.06 1.13 1.20 1.27 1.37 1.48 1.59 1.77 1.91 2.13
>35 mm2 1.00 1.06 1.13 1.2 1.29 1.39 1.5 1.67 1.8 2.00

Correction factor for neutral distributed in IT systems (for Table 3 only):

the value of the maximum protected length shall be multiplied by 0.58.

ABB | Electrical devices 463

 5 Photovoltaic plants
5.1 Operating principle
A photovoltaic (PV) plant transforms directly and instantaneously solar energy
into electrical energy without using any fuels. As a matter of fact, the photo-
voltaic (PV) technology exploits the photoelectric effect, through which some
semiconductors suitably “doped” generate electricity when exposed to solar
radiation.
The main advantages of photovoltaic (PV) plants can be summarized as fol-
lows:
• distribuited generation where needed;
• no emission of polluting materials;
• saving of fossil fuels;
• reliability of the plants since they do not have moving parts (useful life
usually over 20 years);
• reduced operating and maintenance costs;
• system modularity (to increase the plant power it is sufficient to raise the
number of panels) according to the real requirements of users.
However, the initial cost for the development of a PV plant is quite high due to a
market which has not reached its full maturity from a technical and economical
point of view. Moreover the generation of power is erratic due to the variability
of the solar energy source.
The annual electrical power output of a PV plant depends on different factors.
Among them:
• solar radiation incident on the installation site;
• inclination and orientation of the panels;
• presence or not of shading;
• technical performances of the plant components (mainly modules and
inverters).
The main applications of PV plants are:
1. installations (with storage systems) for users isolated from the grid;
2. installations for users connected to the LV grid;
3. solar PV power plants, usually connected to the MV grid.
Feed-in Tariff incentives are granted only for the applications of type 2 and 3,
in plants with rated power not lower than 1 kW.
A PV plant is essentially constituted by a generator (PV panels), by a supporting
frame to mount the panels on the ground, on a building or on any building
structure, by a system for power control and conditioning, by a possible energy
storage system, by electrical switchboards and switchgear assemblies housing
the switching and protection equipment and by the connection cables.

464 Electrical devices | ABB

 5 Photovoltaic plants
5.2 Main components of a photovoltaic
plants
5.2.1 Photovoltaic generator

The elementary component of a PV generator is the photovoltaic cell where the

conversion of the solar radiation into electric current is carried out.
The cell is constituted by a thin layer of semiconductor material, generally
silicon properly treated, with a thickness of about 0.3 mm and a surface from
100 to 225 cm2.

Silicon, which has four valence electrons (tetravalent), is “doped” by adding tri-
valent atoms (e.g. boron – P doping) on one “layer” and quantities of pentavalent
atoms (e.g. phosphorus – N doping) on the other one. The p-type region has an
excess of holes, whereas the n-type region has an excess of electrons.
In the contact area between the two layers differently doped (P-N junction), the
electrons tend to move from the electron rich half (N) to the electron poor half
(P), thus generating an accumulation of negative charge in the P region. A dual
phenomenon occurs for the electron holes, with an accumulation of positive
charge in the region N. Therefore an electric field is created across the junction
and it opposes the further diffusion of electric charges.
By applying a voltage from the outside, the junction allows the current to flow
in one direction only (diode functioning).

When the cell is exposed to light, due to the photovoltaic effect 1, some electron-
hole couples arise both in the N region as well as in the P region.
The internal electric field allows the excess electrons (derived from the absorption
of the photons from part of the material) to be separated from the holes and
pushes them in opposite directions in relation one to another. As a consequence,
once the electrons have passed the depletion region they cannot move back
since the field prevents them from flowing in the reverse direction.

By connecting the junction with an external conductor, a closed circuit is ob-

tained, in which the current flows from the layer N, having higher potential, to
the layer N, having lower potential, as long as the cell is illuminated.
The silicon region which contributes to supply the current is the area surrounding
the P-N junction; the electric charges form in the far off areas, but there is not
the electric field which makes them move and therefore they recombine.
As a consequence it is important that the PV cell has a great surface: the greater
the surface, the higher the generated current.

1
The photovoltaic effect occurs when an electron in the valence band of a material (gen-
erally a semiconductor) is promoted to the conduction band due to the absorption of
one sufficiently energetic photon (quantum of electromagnetic radiation) incident on the
material. In fact, in the semiconductor materials, as for insulating materials, the valence
electrons cannot move freely, but comparing semiconductor with insulating materials the
energy gap between the valence band and the conduction band (typical of conducting
materials) is small, so that the electrons can easily move to the conduction band when
they receive energy from the outside. Such energy can be supplied by the luminous
radiation, hence the photovoltaic effect.

ABB | Electrical devices 465

 5.2 Main components of a photovoltaic plants

5 Photovoltaic plants
Figure 1 represents the photovoltaic effect and the energy balance showing
the considerable percentage of incident solar energy which is not converted
into electric energy.

Photovoltaic effect
1 Separation of the charge
2 Recombination
3 Transmission
4 Reflection and shading of the front contacts

Negative
electrode
4
N Layer

2 1
P-N region
Positive
contact 1 P layer
3

100% of the incident solar energy

- 3% reflection losses and shading of the front contacts
- 23% photons with high wavelength, with insufficient energy to free
electrons; heat is generated
- 32% photons with short wavelength, with excess energy (transmission)

- 8.5% recombination of the free charge carriers

- 20% electric gradient in the cell, above all in the transition regions
- 0.5% resistance in series, representing the conduction losses
= 13% usable electric energy

Under standard operating conditions (1W/m2 irradiance at a temperature of

25°C) a PV cell generates a current of about 3A with a voltage of 0.5V and a
peak power equal to 1.5-1.7Wp.
On the market there are photovoltaic modules for sale constituted by an as-
sembly of cells.
The most common ones comprise 36 cells in 4 parallel row connected in series,
with an area ranging from 0.5 to 1m2.
Several modules mechanically and electrically connected form a panel, that is a
common structure which can be anchored to the ground or to a building.
Several panels electrically connected in series constitute an array and several
arrays, electrically connected in parallel to generate the required power, con-
stitute the generator or photovoltaic field.

466 Electrical devices | ABB

 5.2 Main components of a photovoltaic plants

5 Photovoltaic plants
5.2.2 Inverter

The power conditioning and control system is constituted by an inverter that

converts direct current to alternating current and controls the quality of the
output power to be delivered to the grid, also by means of an L-C filter inside
the inverter itself.
The transistors, used as static switches, are controlled by an opening-closing
signal which, in the simplest mode, would result in an output square wave-
form.

Principle scheme of a single-phase inverter

+ L

- N

To obtain a waveform as sinusoidal as possible, a more sophisticated tech-

nique – Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) – is used; PWM technique allows a
regulation to be achieved on the frequency as well as on the r.m.s. value of
the output waveform.
The power delivered by a PV generator depends on the point where it operates.
In order to maximize the energy supply by the plant, the generator shall adapt
to the load, so that the operating point always corresponds to the maximum
power point. To this purpose, inside the inverter a controlled chopper called
Maximum Power Point Tracker (MPPT) is used; the MPPT calculates instant
by instant the pair of values “voltage-current” of the generator at which the
maximum available power is produced.
The MPPT systems commercially used identify the maximum power point on
the characteristic curve of the generator by causing, at regular intervals, small
variations of loads which determine deviations of the voltage-current values and
evaluating if the new product I x V is higher or lower then the previous one. In
case of a rise, the load conditions are kept varying in the considered direction.
In the other case, the conditions are modified in the opposite direction.
Due to the characteristics of the required performances the inverters for
stand-alone plants and for grid-connected plants shall have different char-
acteristics:
• in the stand-alone plants the inverters shall be able to supply a voltage
AC side. as constant as possible at the varying of the production of the
generator and of the load demand;
• in the grid-connected plants the inverters shall reproduce, as exactly as
possible, the network voltage and at the same time try to optimize and
maximize the energy output of the PV panels.

ABB | Electrical devices 467

 5 Photovoltaic plants
5.3 Typologies of photovoltaic plants

5.3.1 Stand-alone plants

Stand-alone plants are plants which are not connected to the grid and consist of
PV panels and of a storage system which guarantees electric energy supply also
when lighting is poor or when it is dark. Since the current delivered by the PV
generator is DC power, if the user plant needs AC current an inverter becomes
necessary. Such plants are advantageous from a technical and financial point
of view whenever the electric network is not present or whenever it is not easy
to reach, by replacing motor generator sets.
Besides, in a stand-alone configuration, the PV field is over-dimensioned so
that, during the insolation hours, both the load supply as well as the recharge
of the storing batteries can be guaranteed with a certain safety margin to take
into account the days of poor insolation.
At present the most common applications are used to supply:
• pumping water equipment;
• radio repeaters, weather or seismic observation and data transmission
stations;
• lightning systems;
• systems of signs for roads, harbors and airports;
• service supply in campers;
• advertising installations;
• refuges at high altitudes.

5.3.2 Grid-connected plants

Permanently grid-connected plants draw power from the grid during the hours
when the PV generator cannot produce the energy necessary to satisfy the
needs of the consumer.
On the contrary, if the PV system produces excess electric power, the surplus
is put into the grid, which therefore can operate as a big accumulator: as a
consequence, grid-connected systems don’t need accumulator banks.
These plants offer the advantage of distributed - instead of centralized – gene-
ration: in fact the energy produced near the consumption area has a value higher
than that produced in traditional large power plants, because the transmission
losses are limited and the expenses of the big transport and dispatch electric
systems are reduced. In addition, the energy production in the insolation hours
allows the requirements to the grid to be reduced during the day, that is when
the demand is higher.

468 Electrical devices | ABB

 5 Photovoltaic plants
5.4 Earthing and protection against
indirect contact
The concept of earthing applied to a photovoltaic (PV) system may involve both
the exposed conductive parts (e.g. metal frame of the panels) as well as the
generation power system (live parts of the PV system e.g. the cells).
A PV system can be earthed only if it is galvanically separated (e.g. by means
of a transformer) from the electrical network by means of a transformer. A PV
insulated system could seem apparently safer for the people touching a live
part; as a matter of fact, the insulation resistance to earth of the live parts is not
infinite and then person is passed through by a current returning through such
resistance. This current rises when the voltage to earth of the plant and the
plant size increase since the insulation resistance to earth decreases. Besides,
the physiological decay of the insulators, due to the passage of time and the
presence of humidity, reduces the insulation resistance itself. Consequently, in
very big plants, the current passing through a person in touch with the live part
may cause electrocution and therefore the advantage over the earthed systems
is present only in case of small plants.

5.4.1 Plants with transformer

In the plants with transformer, in addition to the analysis of the PV system either
insulated or earthed, for the protection against indirect contacts it is necessary
to make a difference between the exposed conductive parts upstream and
downstream the transformer2.

5.4.1.1 Exposed conductive parts on the load side of the transformer

Plant with IT system

In this type of plant the live parts result insulated from earth, whereas the ex-
posed conductive parts are earthed3 (Figure 2).
Figure 2 A

+ - + - + - B

Id

Load

Re

2
In this case upstream and downstream are referred to the direction of the electric power
produced by the PV plant.
3
For safety reasons the earthing system of the PV plant results to be in common with the
consumer’s one.

ABB | Electrical devices 469

 5.4 Earthing and protection against indirect contact

5 Photovoltaic plants
In this case the earthing resistance Re of the exposed conductive parts shall
meet the condition (CEI 64-8):

120
Re ≤ (1)
Id

where Id is the current of first fault to earth, which is not known in advance, but
which is generally very low in small-sized plants.
As a consequence, the earthing resistance Re of the consumer plant, which is
defined for a fault in the network, usually satisfies only the relation (1).

In case of a double earth fault, since the PV generator is a current generator, the
voltage of the interconnected exposed conductive parts shall be lower than:

Isc . Reqp ≤ 120V (2)

where Isc is the short-circuit current of the cells involved, whereas Reqp is the
resistance of the conductor interconnecting the exposed conductive parts af-
fected by fault. For instance, if Reqp = 1Ω (value approximated by excess), the
relation (2) is fulfilled for Isc not exceeding 120A, which is usual in small-sized
plants; therefore the effective touch voltage in case of a second earth fault does
not result hazardous.
On the contrary, in large-sized plants it is necessary to reduce to acceptable limits
the chance that a second earth fault occurs, by eliminating the first earth fault
detected by the insulation controller (either inside the inverter or external).

Plant with TN system

In this type of plant the live parts and the exposed conductive parts are con-
nected to the same earthing system (earthing system of the consumer’s plant).
Thus a TN system on the DC side is obtained (Figure 3).
Figure 3
A

+ - + - + - B

Id

Load

Re

470 Electrical devices | ABB

 5.4 Earthing and protection against indirect contact

5 Photovoltaic plants
In the presence of an earth fault, a short-circuit occurs as in the usual TN sy-
stems, but such current cannot be detected by the maximum current devices
since the characteristic of the PV plants is the generation of fault currents with
values not much higher than the rated current.
Therefore, as regards the dangerousness of this fault, the considerations made
in the previous paragraph4 on the second fault for an IT system are valid.
4
The Std. IEC 60364-7 recommends that the whole installation on the DC side (switch-
boards, cables, and terminal boards) is erected by use of class II devices or equivalent
insulation.

5.4.1.2 Exposed conductive parts on the supply side of the transformer

Take into consideration the network-consumer system of TT type.

The exposed conductive parts belonging to the consumer’s plant protected by
a residual current circuit-breakers positioned at the beginning of the consumer’s
plant (Figure 4), result protected both towards the network as well as towards
the PV generator.
Figure 4
A

+ - IdPV Idr Grid

Rn

Id

Load

Re

There must not be an exposed conductive part between the parallel point
A-B and the network because in such case the normative requirement that all
the exposed conductive parts of a consumer’s plant in a TT system must be
protected by a residual current circuit-breaker.

ABB | Electrical devices 471

 5.4 Earthing and protection against indirect contact

5 Photovoltaic plants
As regards the exposed conductive parts upstream the parallel point A-B,
such as for instance the exposed conductive part of the transformer or of the
inverter when the transformer is incorporated, a residual current device5 shall be
interposed as Figure 5 shows; this residual current device detects the leakage
currents coming both from the network as well as from the PV generator.
When the residual current device trips due to an earth fault current, the inverter
goes in stand by due to lack of network voltage.

Figure 5

+ - Id Grid
Idr
B

Rn

Re Id

IdPV

Load

5
The rated residual current shall be coordinated with the earth resistance Re, in compliance
with the usual relation of the TT systems: Re ≤ 50
Idn

472 Electrical devices | ABB

 5.4 Earthing and protection against indirect contact

5 Photovoltaic plants
On the contrary, if the network-consumer system is type TN, for both the supply
possibilities, either from the network or from the PV generator, residual current
circuit-breakers are not needed provided that the fault current on the AC side
causes the tripping of the overcurrent devices by the times prescribed in the
Std. (Figure 6).

Figure 6

+ - IdPV Grid
Idr
B

Rn

Load

5.4.2 Plants without transformer

In case of absence of the separation transformer between the PV installation

and the network, the PV installation itself shall be insulated from earth in its
active parts becoming an extension of the supply network, generally with a
point connected to earth (TT or TN system).

As regards the exposed conductive parts of the consumer’s plant and upstre-
am the parallel point A-B, from a conceptual point of view, what described in
clause 6.4.1.2 is still valid.

On the DC side an earth fault on the exposed conductive parts determines

the tripping of the residual current circuit-breaker positioned downstream the
inverter (Figure 7). After the tripping of the residual current device, the inverter
goes in stand by due to the lack of network voltage, but the fault is supplied
by the PV generator. Since the PV system is type IT, the considerations made
in clause 6.4.1.1.1 are valid.

ABB | Electrical devices 473

 5.4 Earthing and protection against indirect contact

5 Photovoltaic plants
For earth faults on the DC side and on the exposed conductive parts upstream
the parallel point A-B, the residual current circuit-breaker on the load side of
the inverter is passed through by a residual current which is not alternating.
Therefore such device must be of type B6, unless the inverter is by construction
such as not to inject DC earth fault currents (IEC 60364-7)7.

Figure 7
IdPV A

Idr
Id Grid
type B

B
+ - + - + -

Rn

Load

Re

6
The residual current device of type B detects the following typologies of earth fault
currents:
• alternating (also at frequency exceeding the network one, e.g. up to 1000 Hz);
• pulsating unidirectional;
• direct.
7
The Std. CEI EN 62040-1 prescribes that the protection of the UPS (including an inverter)
against earth faults is realized by using residual current devices type B (for three-phase
UPS) and type A (for single-phase UPS), whenever an earth fault current with DC com-
ponents may be possible according to the UPS design.

474 Electrical devices | ABB

 5 Photovoltaic plants
5.5 Protectin against overcurrents
and overvoltages
When defining the layout of a photovoltaic plant it is necessary to provide,
where needed, for the protection of the different sections of the plant against
overcurrents and overvoltages of atmospheric origin.
Here are given, at first, the conditions for the protection against overcurrents
in the PV plant on the supply (DC side) and on the load side of the inverter
(AC side), then the methods for the protection of the plant against any damage
caused by possible direct or indirect fulmination8.
5.5.1 Protection against overcurrents on DC side

5.5.1.1 Cable protections

From the point of view of the protection against overloads, it is not necessary to
protect the cables (CEI 64-8/7) if they are chosen with a current carrying capacity
not lower than the maximum current which might affect them (1.25 Isc)9.
9
Isc is the short-circuit current in the module under standard test conditions and the
twenty-five per cent rise takes the insolation values exceeding 1kW/m2 into account.

As regards the short-circuit, the cables on the DC side are affected by such
overcurrent in case of:
• fault between the polarity of the PV system;
• fault to earth in the earthed systems;
• double fault to earth in the earth-insulated systems.

A short-circuit on a cable for the connection string to subfield switchboard

(fault 1 of Figure 8) is supplied simultaneously upstream of the load side of the
string under consideration (Icc1 = 1.25 . Isc) downstream of the other x-1 strings
connected to the same inverter (Icc2 = (x-1) . 1.25 . Isc).

If the PV plant is small-sized with two strings only (x=2), it results that
Icc2 = 1.25 . Isc = Icc1 and therefore it is not necessary to protect the string cables
against short-circuit. On the contrary, when three or more strings (x≥3) are
connected to the inverter, the current Icc2 is higher than the service current and
therefore the cables must be protected against the short-circuit when their
current carrying capacity is lower than Icc2, that is Iz< (x-1) . 1.25 . Isc .

A short-circuit between a subfield switchboard and the inverter switchboard

(fault 2 of the Figure 8) is supplied upstream by the y strings in parallel of the
subfield (Icc3) and downstream by the remaining (x-y) strings relevant to the
same inverter switchboard.
The short-circuit current Icc3 = y . 1.25 . Isc coincides with the service current of
the circuit between the subfield switchboard and inverter, whereas the current
Icc4 = (x-y) . 1.25 . Isc is higher than the service current if x-y > y ⇒ x > 2y.
In this case it is necessary to protect the cable against the short-circuit if its
current carrying capacity is lower than Isc4, that is Iz<(x-y).1.25.Isc.

8
As regards the power factor correction of a user plant in the presence of a PV plant
see Annex E of the QT8 “Power factor correction and harmonic filtering in electrical
plants”.

ABB | Electrical devices 475

 5.5 Protectin against overcurrents on DC side

5 Photovoltaic plants
Figure 8

+ Cable 1
String Subfield
– switchboard
A

Cable 2
+
y
–

Fault 1 Isc3

Fault 2
Isc1 Isc2

Subfield Isc4
switchboard

parallel point
with the grid
B
+ – +
x
– + –

Inverter
switchboard

+
–

“A” represents the protective device in the subfield switchboard for the protection
of the “cable 1” connecting the string to the switchboard itself.
“B” represents the protection device installed in the inverter switchboard to pro-
tect the “cable 2” for the connection between the inverter and the subfield
switchboard.
“y” number of strings connected to the same subfield switchboard.
“x” total number of strings connected to the same inverter.

476 Electrical devices | ABB

 5.5 Protectin against overcurrents on DC side

5 Photovoltaic plants
5.5.1.2 Protection of the strings against reverse current

Due to shading or fault a string becomes passive, absorbing and dissipating the
electric power generated by the other strings connected in parallel to the same
inverter through a current which flows through the string under consideration
in a reverse direction with respect to that of standard operation, with possible
damages to the modules. These are able to withstand a reverse current ranging
from 2.5 and 3 Isc (IEC TS 62257-7-1).
Since with x strings in parallel connected to the same inverter the highest reverse
current is equal to Iinv = (x-1) . 1.25 . Isc, it is not necessary to protect the strings
Iinv ≤ 2.5 . Isc if that is (x-1) . 1.25 ≤ 2.5 ⇒ x ≤ 310.

5.5.1.3 Behaviour of the inverter

The contribution to the short-circuit on the DC side of the inverter may come
from the grid and from the discharge of the capacitors inside the inverter.
The grid current is due to the recirculating diodes of the bridge inverter which
in this case act as a bridge rectifier. Such current is limited by the impedances
of the transformer and of the inductors belonging to the output circuit and by
the protection fuses of the inverter on the AC side chosen so that they can limit
the thermal effects of possible internal faults on the semiconductors.
As a consequence the I2t passing through will be normally reduced. Indicatively
a final current value (internal capacitors completely discharged) of 10In can be
an upper limit value. This current is present in case of inverter with galvanic
insulation at 50Hz, while it is null in case of inverter without transformer.
In fact these inverters usually have an input DC/DC converter so that the opera-
tion on a wide voltage range of the PV generator is guaranteed; this converter,
due to its constructive typology, includes at least one blocking diodes which
prevents the contribution of the grid current to the short-circuit.
The discharge current of the capacitors is limited by the cables between inverter
and fault and exhausts itself with exponential trend: the lowest the impedance of
the cable stretch, the highest the initial current, but the lowest the time constant
of the discharge. The energy which flows is limited to that one initially stored in
the capacitors. Moreover, if a blocking diode or other similar device is in series
with one of the two poles, this contribution to the short-circuit is null.
In each case, the short-circuit on the DC side causes a drop of the direct voltage,
the inverter certainly shuts down and probably is disconnected from the grid.
Normally the shut down times of the inverter are of the order of some millise-
conds, while the disconnection times may be of the order of some dozens of
milliseconds. In the interval between the shut down and the disconnection, the
grid might cause the above mentioned effect, while the internal capacitors, if
involved, participate up to their complete discharge.

The blocking diodes can be used, but they do not replace the protections against
10

overcurrent (IEC TS 62257-7-1), since it is taken into consideration the possibility that
the blocking diode does not work properly and is short-circuited. Moreover the diodes
introduce a loss of power due to the voltage drop on the junction, a loss which can be
reduced by using Schottky diodes with 0.4V drop instead of 0.7V of conventional diodes.
However the rated reverse voltage of the diodes shall be ≥ 2 Uoc and the rated current
≥ 1.25 Isc (CEI Guide 82-25).

ABB | Electrical devices 477

 5.5 Protectin against overcurrents on DC side

5 Photovoltaic plants
However, the influences of both the grid and the internal capacitors on the
short-circuit have only a transient nature and they are not such as to affect
the sizing of the protection, switching and disconnection devices position on
the DC side.

5.5.1.4 Choice of the protective devices

As regards the protection against the short-circuits on the DC side, the devices
shall be obviously suitable for DC use and have a rated service voltage Ue equal
or higher than the maximum voltage of the PV generator which is equal to 1.2
Uoc11 (IEC TS 62257-7-1).
Moreover the protection devices shall be positioned at the end of the circuit to
be protected, proceeding from the strings towards the inverter, that is in the
various subfield switchboards and inverter switchboards since the short-circuit
currents come from the other strings, that is from the load side and not from
the supply side (IEC TS 62257-7-1).

In order to avoid unwanted tripping under standard operation conditions, the pro-
tective devices positioned in the subfield switchboards (device A in the Figure 8)
shall have a rated current In12:

In ≥ 1.25 . Isc (3)

These devices shall protect:

• every single string against the reverse current;
• the connection cable13 string to subswitchboard (cable 1 of Figure 6.7) if
the latter has a current carrying capacity lower than the maximum short-
circuit current of the other x-1 strings connected to the same inverter
switchboard14, i.e. if:

Iz < Icc2 = (x - 1) . 1.25 . Isc (4)

To the purpose of protection for the string, the rated current of the protective
device (either thermomagnetic circuit-breaker or fuse) must not exceed that
one declared by the manufacturer for the panel protection (clause 6.5.1.2); if
no indications are given by the manufacturer, the following is assumed (IEC
TS 62257-7-1):

1.25 . Isc ≤ In ≤ 2 . Isc (5)

11
Uoc is the no load voltage coming out of the strings.
12
For thermomagnetic circuit-breakers the [6.1] becomes I1 ≥ 1.25 . Isc, while for magnetic
only circuit-breakers Iu ≥ 1.25 . Isc so that their overheating can be avoided.
13
Protection against short-circuit only since Iz ≥ 1.25 . Isc.
14
The short-circuit Icc1 = 1.25 . Isc(Figure 6.1) is unimportant because the string cable has
a current carrying capacity not lower than 1.25 . Isc.

478 Electrical devices | ABB

 5.5 Protectin against overcurrents on DC side

5 Photovoltaic plants
To the purpose of protection for the connection cable, the protective device
must be chosen so that the following relation is satisfied for each value of short-
circuit (IEC 60364)15 up to a maximum of (x-1) . 1.25 . Isc:

I2t ≤ K2 S2 (6)

The breaking capacity of the device must not be lower than the short-circuit
current of the other n-1 strings, that is:

Icu ≥ (x-1) . 1.25 . Isc (7)

The devices in the inverter switchboard must protect against the short-circuit the
connection cables subfield switchboard-inverter switchboard when these cables
have a current carrying capacity lower than Icc4 = (x-y) . 1.25 . Isc (Figure 8).
In this case these devices shall satisfy the relations (3) and (6), while their current
carrying capacity shall not be lower than the short-circuit current of the other
n-m strings, that is:

Icu ≥ (x-y) . 1.25 . Isc (8)

In short, the cable for the connection inverter switchboard to inverter must not
be protected if its current carrying capacity is chosen at least equal to (CEI
64-8/7):

Icu ≥ (x-y) . 1.25 . Isc (9)

15
For the magnetic only circuit-breaker it is necessary, if possible, to set I3 at a value equal
to the value Iz of the cable in order to determine the tripping of the device when the short
circuit current exceeds the current carrying capacity of the protected cable. Besides, it
is possible to use a magnetic only circuit-breaker if the number of strings connected to
the same inverter is maximum 3; otherwise for the protection of the string it is necessary
to use a thermomagnetic circuit-breaker chosen according to (5).
16
The short-circuit current Isc3 = y . 1.25 . Isc (Figure 8) is unimportant since the string cable
has a current carrying capacity not lower than y . 1.25 . Isc.

ABB | Electrical devices 479

 5.5 Protectin against overcurrents on DC side

5 Photovoltaic plants
5.5.2 Protection against overcurrents on AC side

Since the cable connecting the inverter to the point of connection with the grid
is usually dimensioned to obtain a current carrying capacity higher than the
maximum current which the inverter can deliver, a protection against overload
is not needed. However the cable must be protected against a short circuit
supplied by the grid17 through a protective device positioned near the point of
connection with the grid.
To protect such cable the main circuit-breaker of the consumer plant can be
used if the specific let-through energy is withstood by the cable. However, the trip
of the main circuit-breaker put all the consumer plant out of service. In the multi-
inverter plants, (Figure 9) the presence of one protection for each line allows, in
case of fault on an inverter, the functioning of the other ones, provided that the
circuit-breakers on each line are selective with the main circuit-breaker.

Figure 9

Point of
parallel with
the grid

17
Generally, the inverter limits the output current to a value which is the double of its rated
current and goes in stand-by in few tenths of seconds due to the trip of the internal
protection. As a consequence, the contribution of the inverter to the short-circuit current
is negligible in comparison with the contribution of the grid.

480 Electrical devices | ABB

 5.5 Protectin against overcurrents on DC side

5 Photovoltaic plants
5.5.3 Choice of the switching and disconnecting devices

The installation of a disconnecting device on each string is suitable in order to

allow verification or maintenance interventions on the string without putting out
of service other parts of the PV plant (CEI Guide 82-25 II ed.)18.
The disconnection of the inverter must be possible both on the DC side as well
as on the AC side so that maintenance is allowed by excluding both the supply
sources (grid and PV generator) (CEI 64-8/7).
On the DC side of the inverter a disconnecting device shall be installed which
can be switched under load, such as a switch-disconnector. On the AC side
a general disconnecting device shall be provided.
The protective device installed in the point of connection with the grid can
be used; if this device is not close to the inverter, it is advisable to position a
disconnecting device immediately on the load side of the inverter.

5.5.4 Protection against overvoltages

The PV installations, since they usually are outside the buildings, may be subject
to overvoltages of atmospheric origin, both direct (lightning striking the structure)
as well as indirect (lightning falling near to the structure of the building or affecting
the energy or signaling lines entering the structure) through resistive or inductive
coupling. The resistive coupling occurs when lightning strikes the electrical line
entering the building. The lightning current, through the characteristic impedance
of the line, originates an overvoltage which may exceed the impulse withstand
voltage of the equipment, with consequent damaging and fire hazard.
The inductive coupling occurs because the lightning current is impulsive and
therefore it generates in the surrounding space an electromagnetic field highly
variable.
As a consequence, the variation in the magnetic field generates some over-
voltages induced on the electric circuits nearby. In addition to the overvoltages
of atmospheric origin, the PV plant may be exposed to internal switching
overvoltages.

5.5.4.1 Direct lightning

Building without LPS19

Generally, the erection of a PV plant does not change the outline of a building
and therefore the frequency of the fulminations; therefore no specific measures
against the risk of fulmination are necessary (CEI Guide 82-25,II ed.).
On the contrary, in case the PV installation changes significantly the outline of
the building, it is necessary to reconsider the frequency of fulminations on it
and consequently to take into consideration the necessity of realizing an LPS
(CEI Guide 82-25 II ed.).

18
When an automatic circuit-breaker is used the switching and disconnecting function is
already included.
19
Lightning Protection System: it is constituted by the protective systems both external
(detectors, lightning conductors and ground electrodes) as well as internal (protective
measures in order to reduce the electromagnetic effects of the lightning current entering
the structure to be protected).

ABB | Electrical devices 481

 5.5 Protectin against overcurrents on DC side

5 Photovoltaic plants
Building with LPS
In case of presence of a protection system against atmospheric discharges20,
if the PV plant does not alter the outline of the building and if the minimum
distance d between the PV plant and the LPS plant is higher than the safety
distances (EN 62305-3) other additional measures for the protection of the new
plant (CEI Guide 82-25 II ed.) are not required.
On the contrary, if the PV plant does not alter the outline of the building, but
the minimum distance d is lower than the distance s it is appropriate to extend
the LPS plant and connect it to the metal structures of the PV installation (CEI
Guide 82-25, II ed.).
Finally, if the PV plant alters the outline of the building a new risk evaluation and/
or a modification of the LPS are necessary (CEI Guide 82-25, II ed.).

PV plant on the ground

If a PV plant is erected on the ground there is no fire risk due to direct fulmi-
nation and the only hazard for human beings is represented by the step and
touch voltages.
When the surface resistivity exceeds 5 kΩm (e.g. rocky asphalted ground, at
least 5 cm thickness or laid with gravel for minimum 15 cm), it is not necessary
to take any particular measure since the touch and step voltage values are ne-
gligible (CEI 81-10). Instead, if the ground resistivity were equal to or lower than
5 kΩm, it would be necessary to verify theoretically whether some protective
measures against the step and touch voltages are necessary; however, in this
case, the probability of lightning strikes is very small and therefore the problem
occurs only with very large plants.

Indirect lightning
Also in case lightning does not strike directly the structure of the PV plant, it is
necessary to take some measures to minimize the overvoltages caused by any
likely indirect strike of lightning:
• shielding of the circuits in order to reduce the magnetic field inside the
enclosure with a consequent reduction of the induced overvoltages21;
• reduction of the area of the turn of the induced circuit obtained by connect-
ing suitably the modules one to the other, by twisting the conductors to-
gether and bringing the live conductor as much as possible near to the PE.

20
It is advisable that the protection grounding plant is connected to that for the protection
against lightning.
21
The shielding effect of a metal enclosure originates thanks to the currents induced in
the enclosure itself; they create a magnetic field which by Lenz’s law opposes the cause
generating them, that is the magnetic field of the lightning current; the higher the currents
induced in the shield (i.e. the higher its conductance), the better the shielding effect.

482 Electrical devices | ABB

 5.5 Protectin against overcurrents on DC side

5 Photovoltaic plants
The overvoltages, even if limited, which may be generated must be dischargedto
ground by means of SPD (Surge Protective Device) to protect the equipment.
In fact, SPDs are devices with impedance variable according to the voltage
applied: at the rated voltage of the plant they have a very high impedance,
whereas in the presence of an overvoltage they reduce their impedance, de-
riving the current associated to the overvoltage and keeping the latter within
a determined range of values. According to their operation modalities SPDs
can be divided into:
• switching SPDs, such as spinterometers or controlled diodes, when the
voltage exceeds a defined value, reduce instantaneously their impedance
and consequently the voltage at their ends;
• limitation SPDs, such as varistors or Zener diodes, have an impedance
which decreases gradually at the increase of the voltage at their ends;
• combined SPDs which comprise the two above mentioned devices
connected in series or in parallel.

Protection on DC side
For the protection on the DC side it is advisable to use varistors SPDs or com-
bined SPDs. Inverters usually have an internal protection against overvoltages,
but if SPDs are added to the inverter terminals, its protection is improved and at
the same time it is possible to avoid that the tripping of the internal protections
put out of service the inverter, thus causing suspension of energy production
and making necessary the intervention of skilled personnel.
These SPDs should have the following characteristics:
• Type 2
• Maximum rated service voltage Ue > 1.25 Uoc
• Protection level Up ≤ Uinv22
• Nominal discharge current In ≥ 5 kA
• Thermal protection with the capability of estinguishing the short-circuit
current at the end of life and coordination with suitable back-up protec-
tion.
Since the modules of the strings generally have an impulse withstand voltage
higher than that of the inverter, the SPDs installed to protect the inverter generally
allow the protection of the modules too, provided that the distance between
modules and inverter is shorter than 10 m23.

22
Uinv is the impulse withstand voltage of the inverter DC side.
23
The SPD shall be installed on the supply side (direction of the energy of the PV generator)
of the disconnecting device of the inverter so that it protects the modules also when the
disconnecting device is open.

ABB | Electrical devices 483

 5.5 Protectin against overcurrents on DC side

5 Photovoltaic plants
Protection on AC side
A PV plant connected to the grid is subject also to the overvoltages coming
from the line itself. If a separation transformer is present, with earthed metal
shield, the inverter is protected against the overvoltages of the transformer itself.
If the transformer is not present or in case of a transformer without shield, it is
necessary to install a suitable SPD immediately downstream the inverter.
This SPDs should have the following characteristics:
• Type 2
• Maximum rated service voltage Ue > 1.1 Uo24
• Protection level Up ≤ Uinv25
• Nominal discharge current In ≥ 5 kA
• Thermal protection with the capability of estinguishing the short-circuit
current at the end of life and coordination with suitable back-up protec-
tion.
If the risk analysis for the building prescribes the installation of an outside LPS, it
is necessary to position an SPD for the protection against direct lightning at the
power delivery point. Such SPD should have the following characteristics:
• Type 1
• Maximum rated service voltage Ue > 1.1 Uo
• Protection level Up ≤ Uinv
• Impulse current Iimp ≥ 25 kA for each pole
• Extinction of the follow-up current Ifi exceeding the short-circuit current
at the installation point and coordination with a suitable back-up protec-
tion.
24
Uo is the voltage to earth for TT and TN systems; in case of an IT system it is Ue > 1.73 Uo.
25
Uinv is the impulse withstand voltage of the inverter on the AC side.

484 Electrical devices | ABB

 6 Calculation of short-circuit current
6.1 General aspects
A short-circuit is a fault of negligible impedance between live conductors having
a difference in potential under normal operating conditions.

6.2 Fault typologies

In a three-phase circuit the following types of fault may occur:
• three-phase fault;
• two-phase fault;
• phase to neutral fault;
• phase to PE fault.
In the formulas, the following symbols are used:
• Ik short-circuit current;
• Ur rated voltage;
• ZL phase conductor impedance;
• ZN neutral conductor impedance;
• ZPE protective conductor impedance.
The following table briefly shows the type of fault and the relationships between
the value of the short-circuit current for a symmetrical fault (three phase) and
the short-circuit current for asymmetrical faults (two phase and single phase)
in case of faults far from generators.

Three-phase fault
ZL IkLLL

ZL IkLLL

ZL IkLLL

ZN

Two-phase fault
ZL

ZL

ZL IkLL

ZN

ABB | Electrical devices 485

 6.2 Fault typologies

6 Calculation of short-circuit current

Phase to neutral fault

ZL

ZL

ZL

ZN IkLN

Phase to PE fault
ZL

ZL

ZL

ZPE IkLPE

The following table allows the approximate value of a short-circuit current to

be found quickly.

Three-phase Two-phase Phase to neutral Phase to PE short-circuit

Note short-circuit short-circuit short-circuit (TN system)

IkLLL IkLL IkLN IkLPE

ILN=0.5IkLLL (ZL = ZN) ILPE=0.5IkLLL (ZL = ZPE)
IkLLL - IkLL=0.87IkLLL ILN=0.33IkLLL (ZL = 0,5ZN) ILPE=0.33IkLLL (ZL = 0.5ZPE)
ILN=IkLLL (ZN ≅ 0) ILPE=IkLLL (ZPE ≅ 0)
IkLN=0.58IkLL (ZL = ZN) IkLPE=0.58IkLL (ZL = ZPE)
IkLL IkLLL=1.16IkLL - IkLN=0.38IkLL (ZL = 0,5ZN) IkLPE=0.38IkLL (ZL = 0.5ZPE)
IkLN=1.16IkLL (ZN ≅ 0) IkLPE=1.16IkLL (ZPE ≅ 0)
IkLLL=2IkLN (ZL = ZN) IkLL=1.73IkLN (ZL = ZN)
IkLN IkLLL=3IkLN (ZL = 0,5ZN) IkLL=2.6IkLN (ZL = 0,5ZN) -
IkLLL=IkLN (ZN ≅ 0) IkLL=0.87IkLN (ZN ≅ 0)

486 Electrical devices | ABB

 6 Calculation of short-circuit current
6.3 Determination of the short-circuit
current: “short-circuit power method”

The short-circuit current can be determined by using the “short-circuit power

method”. This method allows the determination of the approximate short-circuit
current at a point in an installation in a simple way; the resultant value is generally
acceptable. However, this method is not conservative and gives more accurate
values, the more similar the power factors of the considered components are
(network, generators, transformers, motors and large section cables etc.).
The “short-circuit power method” calculates the short-circuit current Ik based
on the formula:

Three-phase short-circuit

Two-phase short-circuit

where:
• Sk is the short-circuit apparent power seen at the point of the fault;
• Ur is the rated voltage.

To determine the short-circuit apparent power Sk, all the elements of the network
shall be taken into account, which may be:
• elements which contribute to the short-circuit current:
network, generators, motors;
• elements which limit the value of the short-circuit current:
conductors and transformers.

The procedure for the calculation of the short-circuit current involves the
following steps:
1. calculation of the short-circuit power for the different elements of the
installation;
2. calculation of the short-circuit power at the fault point;
3. calculation of the short-circuit current.

6.3.1 Calculation of the short-circuit power for the different elements of the
installation

The short-circuit apparent power Sk shall be determined for all the components
which are part of the installation:

Network
An electrical network is considered to include everything upstream of the point
of energy supply.

ABB | Electrical devices 487

 6.3 Determination of the short-circuit current: “short-circuit power method”

6 Calculation of short-circuit current

Generally, the energy distribution authority supplies the short-circuit apparent

power (Sknet) value at the point of energy supply. However, if the value of the
short-circuit current Iknet is known, the value of the power can be obtained by
using, for three-phase systems, the following formula:

where Ur is the rated voltage at the point of energy supply.

If the aforementioned data are not available, the values for Sknet given in the
following table can be taken as reference values:

Net voltage Ur [kV] Short-circuit power Sknet [MVA]

Up to 20 500
Up to 32 750
Up to 63 1000

Generator
The short-circuit power is obtained from:
⋅

where X*d% is the percentage value of the subtransient reactance (Xd”) or of the
transient reactance (Xd’) or of the synchronous reactance (Xd), according to the
instant in which the value of the short-circuit power is to be evaluated.
In general, the reactances are expressed in percentages of the rated impedance
of the generator (Zd) given by:

where Ur and Sr are the rated voltage and power of the generator.
Typical values can be:
- Xd” from 10 % to 20 %;
- Xd’ from 15 % to 40 %;
- Xd from 80 % to 300 %.
Normally, the worst case is considered, that being the subtransient reactance.
The following table gives the approximate values of the short-circuit power of
generators (Xd” = 12.5 %):

Sr [kVA] 50 63 125 160 200 250 320 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000
Skgen [MVA] 0.4 0.5 1.0 1.3 1.6 2.0 2.6 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.4 8.0 10.0 12.8 16.0 20.0 25.6 32.0

488 Electrical devices | ABB

 6.3 Determination of the short-circuit current: “short-circuit power method”

6 Calculation of short-circuit current

Asynchronous three-phase motors

Under short-circuit conditions, electric motors contribute to the fault for a brief
period (5-6 periods).
The power can be calculated according to the short-circuit current of the motor
(Ik), by using the following expression:

Typical values are:

Skmot= 5÷7 Srmot
(Ik is about 5÷7 Irmot: 5 for motors of small size, and 7 for larger motors).

Transformers
The short-circuit power of a transformer (Sktrafo) can be calculated by using the
following formula:

The following table gives the approximate values of the short-circuit power of
transformers:

Sr [kVA] 50 63 125 160 200 250 320 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000
uk% 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6
Sktrafo [MVA] 1.3 1.6 3.1 4 5 6.3 8 10 12.5 15.8 16 20 25 26.7 33.3

Cables
A good approximation of the short-circuit power of cables is:

where the impedance of the cable (Zc) is:

The following table gives the approximate values of the short-circuit power of
cables, at 50 and 60 Hz, according to the supply voltage (cable length = 10 m):

ABB | Electrical devices 489

 6.3 Determination of the short-circuit current: “short-circuit power method”

6 Calculation of short-circuit current

230 [V] 400 [V] 440 [V] 500 [V] 690 [V] 230 [V] 400 [V] 440 [V] 500 [V] 690 [V]
S [mm ] Skcable [MVA] @50 Hz Skcable [MVA] @60 Hz
2

1.5 0.44 1.32 1.60 2.07 3.94 0.44 1.32 1.60 2.07 3.94
2.5 0.73 2.20 2.66 3.44 6.55 0.73 2.20 2.66 3.44 6.55
4 1.16 3.52 4.26 5.50 10.47 1.16 3.52 4.26 5.50 10.47
6 1.75 5.29 6.40 8.26 15.74 1.75 5.29 6.40 8.26 15.73
10 2.9 8.8 10.6 13.8 26.2 2.9 8.8 10.6 13.7 26.2
16 4.6 14.0 16.9 21.8 41.5 4.6 13.9 16.9 21.8 41.5
25 7.2 21.9 26.5 34.2 65.2 7.2 21.9 26.4 34.1 65.0
35 10.0 30.2 36.6 47.3 90.0 10.0 30.1 36.4 47.0 89.6
50 13.4 40.6 49.1 63.4 120.8 13.3 40.2 48.7 62.9 119.8
70 19.1 57.6 69.8 90.1 171.5 18.8 56.7 68.7 88.7 168.8
95 25.5 77.2 93.4 120.6 229.7 24.8 75.0 90.7 117.2 223.1
120 31.2 94.2 114.0 147.3 280.4 29.9 90.5 109.5 141.5 269.4
150 36.2 109.6 132.6 171.2 326.0 34.3 103.8 125.6 162.2 308.8
185 42.5 128.5 155.5 200.8 382.3 39.5 119.5 144.6 186.7 355.6
240 49.1 148.4 179.5 231.8 441.5 44.5 134.7 163.0 210.4 400.7
300 54.2 164.0 198.4 256.2 488.0 48.3 146.1 176.8 228.3 434.7

With n cables in parallel, it is necessary to multiply the value given in the table
by n. If the length of the cable (Lact) is other than 10 m, it is necessary to multiply
the value given in the table by the following coefficient:

6.3.2 Calculation of the short-circuit power at the fault point

The rule for the determination of the short-circuit power at a point in the
installation, according to the short-circuit power of the various elements of
the circuit, is analogue to that relevant to the calculation of the equivalent
admittance. In particular:
• the power of elements in series is equal to the inverse of the sum of the
inverses of the single powers (as for the parallel of impedances);

• the short-circuit power of elements in parallel is equal to the sum of the single
short-circuit powers (as for the series of impedances).

The elements of the circuit are considered to be in series or parallel, seeing the
circuit from the fault point.
In the case of different branches in parallel, the distribution of the current between
the different branches shall be calculated once the short-circuit current at the
fault point has been calculated. This must be done to ensure the correct choice
of protection devices installed in the branches.

490 Electrical devices | ABB

 6.3 Determination of the short-circuit current: “short-circuit power method”

6 Calculation of short-circuit current

6.3.3 Calculation of the short-circuit current

To determine the short-circuit current in an installation, both the fault point as

well as the configuration of the system which maximize the short-circuit current
involving the device shall be considered. If appropriate, the contribution of the
motors shall be taken into account.
For example, in the case detailed below, for circuit-breaker CB1, the worst
condition occurs when the fault is right upstream of the circuit-breaker itself.
To determine the breaking capacity of the circuit-breaker, the contribution of
two transformers in parallel must be considered.

Fault right downstream of CB1

1SDC010050F0001
CB1 CB2 CB3
Fault

Fault right upstream of CB1

(worst condition for CB1)

Fault

1SDC010051F0001
CB1 CB2 CB3

Once the short-circuit power equivalent at the fault point has been determined,
the short-circuit current can be calculated by using the following formula:

Three-phase short-circuit

Two-phase short-circuit

ABB | Electrical devices 491

 6.3 Determination of the short-circuit current: “short-circuit power method”

6 Calculation of short-circuit current

As a first approximation, by using the following graph, it is possible to evaluate

the three-phase short-circuit current downstream of an object with short-circuit
power (SkEL) known; corresponding to this value, knowing the short-circuit
power upstream of the object (SkUP), the value of Ik can be read on the y-axis,
expressed in kA, at 400 V.

Figure 1: Chart for the calculation of the three-phase short-circuit

current at 400 V

Ik [kA]
150

140
SkUP = 1000 MVA
130
SkUP
SkUP = 750 MVA
120 SkUP = °
SkUP = 500 MVA
110
SkEL
100
SkUP = 250 MVA
90
Ik
80

70
SkUP = 100 MVA
60
SkUP = 50 MVA
50

40
SkUP = 40 MVA
30 SkUP = 30 MVA

20 SkUP = 20 MVA
1SDC010052F0001

10 SkUP = 10 MVA

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 SkEL [MVA]

492 Electrical devices | ABB

 6.3 Determination of the short-circuit current: “short-circuit power method”

6 Calculation of short-circuit current

6.3.4 Examples

The following examples demonstrate the calculation of the short-circuit current

in some different types of installation.

Example 1
U
Upstream network: Ur = 20000 V A
Sknet = 500 MVA

Transformer: Sr = 1600 kVA
uk% = 6%
U1r / U2r =20000/400 CB1

Motor: Pr = 220 kW B
Ikmot/Ir = 6.6 CB2 CB3

1SDC010053F0001
cosϕr = 0.9
η = 0.917

Generic load: IrL= 1443.4 A

cosϕr= 0.9 M L

Calculation of the short-circuit power of different elements

Network: Sknet= 500 MVA

Transformer:

Motor:

Skmot = 6.6.Srmot = 1.76 MVA for the first 5-6 periods (at 50 Hz about 100 ms)

Calculation of the short-circuit current for the selection of circuit-

breakers
Selection of CB1
For circuit-breaker CB1, the worst condition arises when the fault occurs right
downstream of the circuit-breaker itself. In the case of a fault right upstream,
the circuit-breaker would be involved only by the fault current flowing from the
motor, which is remarkably smaller than the network contribution.

ABB | Electrical devices 493

 6.3 Determination of the short-circuit current: “short-circuit power method”

6 Calculation of short-circuit current

The circuit, seen from the fault point, is represented by the series of the network
with the transformer. According to the previous rules, the short-circuit power is
determined by using the following formula:
⋅

the maximum fault current is:

The transformer LV side rated current is equal to 2309 A; therefore the circuit-
breaker to select is an Emax E3N 2500.
Using the chart shown in Figure 1, it is possible to find IkCB1 from the curve with
SkUP = Sknet = 500 MVA corresponding to SkEL = Sktrafo = 26.7 MVA:

Ik [kA]
150

140

130

120

110 SkUP = 500 MVA

100

90

80

70

60

50

40
Ik = 36.5 kA
30
1SDC010054F0001

20

10

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
SkUP = 26.7 MVA SkEL [MVA]

494 Electrical devices | ABB

 6.3 Determination of the short-circuit current: “short-circuit power method”

6 Calculation of short-circuit current

Selection of CB2
For circuit-breaker CB2, the worst condition arises when the fault occurs right
downstream of the circuit-breaker itself. The circuit, seen from the fault point, is
represented by the series of the network with the transformer. The short-circuit
current is the same used for CB1.

The rated current of the motor is equal to 385 A; the circuit-breaker to select
is a Tmax T5H 400.

Selection of CB3
For CB3 too, the worst condition arises when the fault occurs right downstream
of the circuit-breaker itself.
The circuit, seen from the fault point, is represented by two branches in parallel:
the motor and the series of the network and transformer. According to the
previous rules, the short-circuit power is determined by using the following
formula:
Motor // (Network + Transformer)

The rated current of the load L is equal to 1443 A; the circuit-breaker to select
is a Tmax T7S1600 or an Emax X1B1600.

Example 2
The circuit shown in the diagram is constituted by the supply, two transformers
in parallel and three loads.
U
A

Trafo 1 Trafo 2
Upstream network: Ur1=20000 V
Sknet = 500 MVA
CB1 CB2
Transformers 1 and 2: Sr = 1600 kVA
uk% = 6% B
U1r /U2r =20000/400 CB3 CB4 CB5
1SDC010055F0001

Load L1: Sr = 1500 kVA; cosϕ = 0.9;

Load L2: Sr = 1000 kVA; cosϕ = 0.9;
Load L3: Sr = 50 kVA; cosϕ = 0.9.
L1 L2 L3

ABB | Electrical devices 495

 6.3 Determination of the short-circuit current: “short-circuit power method”

6 Calculation of short-circuit current

Calculation of the short-circuit powers of different elements:

Network

Transformers 1 and 2

Selection of CB1 (CB2)
For circuit-breaker CB1 (CB2) the worst condition arises when the fault occurs
right downstream of the circuit-breaker itself. According to the previous rules,
the circuit seen from the fault point, is equivalent to the parallel of the two
transformers in series with the network: Network + (Trafo 1 // Trafo 2).
The short-circuit current obtained in this way corresponds to the short-circuit
current at the busbar. This current, given the symmetry of the circuit, is distributed
equally between the two branches (half each). The current which flows through
CB1 (CB2) is therefore equal to half of that at the busbar.

⋅ +

The circuit-breakers CB1(CB2) to select, with reference to the rated current of

the transformers, are Emax E3N 2500.

Selection of CB3-CB4-CB5
For these circuit-breakers the worst condition arises when the fault occurs right
downstream of the circuit-breakers themselves. Therefore, the short-circuit
current to be taken into account is that at the busbar:

IkCB3 = Ikbusbar = 69.56 kA

The circuit-breakers to select, with reference to the current of the loads, are:
CB3: Emax E3S 2500
CB4: Emax E2S 1600
CB5: Tmax T2H 160

496 Electrical devices | ABB

 6 Calculation of short-circuit current
6.4 Determination of the short-circuit
current Ik downstream of a cable as a
function of the upstream one
The table below allows the determination, in a conservative way, of the three-
phase short-circuit current at a point in a 400 V network downstream of a single
pole copper cable at a temperature of 20 °C. Known values:
- the three-phase short-circuit current upstream of the cable;
- the length and cross section of the cable.
Cable
section Length
[mm2] [m]
1.5 0.9 1.1 1.4 1.8 2.5 3.5 5.3 7 9.4 14
2.5 0.9 1 1.2 1.5 1.8 2.3 2.9 4.1 5.9 8.8 12 16 24
4 0.9 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.9 2.3 2.8 3.7 4.7 6.6 9.4 14 19 25 38
6 0.8 1.1 1.4 1.8 2.1 2.5 2.8 3.5 4.2 5.6 7 10 14 21 28 38 56
10 0.9 1.2 1.4 1.9 2.3 2.9 3.5 4.1 4.7 5.8 7 9.4 12 16 23 35 47 63 94
16 0.9 1.1 1.5 1.9 2.2 3 3.7 4.7 5.6 6.5 7.5 9.3 11 15 19 26 37 56 75 100 150
25 0.9 1.2 1.4 1.7 2.3 2.9 3.5 4.6 5.8 7.2 8.7 10 12 14 17 23 29 41 58 87 116 155 233
35 1.2 1.6 2 2.4 3.2 4 4.8 6.4 8 10 12 14 16 20 24 32 40 56 80 121 161 216 324
50 1.1 1.7 2.3 2.8 3.4 4.5 5.7 6.8 9 11 14 17 20 23 28 34 45 57 79 113 170 226 303 455
70 0.8 1.5 2.3 3.1 3.8 4.6 6.2 7.7 9.2 12 15 19 23 27 31 38 46 62 77 108 154 231 308 413
95 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 16 20 25 30 35 40 50 60 80 100 140 200 300 400
120 1.2 2.4 3.6 4.8 6 7.2 10 12 14 19 24 30 36 42 48 60 72 96 120 168 240 360 481
150 1.4 2.8 4.2 5.6 7 8.4 11 14 17 23 28 35 42 49 56 70 84 113 141 197 281 422
185 1.6 3.2 4.8 6.4 8 10 13 16 19 26 32 40 48 56 64 80 96 128 160 224 320 480
240 1.8 3.7 5.5 7.3 9.1 11 15 18 22 29 37 46 55 64 73 91 110 146 183 256 366 549
300 2 4 6 8 10 12 16 20 24 32 40 50 60 70 80 100 120 160 200 280 400
2x120 2.4 4.8 7.2 10 12 14 19 24 29 38 48 60 72 84 96 120 144 192 240 336 481
2x150 2.8 5.6 8.4 11 14 17 23 28 34 45 56 70 84 98 113 141 169 225 281 394 563
2x185 3.2 6.4 10 13 16 19 26 32 38 51 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 256 320 448
3x120 3.6 7.2 11 14 18 22 29 36 43 58 72 90 108 126 144 180 216 288 360 505
3x150 4.2 8.4 13 17 21 25 34 42 51 68 84 105 127 148 169 211 253 338 422
3x185 4.8 10 14 19 24 29 38 48 58 77 96 120 144 168 192 240 288 384 480

Ik upstream Ik downstream
[kA] [kA]
100 96 92 89 85 82 78 71 65 60 50 43 36 31 27 24 20 17 13 11 7.8 5.6 3.7 2.7 2.0 1.3
90 86 83 81 78 76 72 67 61 57 48 42 35 31 27 24 20 17 13 11 7.8 5.6 3.7 2.7 2.0 1.3
80 77 75 73 71 69 66 62 57 53 46 40 34 30 27 24 20 17 13 10 7.7 5.5 3.7 2.7 2.0 1.3
70 68 66 65 63 62 60 56 53 49 43 38 33 29 26 23 19 16 13 10 7.6 5.5 3.7 2.7 2.0 1.3
60 58 57 56 55 54 53 50 47 45 40 36 31 28 25 23 19 16 12 10 7.5 5.4 3.7 2.7 2.0 1.3
50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 41 39 35 32 29 26 23 21 18 15 12 10 7.3 5.3 3.6 2.6 2.0 1.3
40 39 39 38 38 37 37 35 34 33 31 28 26 24 22 20 17 15 12 10 7.1 5.2 3.6 2.6 2.0 1.3
35 34 34 34 33 33 32 32 31 30 28 26 24 22 20 19 16 14 11 10 7.1 5.1 3.5 2.6 2.0 1.3
30 30 29 29 29 28 28 28 27 26 25 23 22 20 19 18 16 14 11 9.3 7.0 5.0 3.5 2.6 1.9 1.3
25 25 24 24 24 24 24 23 23 22 21 21 19 18 17 16 14 13 11 9.0 6.8 5.0 3.4 2.6 1.9 1.3
20 20 20 20 19 19 19 19 18 18 18 17 16 15 15 14 13 12 10 8.4 6.5 4.8 3.3 2.5 1.9 1.3
15 15 15 15 15 15 14 14 14 14 14 13 13 12 12 12 11 10 8.7 7.6 6.1 4.6 3.2 2.5 1.9 1.3
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 11 11 11 11 11 10 10 10 9.3 8.8 7.8 7.0 5.7 4.4 3.1 2.4 1.9 1.3
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9.5 9.4 9.2 9.0 8.8 8.5 8.3 8.1 7.7 7.3 6.5 5.9 5.0 3.9 2.9 2.3 1.8 1.2
8.0 8.0 7.9 7.9 7.9 7.8 7.8 7.7 7.7 7.6 7.5 7.4 7.2 7.1 6.9 6.8 6.5 6.2 5.7 5.2 4.5 3.7 2.8 2.2 1.7 1.2
6.0 6.0 5.9 5.9 5.9 5.9 5.8 5.8 5.8 5.7 5.6 5.5 5.4 5.3 5.2 5.1 4.9 4.8 4.4 4.1 3.6 3.1 2.4 2.0 1.6 1.1
3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.7 2.7 2.6 2.5 2.4 2.2 2.0 1.7 1.4 1.2 0.9

ABB | Electrical devices 497

 6.4 Determination of the short-circuit current Ik downstream of a cable as a function
of the upstream one

6 Calculation of short-circuit current

Note:
• In the case of the Ik upstream and the length of the cable not being included
in the table, it is necessary to consider:
- the value right above Ik upstream;
- the value right below for the cable length.

These approximations allow calculations which favour safety.

• In the case of cables in parallel not present in the table, the length must be
divided by the number of cables in parallel.

Example
Data
Rated voltage = 400 V
Cable section = 120 mm2
Conductor = copper
Length = 29 m

Upstream short-circuit current = 32 kA

400 V

Ik upstream = 32 kA

QF A

120 mm2
Cu/PVC

1SDC010056F0001
L = 29 m Ik downstream = ?

QF B QF C

Procedure
In the row corresponding to the cable cross section 120 mm2, it is possible to
find the column for a length equal to 29 m or right below (in this case 24). In
the column of upstream short-circuit current it is possible to identify the row
with a value of 32 kA or right above (in this case 35). From the intersection of
this last row with the previously identified column, the value of the downstream
short-circuit current can be read as being equal to 26 kA.

498 Electrical devices | ABB

 6 Calculation of short-circuit current
6.5 Algebra of sequences
6.5.1 General aspects

It is possible to study a symmetrical, balanced three-phase network in quite a

simple way by reducing the three-phase network to a single-phase one having
the same value of rated voltage as the three-phase system line-to-neutral
voltage.
Asymmetric networks cannot be reduced to the study of a single-phase network
just because of this unbalance. In this case, being impossible any simplification,
it is necessary to proceed according to the analysis methods typical for the
solution of electrical systems.
The modelling technique allowing the calculation of an asymmetric and
unbalanced network by converting it to a set of three balanced networks that
each can be represented by a single-phase equivalent circuit easily solvable is
the method of symmetrical components.
This method derives from mathematical considerations according to which
any set of three phasors1 can be divided into three sets of phasors with the
following characteristics:
- a balanced set, called positive sequence, formed by three phasors of equal
magnitude shifted by 120° and having the same phase sequence as the
original system
- a balanced set, called negative sequence, formed by three phasors of equal
magnitude shifted by 120° and having inverse phase sequence to that of the
original system
- a zero sequence set formed by three phasors of equal magnitude in phase.
Figure 1

Unbalanced set Positive sequence set Negative sequence set Zero sequence set
V1 Vi
Vd V0
V2 Vi
= Vd
+ + V0
V0
Vd
Vi
V3

1
The phasor is a vectorial representation of magnitude which varies in time. A signal of
type is represented by the phasor

ABB | Electrical devices 499

 6.5 Algebra of sequences

6 Calculation of short-circuit current

6.5.2 Positive, negative and zero sequence systems

The following relationships*  represent the link between the quantities of the
three-phase balanced network and the positive, negative and zero sequence
systems:

* In the formulas, the subscripts relevant to positive-sequence, negative-sequence and

zero-sequence components are indicated by “d”, “i” and “0” respectively.

The complex constant is a versor which, multiplied by a vector,

rotates the vector by 120° in a positive direction (counterclockwise).

The complex constant operates a -120° rotation.

Some useful properties of this set of three vectors are:

Figure 2

Therefore, it is possible to state that a real three-phase network may be replaced

by three single-phase networks related to the three positive, negative and zero
sequences, by substituting each component with the corresponding equivalent
circuit. If generators can be considered symmetrical as it occurs in plant practice,
by considering as a positive sequence set the one they generate, the three
single-phase networks are defined by the following circuits and equations:

Figure 3

Where:
- Ed is the line-to-neutral voltage of the section upstream the fault

- Z is the system impedance upstream the fault location

- I is the fault current
- V is the voltage measured at the fault location.

500 Electrical devices | ABB

 6.5 Algebra of sequences

6 Calculation of short-circuit current

6.5.3 Calculation of short-circuit current with the algebra of sequences

Without going into the details of a theoretical treatment, it is possible to show the
procedure to semplify and resolve the electrical network under a pre-estabilished
fault condition thruogh an example.

Isolated line-to line fault

The diagram showing this fault typology and the link between currents and
voltages, may be represented as follows:

Figure 4

By using the given fault conditions and the formula 1), it follows that:

Vd = Vi
Id = -Ii (4)
Io = 0 therefore Vo = 0

These relationships applied to the three sequence circuits of Figure 3 allow

the definition of the sequence network equivalent to the three-phase network
under study and representing the initial fault condition. This network may be
represented as follows:

Figure 5

ABB | Electrical devices 501

 6.5 Algebra of sequences

6 Calculation of short-circuit current

By solving this simple network (constituted by series-connected elements) in
relation to the current Id, the following is obtained:

5)

By using formulas 2) referred to the current, and formulas 4), it follows that:

Since results to be equal to , the value of the line-to-line short-circuit
current in the two phases affected by the fault can be expressed as follows:

Using formulas 2) referred to the voltage, and formulas 4) previously found, the
following is obtained:

6) for the phase not affected by the fault

7) for the phases affected by the fault

Through the negative sequence circuit, relation 6) can be written as

.
Further to the above, and since , the phase not affected by the fault
shall be:

For the phases affected by the fault, being , it results:

Making reference to the previous example, it is possible to analyse all fault

typologies and to express the fault currents and voltages as a function of the
impedances of the sequence components.

502 Electrical devices | ABB

 6.5 Algebra of sequences

6 Calculation of short-circuit current

A summary is given in Table 1 below:

Fault
Type of fault conditions: Current Voltage on phases
Three-phase short-circuit
I1

I2
V1 = V2 = V3 Un
Ik3 = I1 = V1 = V2 = V3 = 0
I3 V1 I1 + I2 + I3 = 0 3 . Zd
V2
V3

Line-to-line short-circuit
I1

V1 =
2 . U . Zi
I2 n
V2 = V3 Un 3 Zd +Zi
Ik2 = I2 =
V1 I2 = - I3 Zd +Zi Un . Zi
I3 V2 = V3 =
V2 3 Zd + Zi
V3

Line-to-line short-circuit with

earth connection
I1
( 1+ α2 ) . Zi +Zo
I2 = Un.
Zd .Zi + Zi .Zo + Zo .Zd
I2 V2 = V3 =0
( 1+ α ) . Zi +Zo
V2 = V3 =0 I3 = Un. Zi . Zo
V1 I1 = 0 Zd .Zi + Zi .Zo + Zo .Zd V1 = 3 . Un.
I3 Zd Zi Zi . Zo+ Zo . Zd
. +
Zi
V2 Iground = I2 + I3 = Un.
Zd .Zi + Zi .Zo + Zo .Zd
V3

Single line short-circuit

I1
V1 = 0
I2 3 . Un Zi - α . Zo
V1 = 0 Ik1 = I1 = V2 = Un.
Zd + Zi + Zo
I2 =I3 = 0 Zd + Zi + Zo
I3 V1 - α . Zi + Zo
V3 = Un.
V2 Zd + Zi + Zo
V3

ABB | Electrical devices 503

 6.5 Algebra of sequences

6 Calculation of short-circuit current

6.5.4 Positive, negative and zero sequence short-circuit impedances of
electrical equipment

Each component of an electrical network (utility – transformer – generator

– cable) may be represented by a positive, negative and zero sequence
impedance value.

Utility
By utility it is meant the distribution supply network (usually MV) from which the
plant is fed. It is characterized by positive and negative sequence elements,
whereas the zero sequence impedance is not taken into consideration since
the delta-connected windings of the primary circuit of the transformer impede
the zero sequence current. As regards the existing impedances, it can be
written:

Transformer
It is characterized by positive and negative sequence elements; besides, as a
function of the connection of the windings and of the distribution system on the
LV side, the zero sequence component may be present too.
Thus, it is possible to say that:

whereas the zero sequence component can be expressed as:
Zo=ZΤ when the flow of zero sequence currents in the two windings is possible
Zo=∞ when the flow of zero sequence currents in the two windings is impossible

Cable
It is characterized by positive, negative and zero sequence elements which vary
as a function of the return path of the short-circuit current.

As regards the positive and negative sequence components, it is possible to

say that:
Zd = Zi = ZC =RC + j XC

To evaluate the zero sequence impedance, it is necessary to know the return

path of the current:

Return through the neutral wire (phase-to-neutral fault)

Return through PE (phase-to-PE conductor fault in TN-S system)

Return through ground (phase-to-ground fault in TT system)

where:
• ZC, RC and XC refer to the line conductor
• ZnC, RnC and XnC refer to the neutral conductor
• ZPEC, RPEC and XPEC refer to the protection conductor PE
• ZEC, REC and XEC refer to the ground.

504 Electrical devices | ABB

 6.5 Algebra of sequences

6 Calculation of short-circuit current

Synchronous generators
Generally speaking, positive, negative and zero sequence reactances of syn-
chronous generators (and also of rotating machines) have different values.
For the positive sequence, only the sub transient reactance Xd” is used, since,
in this case,X the calculation of the fault current gives the highest ”value.
Xq” Xd
”
d
The negative sequence reactance is very variable, ranging between the values
of” Xd” and Xq” . In the initial instants of the short-circuit, Xd” and Xq” do not differ
X d
very ”much and therefore we may consider Xi = Xd” . On the contrary if Xd” and
Xq” Xare X”
q
remarkably different, it is possible to use a” valueqequal to the average
Xq Xq”
value of the two reactances; it follows that:

The zero sequence reactance is very variable too and results to be lower than
the other two above mentioned reactances. For this reactance, a value equal to
0.1 to 0.7 times the negative or positive sequence reactances may be assumed
and can be calculated as follows:

where xo% is a typical parameter of the machine. Besides, the zero sequence
component results to be influenced also by the grounding modality of the
generator through the introduction of the parameters RG and XG, which repre-
sent, respectively, the grounding resistance and the reactance of the generator.
If the star point of the generator is inaccessible or anyway non-earthed, the
grounding impedance is ∞.

To summarize, the following expressions are to be considered for the sequence

impedances:

where Ra is the stator resistance defined as , with Ta as stator
time constant.

ABB | Electrical devices 505

 6.5 Algebra of sequences

6 Calculation of short-circuit current

Loads
If the load is passive, the impedance shall be considered as infinite.
If the load is not passive, as it could be for an asynchronous motor, it is possible
to consider the machine represented by the impedance ZM for the positive and
negative sequence, whereas for the zero sequence the value ZoM must be given
by the manufacturer. Besides, if the motors are not earthed, the zero sequence
impedance shall be ∞.
Therefore:

with ZM equal to

where:
ILR is the current value when the rotor is blocked by the motor
Ir is the rated current of the motor

is the rated apparent power of the motor

The ratio is often known; for LV motors, this ratio can be considered equal

to 0.42 with , from which XM=0.922.ZM can be determined.

506 Electrical devices | ABB

 6.5 Algebra of sequences

6 Calculation of short-circuit current

6.5.5 Formulas for the calculation of the fault currents as a function of the
electrical parameters of the plant

Through Table 1 and through the formulas given for the sequence impedances
expressed as a function of the electrical parameters of the plant components,
it is possible to calculate the different short-circuit currents.

In the following example, a network with a MV/LV transformer with delta primary
winding and secondary winding with grounded star point is taken into considera-
tion and a line-to-line fault is assumed downstream the cable distribution line.

Figure 6

ZNET ZL

ZNET ZL

ZNET ZL

ZT ZN

ZPE

Applying the algebra of sequences:

the impedances relevant to the positive and negative sequences under
examination are:

considering that , the following is obtained:

where:
Ur is the rated voltage on the LV side
ZT is the impedance of the transformer
ZL is the impedance of the phase conductor
ZNET is the impedance of the upstream network.

By making reference to the previous example, it is possible to obtain Table 2

below, which gives the expressions for the short-circuit currents according to
the different typologies of fault.

ABB | Electrical devices 507

 6.5 Algebra of sequences

6 Calculation of short-circuit current

Table 2

Ur
Three-phase ZNET ZL Ik3 =
fault 3 . ( ZNET + ZT + ZL )
Ik3 ZNET ZL
ZNET ZL

ZT ZN
ZPE

Line-to-line ZNET ZL Ur
Ik2 =
fault 2 . ( ZNET + ZT + ZL )
Ik2 ZNET ZL
ZNET ZL

ZT ZN
ZPE

Single-phase ZNET ZL Ur
fault Ik1 =
Ik1 (line-to-neutral or
line-to-PE)
ZNET ZL (
3 . 2 . ZNET + ZT + ZL+ ZPE
3 (
ZNET ZL Ur
Ik1 =
ZT ZN
(
3 . 2 . ZNET + ZT + ZL+ ZN
3 (
ZPE

Where:
Ur is the rated voltage on the LV side
ZT is the impedance of the transformer
ZL is the impedance of the phase conductor
ZNET is the impedance of the upstream network
ZPE is the impedance of the protection conductor (PE)
ZN is the impedance of the neutral conductor

508 Electrical devices | ABB

 6.5 Algebra of sequences

6 Calculation of short-circuit current

Table 3 below summarizes the relations for the fault currents, taking into account
the upstream defined or infinite power network values and the distance of the
fault from the transformer.
Table 3
Upstream defined power network Upstream infinite power network ZNET 0

Far-from the Near the Far-from the Near the

transformer transformer transformer transformer
ZL 0, ZPE (o ZN) 0 ZL 0, ZPE (o ZN) 0

Ur Ur Ur Ur
Ik3 Ik3 = Ik3 = Ik3 = Ik3 =
.
3 ( ZNET +ZT + ZL ) .
3 ( ZNET +ZT ) .
3 ( ZT +ZL ) 3 . ( Z T)

Ur Ur Ur Ur
Ik2 = Ik2 = Ik2 = Ik2 =
2 . ( ZNET +ZT + ZL ) 2 . ( ZNET +ZT ) 2 . ( ZT +ZL ) 2 . ( ZT )
Ik2

Ik2 < Ik3 Ik2 = 0.87.Ik3 Ik2 = 0.87.Ik3 Ik2 = 0.87.Ik3

Ur Ur Ur Ur
Ik1 = Ik1= Ik1= Ik1=
3 (
3 . 2 .ZNET +ZT +ZL+ZPE ) (
3 . 2 .ZNET +ZT
3 ) 3 . ( ZT + ZL+ ZPE ) 3 . ( ZT )
Ik1
Ik1 > Ik3
if Ik1 > Ik3 Ik1 ʺ Ik3 Ik1 = Ik3
ZNET > 3 . ZPE

ABB | Electrical devices 509

 6 Calculation of short-circuit current
6.6 Calculation of the peak value of the
short-circuit current
The electrodynamical effects of the short-circuit currents are particularly
dangerous for the bus ducts, but they can also damage cables.
The peak current is important also to evaluate the Icm value of the circuit-
breaker.
The Icm value is also bound to the Icu value, according to Table 16 of the Standard
IEC 60947-1. With reference to the short-circuit current of the plant, it shall
be Icm > Ikp.

The peak current of a plant may be calculated by the following formula (see
Std. IEC 60909-0):

where:
- I”k is the short-circuit current (rms value) at the initial instant of the short-
circuit
- R is the resistive component of the short-circuit impedance at the fault
location
- X is the reactive component of the short-circuit current at the fault location

When the power factor cosϕk is known, it is possible to write:

510 Electrical devices | ABB

 6 Calculation of short-circuit current
6.7 Considerations about UPS
(Uninterruptible Power Supplies)
contribution to short-circuit currents
In the following considerations particular attention is given to a double-
conversion or UPS on-line, belonging to the category VFI (Voltage and Frequency
Independent), for which the output voltage is independent of the mains voltage
variations and frequency variations are controlled by this device within the
standard limits prescribed by the Standards; this system is characterised by
the following operating modalities:

- under normal operating conditions, in the presence of the network voltage,

the load is fed by the network itself through the UPS;
- under emergency conditions (lack of network), power to the load is supplied
by the battery and by the inverter (“island supply” with UPS disconnected
from the mains);
- in case of temporary overcurrent required by the load (e.g. motor start-up),
power supply to the load is guaranteed by the network through the static
switch which excludes the UPS;
- in case of maintenance, for example due to a fault on the UPS, the load is fed
by the network through a manual bypass switch, by temporarily giving up the
availability of emergency power supply.

As regards the dimensioning of the protections on the supply side of the UPS,
it is necessary to know the characteristics of the network voltage and of the
short-circuit current; for the dimensioning of the protections on the load side,
it is necessary to know the current values let through by the UPS.
If power supply of the loads is provided directly from the network through manual
bypass, also the circuit-breaker on the load side must have a breaking capacity
(Icu) suitable for the short-circuit current of the supply-side network.
Furthermore, if required, an evaluation of the protection co-ordination in relation
to the operating conditions is necessary.

ABB | Electrical devices 511

 6.7 Calculation of short-circuit current

6 Calculation of short-circuit current

However, in order to choose the suitable protections, it is important to distinguish
between two operating conditions for UPS:

1) UPS under normal operating conditions

a) Overload condition:
- if due to a possible fault on the battery, this condition affects only the circuit-
breaker on the supply-side of the UPS (also likely the intervention of the
protections inside the battery);
- if required by the load, this condition might not be supported by the UPS,
which is bypassed by the static converter.

b) Short-circuit condition:
The short-circuit current is limited by the dimensioning of the thyristors of
the bridge inverter. In the practice, UPS may supply a maximum short-circuit
current equal to 150 to 200% of the rated value. In the event of a short-circuit,
the inverter supplies the maximum current for a limited time (some hundreds
of milliseconds) and then switches to the network, so that power to the load
is supplied by the bypass circuit.
In this case, selectivity between the circuit-breaker on the supply side and
the circuit-breaker on the load side is important in order to disconnect only
the load affected by the fault.
The bypass circuit, which is also called static switch, and is formed by thyristors
protected by extrarapid fuses, can feed the load with a higher current than the
inverter; this current results to be limited by the dimensioning of the thyristors
used, by the power installed and by the provided protections.
The thyristors of the bypass circuit are usually dimensioned to withstand the
following overload conditions:
125% for 600 seconds
150% for 60 seconds
700% for 600 milliseconds
1000% for 100 milliseconds
Generally, more detailed data can be obtained from the technical information
given by the manufacturer.

512 Electrical devices | ABB

 6.7 Calculation of short-circuit current

6 Calculation of short-circuit current

2) UPS under emergency operating conditions

a) Overload condition:
this condition, involving the load-side circuit-breaker only, is supported by the
battery with inverter, which presents an overload condition usually calculable
in the following orders of magnitude:
1.15 x In for indefinite time
1.25 x In for 600 seconds
1.5 x In for 60 seconds
2 x In for 1 seconds
Generally, more detailed data can be obtained from the technical information
given by the manufacturer.

b) Short-circuit condition:
the maximum current towards the load is limited by the inverter circuit only
(with a value from 150 to 200% of the nominal value). The inverter feeds the
short-circuit for a certain period of time, usually limited to some milliseconds,
after which the UPS unit disconnects the load leaving it without supply. In this
operating modality, it is necessary to obtain selectivity between the circuit-
breaker on the load side and the inverter, which is quite difficult due to the
reduced tripping times of the protection device of the inverter.

Figure 7 Figure 8
Manual bypass

Static bypass

~
~
~ = ~ =
= ~ = ~

UPS

UPS on-line with static switch UPS off-line: loads directly fed by the network

ABB | Electrical devices 513

 Annex A: Calculation of load current Ib
Generic loads
The formula for the calculation of the load current of a generic load is:

where:
• P is the active power [W];
• k is a coefficient which has the value:
- 1 for single-phase systems or for direct current systems;
- for three-phase systems;
• Ur is the rated voltage [V] (for three-phase systems it is the line voltage, for
single-phase systems it is the phase voltage);
• cosϕ is the power factor.

Table 1 allows the load current to be determined for some power values ac-
cording to the rated voltage. The table has been calculated considering cosϕ
to be equal to 0.9; for different power factors, the value from Table 1 must be
multiplied by the coefficient given in Table 2 corresponding to the actual value
of the power factor (cosϕact).

Table 1: Load current for three-phase systems with cosϕ = 0.9

Ur [V]
230 400 415 440 500 600 690
P [kW] Ib [A]
0.03 0.08 0.05 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.03 0.03
0.04 0.11 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.05 0.04 0.04
0.06 0.17 0.10 0.09 0.09 0.08 0.06 0.06
0.1 0.28 0.16 0.15 0.15 0.13 0.11 0.09
0.2 0.56 0.32 0.31 0.29 0.26 0.21 0.19
0.5 1.39 0.80 0.77 0.73 0.64 0.53 0.46
1 2.79 1.60 1.55 1.46 1.28 1.07 0.93
2 5.58 3.21 3.09 2.92 2.57 2.14 1.86
5 13.95 8.02 7.73 7.29 6.42 5.35 4.65
10 27.89 16.04 15.46 14.58 12.83 10.69 9.30
20 55.78 32.08 30.92 29.16 25.66 21.38 18.59
30 83.67 48.11 46.37 43.74 38.49 32.08 27.89
40 111.57 64.15 61.83 58.32 51.32 42.77 37.19
50 139.46 80.19 77.29 72.90 64.15 53.46 46.49
60 167.35 96.23 92.75 87.48 76.98 64.15 55.78
70 195.24 112.26 108.20 102.06 89.81 74.84 65.08
80 223.13 128.30 123.66 116.64 102.64 85.53 74.38
90 251.02 144.34 139.12 131.22 115.47 96.23 83.67
100 278.91 160.38 154.58 145.80 128.30 106.92 92.97
110 306.80 176.41 170.04 160.38 141.13 117.61 102.27
120 334.70 192.45 185.49 174.95 153.96 128.30 111.57
130 362.59 208.49 200.95 189.53 166.79 138.99 120.86
140 390.48 224.53 216.41 204.11 179.62 149.68 130.16
150 418.37 240.56 231.87 218.69 192.45 160.38 139.46
200 557.83 320.75 309.16 291.59 256.60 213.83 185.94

514 Electrical devices | ABB

 Annex A: Calculation of load curremt Ib

Annex A: Calculation of load current Ib

Ur [V]
230 400 415 440 500 600 690
P [kW] Ib[A]
250 697.28 400.94 386.45 364.49 320.75 267.29 232.43
300 836.74 481.13 463.74 437.39 384.90 320.75 278.91
350 976.20 561.31 541.02 510.28 449.05 374.21 325.40
400 1115.65 641.50 618.31 583.18 513.20 427.67 371.88
450 1255.11 721.69 695.60 656.08 577.35 481.13 418.37
500 1394.57 801.88 772.89 728.98 641.50 534.58 464.86
550 1534.02 882.06 850.18 801.88 705.65 588.04 511.34
600 1673.48 962.25 927.47 874.77 769.80 641.50 557.83
650 1812.94 1042.44 1004.76 947.67 833.95 694.96 604.31
700 1952.39 1122.63 1082.05 1020.57 898.10 748.42 650.80
750 2091.85 1202.81 1159.34 1093.47 962.25 801.88 697.28
800 2231.31 1283.00 1236.63 1166.36 1026.40 855.33 743.77
850 2370.76 1363.19 1313.92 1239.26 1090.55 908.79 790.25
900 2510.22 1443.38 1391.21 1312.16 1154.70 962.25 836.74
950 2649.68 1523.56 1468.49 1385.06 1218.85 1015.71 883.23
1000 2789.13 1603.75 1545.78 1457.96 1283.00 1069.17 929.71

Table 2: Correction factors for load current with cosϕ other than 0.9

cosϕact 1 0.95 0.9 0.85 0.8 0.75 0.7

kcosϕ* 0.9 0.947 1 1.059 1.125 1.2 1.286

*
For cosϕact values not present in the table,

Table 3 allows the load current to be determined for some power values ac-
cording to the rated voltage. The table has been calculated considering cosϕ
to be equal to 1; for different power factors, the value from Table 3 must be
multiplied by the coefficient given in Table 4 corresponding to the actual value
of the power factor (cosϕact).

Table 3: Load current for single-phase systems with cosϕ = 1 or dc systems

Ur [V]
230 400 415 440 500 600 690
P [kW] Ib [A]
0.03 0.13 0.08 0.07 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04
0.04 0.17 0.10 0.10 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.06
0.06 0.26 0.15 0.14 0.14 0.12 0.10 0.09
0.1 0.43 0.25 0.24 0.23 0.20 0.17 0.14
0.2 0.87 0.50 0.48 0.45 0.40 0.33 0.29
0.5 2.17 1.25 1.20 1.14 1.00 0.83 0.72
1 4.35 2.50 2.41 2.27 2.00 1.67 1.45
2 8.70 5.00 4.82 4.55 4.00 3.33 2.90
5 21.74 12.50 12.05 11.36 10.00 8.33 7.25
10 43.48 25.00 24.10 22.73 20.00 16.67 14.49
20 86.96 50.00 48.19 45.45 40.00 33.33 28.99

ABB | Electrical devices 515

 Annex A: Calculation of load curremt Ib

Annex A: Calculation of load current Ib

Ur [V]
230 400 415 440 500 600 690
P [kW] Ib [A]
30 130.43 75.00 72.29 68.18 60.00 50.00 43.48
40 173.91 100.00 96.39 90.91 80.00 66.67 57.97
50 217.39 125.00 120.48 113.64 100.00 83.33 72.46
60 260.87 150.00 144.58 136.36 120.00 100.00 86.96
70 304.35 175.00 168.67 159.09 140.00 116.67 101.45
80 347.83 200.00 192.77 181.82 160.00 133.33 115.94
90 391.30 225.00 216.87 204.55 180.00 150.00 130.43
100 434.78 250.00 240.96 227.27 200.00 166.67 144.93
110 478.26 275.00 265.06 250.00 220.00 183.33 159.42
120 521.74 300.00 289.16 272.73 240.00 200.00 173.91
130 565.22 325.00 313.25 295.45 260.00 216.67 188.41
140 608.70 350.00 337.35 318.18 280.00 233.33 202.90
150 652.17 375.00 361.45 340.91 300.00 250.00 217.39
200 869.57 500.00 481.93 454.55 400.00 333.33 289.86
250 1086.96 625.00 602.41 568.18 500.00 416.67 362.32
300 1304.35 750.00 722.89 681.82 600.00 500.00 434.78
350 1521.74 875.00 843.37 795.45 700.00 583.33 507.25
400 1739.13 1000.00 963.86 909.09 800.00 666.67 579.71
450 1956.52 1125.00 1084.34 1022.73 900.00 750.00 652.17
500 2173.91 1250.00 1204.82 1136.36 1000.00 833.33 724.64
550 2391.30 1375.00 1325.30 1250.00 1100.00 916.67 797.10
600 2608.70 1500.00 1445.78 1363.64 1200.00 1000.00 869.57
650 2826.09 1625.00 1566.27 1477.27 1300.00 1083.33 942.03
700 3043.48 1750.00 1686.75 1590.91 1400.00 1166.67 1014.49
750 3260.87 1875.00 1807.23 1704.55 1500.00 1250.00 1086.96
800 3478.26 2000.00 1927.71 1818.18 1600.00 1333.33 1159.42
850 3695.65 2125.00 2048.19 1931.82 1700.00 1416.67 1231.88
900 3913.04 2250.00 2168.67 2045.45 1800.00 1500.00 1304.35
950 4130.43 2375.00 2289.16 2159.09 1900.00 1583.33 1376.81
1000 4347.83 2500.00 2409.64 2272.73 2000.00 1666.67 1449.28

Table 4: Correction factors for load current with cosϕ other than 1

cosϕact 1 0.95 0.9 0.85 0.8 0.75 0.7

kcosϕ* 1 1.053 1.111 1.176 1.25 1.333 1.429

*
For cosϕact values not present in the table,

Lighting circuits
The current absorbed by the lighting system may be deduced from the lighting
equipment catalogue, or approximately calculated using the following formula:

where:
• PL is the power of the lamp [W];
• nL is the number of lamps per phase;
• kB is a coefficient which has the value:
- 1 for lamps which do not need any auxiliary starter;
- 1.25 for lamps which need auxiliary starters;
• kN is a coefficient which has the value:
- 1 for star-connected lamps;
- for delta-connected lamps;
• UrL is the rated voltage of the lamps;
• cosϕ is the power factor of the lamps which has the value:
- 0.4 for lamps without compensation;
- 0.9 for lamps with compensation.

516 Electrical devices | ABB

 Annex A: Calculation of load curremt Ib

Annex A: Calculation of load current Ib

Motors
Table 5 gives the approximate values of the load current for some three-phase
squirrel-cage motors, 1500 rpm at 50 Hz, according to the rated voltage.
Note: these values are given for information only, and may vary according to the motor manifacturer
and depending on the number of poles

Table 5: Motor load current

Motor power Rated current of the motor at:

220-230 V 240 V 380-400 V 415 V 440 V 500 V 600 V 660-690 V

[kW] PS = hp [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A] [A]
0.06 1/12 0.38 0.35 0.22 0.20 0.19 0.16 0.12 –
0.09 1/8 0.55 0.50 0.33 0.30 0.28 0.24 0.21 –
0.12 1/6 0.76 0.68 0.42 0.40 0.37 0.33 0.27 –
0.18 1/4 1.1 1 0.64 0.60 0.55 0.46 0.40 –
0.25 1/3 1.4 1.38 0.88 0.85 0.76 0.59 0.56 –
0.37 1/2 2.1 1.93 1.22 1.15 1.06 0.85 0.77 0.7
0.55 3/4 2.7 2.3 1.5 1.40 1.25 1.20 1.02 0.9
0.75 1 3.3 3.1 2 2 1.67 1.48 1.22 1.1
1.1 1.5 4.9 4.1 2.6 2.5 2.26 2.1 1.66 1.5
1.5 2 6.2 5.6 3.5 3.5 3.03 2.6 2.22 2
2.2 3 8.7 7.9 5 5 4.31 3.8 3.16 2.9
2.5 3.4 9.8 8.9 5.7 5.5 4.9 4.3 3.59 3.3
3 4 11.6 10.6 6.6 6.5 5.8 5.1 4.25 3.5
3.7 5 14.2 13 8.2 7.5 7.1 6.2 5.2 4.4
4 5.5 15.3 14 8.5 8.4 7.6 6.5 5.6 4.9
5 6.8 18.9 17.2 10.5 10 9.4 8.1 6.9 6
5.5 7.5 20.6 18.9 11.5 11 10.3 8.9 7.5 6.7
6.5 8.8 23.7 21.8 13.8 12.5 12 10.4 8.7 8.1
7.5 10 27.4 24.8 15.5 14 13.5 11.9 9.9 9
8 11 28.8 26.4 16.7 15.4 14.4 12.7 10.6 9.7
9 12.5 32 29.3 18.3 17 15.8 13.9 11.6 10.6
11 15 39.2 35.3 22 21 19.3 16.7 14.1 13
12.5 17 43.8 40.2 25 23 21.9 19 16.1 15
15 20 52.6 48.2 30 28 26.3 22.5 19.3 17.5
18.5 25 64.9 58.7 37 35 32 28.5 23.5 21
20 27 69.3 63.4 40 37 34.6 30.6 25.4 23
22 30 75.2 68 44 40 37.1 33 27.2 25
25 34 84.4 77.2 50 47 42.1 38 30.9 28
30 40 101 92.7 60 55 50.1 44 37.1 33
37 50 124 114 72 66 61.9 54 45.4 42
40 54 134 123 79 72 67 60 49.1 44
45 60 150 136 85 80 73.9 64.5 54.2 49
51 70 168 154 97 90 83.8 73.7 61.4 56
55 75 181 166 105 96 90.3 79 66.2 60
59 80 194 178 112 105 96.9 85.3 71.1 66
75 100 245 226 140 135 123 106 90.3 82
80 110 260 241 147 138 131 112 96.3 86
90 125 292 268 170 165 146 128 107 98
100 136 325 297 188 182 162 143 119 107
110 150 358 327 205 200 178 156 131 118
129 175 420 384 242 230 209 184 153 135
132 180 425 393 245 242 214 186 157 140
140 190 449 416 260 250 227 200 167 145
147 200 472 432 273 260 236 207 173 152
160 220 502 471 295 280 256 220 188 170
180 245 578 530 333 320 289 254 212 190
184 250 590 541 340 325 295 259 217 200
200 270 626 589 370 340 321 278 235 215
220 300 700 647 408 385 353 310 260 235
250 340 803 736 460 425 401 353 295 268
257 350 826 756 475 450 412 363 302 280
295 400 948 868 546 500 473 416 348 320
315 430 990 927 580 535 505 445 370 337
355 480 1080 1010 636 580 549 483 405 366
400 545 1250 1130 710 650 611 538 450 410
450 610 1410 1270 800 740 688 608 508 460
475 645 1490 1340 850 780 730 645 540 485
500 680 1570 1420 890 830 770 680 565 510
560 760 1750 1580 1000 920 860 760 630 570
600 810 – – 1080 990 920 810 680 610
670 910 – – 1200 1100 1030 910 760 680

ABB | Electrical devices 517

 Annex B: Harmonics
What are they?
The harmonics allow to represent any periodic waveform; in fact, according
to Fourier’s theorem, any periodic function of a period T may be represented
as a summation of:
- a sinusoid with the same period T;
- some sinusoids with the same frequency as whole multiples of the fundamental;
- a possible continuous component, if the function has an average value not
null in the period.
The harmonic with frequency corresponding to the period of the original
waveform is called fundamental and the harmonic with frequency equal to “n”
times that of the fundamental is called harmonic component of order “n”.
A perfectly sinusoidal waveform complying with Fourier’s theorem does not
present harmonic components of order different from the fundamental one.
Therefore, it is understandable how there are no harmonics in an electrical
system when the waveforms of current and voltage are sinusoidal. On the
contrary, the presence of harmonics in an electrical system is an index of the
distortion of the voltage or current waveform and this implies such a distribution
of the electric power that malfunctioning of equipment and protective devices
can be caused.
To summarize: the harmonics are nothing less than the components of a
distorted waveform and their use allows us to analyse any periodic nonsinusoidal
waveform through different sinusoidal waveform components.
Figure 1 below shows a graphical representation of this concept.

Figure 1

Caption:
nonsinusoidal waveform
first harmonic (fundamental)
third harmonic
fifth harmonic

518 Electrical devices | ABB

 Annex B: Harmonics

Annex B: Harmonics
How harmonics are generated?
Harmonics are generated by nonlinear loads. When we apply a sinusoidal
voltage to a load of this type, we shall obtain a current with non-sinusoidal
waveform. The diagram of Figure 2 illustrates an example of nonsinusoidal
current waveform due to a nonlinear load:

Figure 2

I I

t v t v

t t
Linear load Nonlinear load

As already said, this nonsinusoidal waveform can be deconstructed into

harmonics. If the network impedances are very low, the voltage distortion
resulting from a harmonic current is low too and rarely it is above the pollution
level already present in the network. As a consequence, the voltage can remain
practically sinusoidal also in the presence of current harmonics.
To function properly, many electronic devices need a definite current waveform
and thus they have to ’cut’ the sinusoidal waveform so as to change its rms
value or to get a direct current from an alternate value; in these cases the current
on the line has a nonsinusoidal curve.
The main equipment generating harmonics are:
- personal computer
- fluorescent lamps
- static converters
- continuity groups
- variable speed drives
- welders.
In general, waveform distortion is due to the presence, inside of these equipment,
of bridge rectifiers, whose semiconductor devices carry the current only for a
fraction of the whole period, thus originating discontinuous curves with the
consequent introduction of numerous harmonics.

ABB | Electrical devices 519

 Annex B: Harmonics

Annex B: Harmonics
Also transformers can be cause of harmonic pollution; in fact, by applying
a perfectly sinusoidal voltage to a transformer, it results into a sinusoidal
magnetizing flux, but, due to the phenomenon of the magnetic saturation of
iron, the magnetizing current shall not be sinusoidal. Figure 3 shows a graphic
representation of this phenomenon:

Figure 3

The resultant waveform of the magnetizing current contains numerous

harmonics, the greatest of which is the third one. However, it should be noted
that the magnetizing current is generally a little percentage of the rated current
of the transformer and the distortion effect becomes more and more negligible
the most loaded the transformer results to be.

Effects
The main problems caused by harmonic currents are:
1) overloading of neutrals
2) increase of losses in the transformers
3) increase of skin effect.

The main effects of the harmonics voltages are:

4) voltage distortion
5) disturbances in the torque of induction motors

520 Electrical devices | ABB

 Annex B: Harmonics

Annex B: Harmonics
1) Overloading of neutrals
In a three phase symmetric and balanced system with neutral, the waveforms
between the phases are shifted by a 120° phase angle so that, when the
phases are equally loaded, the current in the neutral is zero. The presence of
unbalanced loads (phase-to-phase, phase-to-neutral etc.) allows the flowing
of an unbalanced current in the neutral.

Figure 4

L1 L2 L3

Figure 4 shows an unbalanced system of currents (phase 3 with a load 30%

higher than the other two phases), and the current resultant in the neutral is
highlighted in red. Under these circumstances, the Standards allow the neutral
conductor to be dimensioned with a cross section smaller than the phase con-
ductors. In the presence of distortion loads it is necessary to evaluate correctly
the effects of harmonics.
In fact, although the currents at fundamental frequency in the three phases cancel
each other out, the components of the third harmonic, having a period equal to
a third of the fundamental, that is equal to the phase shift between the phases
(see Figure 5), are reciprocally in phase and consequently they sum in the neutral
conductor adding themselves to the normal unbalance currents.
The same is true also for the harmonics multiple of three (even and odd, although
actually the odd ones are more common).

ABB | Electrical devices 521

 Annex B: Harmonics

Annex B: Harmonics
Figure 5

Phase 1:
fundamental harmonic and 3rd harmonic

Phase 2:
fundamental harmonic and 3rd harmonic

Phase 3:
fundamental harmonic and 3rd harmonic

Resultant of the currents of the three phases

522 Electrical devices | ABB

 Annex B: Harmonics

Annex B: Harmonics
2) Increase of losses in the transformers
The effects of harmonics inside the transformers involve mainly three aspects:
• a) increase of iron losses (or no-load losses)
• b) increase of copper losses
• c) presence of harmonics circulating in the windings
a) The iron losses are due to the hysteresis phenomenon and to the losses
caused by eddy currents; the losses due to hysteresis are proportional to the
frequency, whereas the losses due to eddy currents depend on the square
of the frequency.
b) The copper losses correspond to the power dissipated by Joule effect in
the transformer windings. As the frequency rises (starting from 350 Hz) the
current tends to thicken on the surface of the conductors (skin effect); under
these circumstances, the conductors offer a smaller cross section to the
current flow, since the losses by Joule effect increase.
These two first aspects affect the overheating which sometimes causes a
derating of the transformer.
c) The third aspect is relevant to the effects of the triple-N harmonics (homopolar
harmonics) on the transformer windings. In case of delta windings, the
harmonics flow through the windings and do not propagate upstream
towards the network since they are all in phase; the delta windings therefore
represent a barrier for triple-N harmonics, but it is necessary to pay particular
attention to this type of harmonic components for a correct dimensioning
of the transformer.

3) Increase of skin effect

When the frequency rises, the current tends to flow on the outer surface of a
conductor. This phenomenon is known as skin effect and is more pronounced
at high frequencies. At 50 Hz power supply frequency, skin effect is negligible,
but above 350 Hz, which corresponds to the 7th harmonic, the cross section for
the current flow reduces, thus increasing the resistance and causing additional
losses and heating.
In the presence of high-order harmonics, it is necessary to take skin effect into
account, because it affects the life of cables. In order to overcome this problem,
it is possible to use multiple conductor cables or busbar systems formed by
more elementary isolated conductors.

4) Voltage distortion
The distorted load current drawn by the nonlinear load causes a distorted
voltage drop in the cable impedance. The resultant distorted voltage waveform
is applied to all other loads connected to the same circuit, causing harmonic
currents to flow in them, even if they are linear loads.
The solution consists in separating the circuits which supply harmonic generating
loads from those supplying loads sensitive to harmonics.

5) Disturbances in the torque of induction motors

Harmonic voltage distortion causes increased eddy current losses in the
motors, in the same way as seen for transformers. The additional losses are
due to the generation of harmonic fields in the stator, each of which is trying
to rotate the motor at a different speed, both forwards (1st, 4th, 7th, ...) as well
as backwards (2nd, 5th, 8th, ...). High frequency currents induced in the rotor
further increase losses.

ABB | Electrical devices 523

 Annex B: Harmonics

Annex B: Harmonics
Main formulas
The definitions of the main quantities typically used in a harmonic analysis are
given hereunder.
Frequency spectrum
The frequency spectrum is the classic representation of the harmonic content of
a waveform and consists of a histogram reporting the value of each harmonic
as a percentage of the fundamental component. For example, for the following
waveform:

the frequency spectrum is:

100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

The frequency spectrum provides the size of the existing harmonic components.
Peak factor
The peak factor is defined as the ratio between the peak value and the rms
value of the waveform:

in case of perfectly sinusoidal waveforms, it is worth , but in the presence

of harmonics it can reach higher values.
High peak factors may cause the unwanted tripping of the protection
devices.
Rms value
The rms value of a periodical waveform e(t) is defined as:

where T is the period.

524 Electrical devices | ABB

 Annex B: Harmonics

Annex B: Harmonics
If the rms values of the harmonic components are known, the total rms value
can be easily calculated by the following formula:

Total harmonic distortion THD

The total harmonic distortion is defined as:

THD in current

THD in voltage

The harmonic distortion ratio is a very important parameter, which gives

information about the harmonic content of the voltage and current waveforms
and about the necessary measures to be taken should these values be high.
For THDi < 10% and THDu < 5%, the harmonic content is considered negligible
and such as not to require any provisions.

Standard references for circuit-breakers

IEC 60947 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear
Annex F of the Standard IEC 60947-2 (third edition 2003) gives information
about the tests to check the immunity of the overcurrent releases against
harmonics.
In particular, it describes the waveform of the test current, at which, in
correspondence with determinate values of injected current, the release shall
have a behaviour complying with the prescriptions of this Standard.

Hereunder, the characteristics of the waveform of the test current are reported,
which shall be formed, in alternative, as follows:
1) by the fundamental component and by a 3rd harmonic variable between
72% and 88% of the fundamental, with peak factor equal to 2 or by a 5th
harmonic variable between 45% and 55% of the fundamental, with peak factor
equal to 1.9
or
2) by the fundamental component and by a 3rd harmonic higher than 60% of
the fundamental, by a 5th harmonic higher than 14% of the fundamental and
by a 7th harmonic higher than 7% of the fundamental. This test current shall
have a peak factor > 2.1 and shall flow for a given time < 42% of the period
for each half period.

ABB | Electrical devices 525

 Annex C: Calculation of the coefficient k for
the cables (k2S2)
By using the formula (1), it is possible to determine the conductor minimum
section S, in the hypothesis that the generic conductor is submitted to an adiabatic
heating from a known initial temperature up to a specific final temperature
(applicable if the fault is removed in less than 5 s):

where:
• S is the cross section [mm2];
• I is the value (r.m.s) of prospective fault current for a fault of negligible
impedance, which can flow through the protective device [A];
• t is the operating time of the protective device for automatic disconnection
[s];
k can be evaluated using the tables 2÷7 or calculated according to the formula
(2):

where:
• Qc is the volumetric heat capacity of conductor material [J/°Cmm3] at 20 °C;
• B is the reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity at 0 °C for the
conductor [°C];
• ρ20 is the electrical resistivity of conductor material at 20 °C [Ωmm];
• θi initial temperature of conductor [°C];
• θf final temperature of conductor [°C].

Table 1 shows the values of the parameters described above.

Table 1: Value of parameters for different materials

Material B Qc ρ20
[°C] [J/°Cmm3] [Ωmm]
Copper 234.5 3.45⋅10-3 17.241⋅10-6 226
Aluminium 228 2.5⋅10-3 28.264⋅10-6 148
Lead 230 1.45⋅10-3 214⋅10-6 41
Steel 202 3.8⋅10-3 138⋅10-6 78

526 Electrical devices | ABB

 Annex C: calculation of short-circuit current

Annex C: Calculation of the coefficient k for

the cables (k2S2)
Table 2: Values of k for phase conductor
Conductor insulation
PVC PVC EPR Rubber Mineral
≤ 300 mm2 ≤ 300 mm2 XLPE 60 °C PVC Bare
Initial temperature °C 70 70 90 60 70 105
Final temperature °C 160 140 250 200 160 250
Material of conductor:
copper 115 103 143 141 115 135/115 a
aluminium 76 68 94 93 - -
tin-soldered joints
115 - - - - -
in copper conductors

a
This value shall be used for bare cables exposed to touch.

Table 3: Values of k for insulated protective conductors not incorpo-

rated in cables and not bunched with other cables
Temperature °C b Material of conductor
Copper Aluminium Steel
Conductor insulation Initial Final Value for k
70 °C PVC 30 160/140 a 143/133 a 95/88 a 52/49 a
90 °C PVC 30 160/140 a 143/133 a 95/88 a 52/49 a
90 °C thermosetting 30 250 176 116 64
60 °C rubber 30 200 159 105 58
85 °C rubber 30 220 166 110 60
Silicone rubber 30 350 201 133 73
a
The lower value applies to PVC insulated conductors of cross section greater than
300 mm2 .
b
Temperature limits for various types of insulation are given in IEC 60724.

ABB | Electrical devices 527

 Annex C: calculation of short-circuit current

Annex C: Calculation of the coefficient k for

the cables (k2S2)
Table 4: Values of k for bare protective conductors in contact with
cable covering but not bunched with other cables
Temperature °C a Material of conductor
Copper Aluminium Steel
Cable covering Initial Final Value for k
PVC 30 200 159 105 58
Polyethylene 30 150 138 91 50
CSP 30 220 166 110 60

Temperature limits for various types of insulation are given in IEC 60724.
a

Table 5: Values of k for protective conductors as a core incorporated in

a cable or bunched with other cables or insulated conductors
Temperature °C b Material of conductor
Copper Aluminium Steel
Conductor insulation Initial Final Value for k
70 °C PVC 70 160/140 a 115/103 a 76/68 a 42/37 a
90 °C PVC 90 160/140 a
100/86 a
66/57 a
36/31 a
90 °C thermosetting 90 250 143 94 52
60 °C rubber 60 200 141 93 51
85 °C rubber 85 220 134 89 48
Silicone rubber 180 350 132 87 47

a
The lower value applies to PVC insulated conductors of cross section greater than
300 mm2 .
b
Temperature limits for various types of insulation are given in IEC 60724.

528 Electrical devices | ABB

 Annex C: calculation of short-circuit current

Annex C: Calculation of the coefficient k for

the cables (k2S2)
Table 6: Values of k for protective conductors as a metallic layer of a
cable e.g. armour, metallic sheath, concentric conductor, etc.
Temperature °C Material of conductor
Copper Aluminium Lead Steel
Conductor insulation Initial Final Value for k
70 °C PVC 60 200 141 93 26 51
90 °C PVC 80 200 128 85 23 46
90 °C thermosetting 80 200 128 85 23 46
60 °C rubber 55 200 144 95 26 52
85 °C rubber 75 220 140 93 26 51
Mineral PVC covered a 70 200 135 - - -
Mineral bare sheath 105 250 135 - - -
a
This value shall also be used for bare conductors exposed to touch or in contact with
combustible material.

Table 7: Value of k for bare conductors where there is no risk of damage

to any neighbouring material by the temperature indicated
Material of conductor
Copper Aluminium Steel
Initial Maximum Maximum Maximum
temperature temperature temperature temperature
Conductor insulation °C k value °C k value °C k value °C
Visible and in restricted area 30 228 500 125 300 82 500
Normal conditions 30 159 200 105 200 58 200
Fire risk 30 138 150 91 150 50 150

ABB | Electrical devices 529

 Annex D: Main physical quantities and
electrotechnical formulas
The International System of Units (SI)
SI Base Units
Quantity Symbol Unit name
Length m metre
Mass kg kilogram
Time s Second
Electric Current A ampere
Thermodynamic Temperature K kelvin
Amount of Substance mol mole
Luminous Intensity cd candela

Metric Prefixes for Multiples and Sub-multiples of Units

Decimal power Prefix Symbol Decimal power Prefix Symbol

1024 yotta Y 10-1 deci d
1021 zetta Z 10-2 centi c
1018 exa E 10-3 milli m
1015 peta P 10-6 mikro µ
1012 tera T 10-9 nano n
109 giga G 10-12 pico p
106 mega M 10-15 femto f
10 3
kilo k 10-18 atto a
102 etto h 10-21 zepto z
10 deca da 10-24 yocto y

530 Electrical devices | ABB

 Annex D: Main physical quantities

Annex D: Main physical quantities and

electrotechnical formulas
Main quantities and SI units
Quantity SI unit Other units Conversion
Symbol Name Symbol Name Symbol Name
Length, area, volume
in inch 1 in = 25.4 mm
ft foot 1 ft = 30.48 cm
l length m metre fathom fathom 1 fathom = 6 ft = 1.8288 m
mile mile 1 mile = 1609.344 m
sm sea mile 1 sm = 1852 m
yd yard 1 yd = 91.44 cm
A area m2 square metre a are 1 a = 102 m2
ha hectare 1 ha = 104 m2
l litre 1 l = 1 dm3 = 10-3 m3
V volume m3 cubic metre UK pt pint 1 UK pt = 0.5683 dm3
UK gal gallon 1 UK gal = 4.5461 dm3
US gal gallon 1 US gal = 3.7855 dm3
Angles
α, β, γ plane angle rad radian ° degrees

Ω solid angle sr steradian
Mass
m mass, weight kg kilogram lb pound 1 lb = 0.45359 kg
ρ density kg/m3 kilogram
υ specific volume m /kg
3
cubic metre
for kilogram
M moment of inertia kg⋅m2 kilogram for
square metre
Time
t duration s second
f frequency Hz Hertz 1 Hz = 1/s
ω angular 1/s reciprocal second ω = 2pf
frequency
v speed m/s metre per second km/h kilometre 1 km/h = 0.2777 m/s
per hour
mile/h mile per hour 1 mile/h = 0.4470 m/s
knot kn 1 kn = 0.5144 m/s
g acceleration m/s2 metre per second
squared
Force, energy, power
F force N newton 1 N = 1 kg⋅m/s2
kgf 1 kgf = 9.80665 N
p pressure/stress Pa pascal 1 Pa = 1 N/m2
bar bar 1 bar = 105 Pa
W energy, work J joule 1 J = 1 W⋅s = 1 N⋅m
P power W watt Hp horsepower 1 Hp = 745.7 W
Temperature and heat
T temperature K kelvin °C Celsius T[K] = 273.15 + T [°C]
°F Fahrenheit T[K] = 273.15 + (5/9)⋅(T [°F]-32)
Q quantity of heat J joule
S entropy J/K joule per kelvin
Photometric quantities
I luminous intensity cd candela
L luminance cd/m2 candela per square metre
Φ luminous flux lm lumen 1 lm = 1 cd⋅sr
E illuminance lux 1 lux = 1 lm/m2

ABB | Electrical devices 531

 Annex D: Main physical quantities

Annex D: Main physical quantities and

electrotechnical formulas
Main electrical and magnetic quantities and SI units
Quantity SI unit Other units Conversion
Symbol Name Symbol Name Symbol Name
I current A ampere
V voltage V volt
R resistance Ω ohm
G conductance S siemens G = 1/R
X reactance Ω ohm XL = ωL
XC =-1/ωC
B susceptance S siemens BL = -1/ωL
BC = ωC
Z impedance Ω ohm
Y admittance S siemens
P active power W watt
Q reactive power var reactive volt
ampere
S apparent power VA volt ampere
Q electric charge C coulomb Ah ampere/hour 1 C = 1 A⋅s
1 Ah = 3600 A⋅s
E electric field V/m volt per metre
strength
C electric capacitance F farad 1 F = 1 C/V
H magnetic field A/m ampere per metre
B magnetic induction T tesla G gauss 1 T = 1 V⋅s/m2
1 G = 10-4 T
L inductance H henry 1 H = 1 Ω⋅s

Resistivity values, conductivity and temperature coefficient at

20 °C of the main electrical materials
conductor conductivity temperature

resistivity ρ20 χ20=1/ρ20 coefficient α20
[mm2Ω/m] [m/mm2Ω] [K-1]
Aluminium 0.0287 34.84 3.8⋅10-3
Brass, CuZn 40 ≤ 0.067 ≥ 15 2⋅10-3
Constantan 0.50 2 -3⋅10-4
Copper 0.0175 57.14 3.95⋅10-3
Gold 0.023 43.5 3.8⋅10-3
Iron wire 0.1 to 0,15 10 to 6.7 4.5⋅10-3
Lead 0.208 4.81 3.9⋅10-3
Magnesium 0.043 23.26 4.1⋅10-3
Manganin 0.43 2.33 4⋅10-6
Mercury 0.941 1.06 9.2⋅10-4
Ni Cr 8020 1 1 2.5⋅10-4
Nickeline 0.43 2.33 2.3⋅10-4
Silver 0.016 62.5 3.8⋅10-3
Zinc 0.06 16.7 4.2⋅10-3

532 Electrical devices | ABB

 Annex D: Main physical quantities

Annex D: Main physical quantities and

electrotechnical formulas
Main electrotechnical formulas
Impedance

resistance of a conductor at temperature ϑ

conductance of a conductor at temperature ϑ

resistivity of a conductor at temperature ϑ

capacitive reactance

inductive reactance

impedance

module impedance

phase impedance

conductance

capacitive susceptance

inductive susceptance

admittance

module admittance

phase admittance

+
Z jXL
R
R X +
U -jXC
–

+
Y
jBC
G
U G B +
-jBL
–

ABB | Electrical devices 533

 Annex D: Main physical quantities

Annex D: Main physical quantities and

electrotechnical formulas
Impedances in series
Z = Z1 + Z2 + Z3 + … Z1 Z2 Z3

Admittances in series
1
Y= Y1 Y2 Y3
1 1 1
+ + +…
Y1 Y2 Y3

Impedances in parallel

1
Z= Z1 Z2 Z3
1 1 1
+ + +…
Z1 Z2 Z3

Admittances in parallel

Y = Y1 + Y2 + Y3 + … Y1 Y2 Y3

Delta-star and star-delta transformations

1

Z1
Z13 Z12

Z3 0 Z2

3 2
Z23

Y→∆ ∆→Y
Z1 ⋅ Z2 Z12 ⋅ Z13
Z12 = Z1 + Z2 + Z1 =
Z3 Z12 + Z13 + Z23

Z2 ⋅ Z3 Z12 ⋅ Z23
Z23 = Z2 + Z3 + Z2 =
Z1 Z12 + Z13 + Z23
Z3 ⋅ Z1 Z23 ⋅ Z13
Z13 = Z3 + Z1 + Z3 =
Z2 Z12 + Z13 + Z23

534 Electrical devices | ABB

 Annex D: Main physical quantities

Annex D: Main physical quantities and

electrotechnical formulas
Transformers
Two-winding transformer

Sr
rated current Ir =
3 ⋅ Ur
Sr
short-circuit power Sk = ⋅ 100
uk%
Sk Ir
short-circuit current Ik = = ⋅ 100
3 ⋅ Ur uk%
uk% U2r u% Sr
longitudinal impedance ZT = ⋅ = k ⋅
100 Sr 100 3 ⋅ I2r
pk% U2r p% Sr
RT =
longitudinal resistance ⋅ = k ⋅
100 Sr 100 3 ⋅ I2r

longitudinal reactance XT = ZT2 – RT2

Three-winding transformer
1

Z1

Z3 Z2

3 2

u12 Ur2 1
Z12 = ⋅ Z1 = (Z12 + Z13 – Z23)
100 Sr12 2

u13 Ur2 1
Z13 = ⋅ Z2 = (Z12 + Z23 – Z13)
100 Sr13 2

u23 Ur2 1
Z23 = ⋅ Z3 = (Z13 + Z23 – Z12)
100 Sr23 2

ABB | Electrical devices 535

 Annex D: Main physical quantities

Annex D: Main physical quantities and

electrotechnical formulas
Voltage drop and power

voltage drop

percentage
voltage drop

active power

reactive power
apparent power

power factor

power loss

Caption
ρ20 resistivity at 20 °C
total length of conductor
S cross section of conductor
α20 temperature coefficient of conductor at 20 °C
θ temperature of conductor
ρθ resistivity against the conductor temperature
ω angular frequency
f frequency
r resistance of conductor per length unit
x reactance of conductor per length unit
uk% short-circuit percentage voltage of the transformer
Sr rated apparent power of the transformer
Ur rated voltage of the transformer
pk% percentage impedance losses of the transformer under short-circuit
conditions

536 Electrical devices | ABB ABB SACE - Electrical devices